IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) :/. ^ 1.0 I.I 11.25 i^ Ki^ 1112.2 Ht U£ 12.0 1.8 1-4 ill 1.6 V] <^ 7^ / /J. 'W J^' /'/ y Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 \ o<^ \ \ k iv^ <* >, -"^tiS ^^>. Q ^ '^KO % V^\ ^ ■^ ^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The toti The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D D D D D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagAe Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurie et/ou pelliculAe Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque I I Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiquea en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de coulsur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Reli6 avec d'autres documents r~~1 Tight bi iding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liurq serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distorsiort le long de la marge int6rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, iorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas iti filmies. Additional comments:/ Comnentaires supplimentaires: L'Instltut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m^thode normale de fiimage sont indiquis ci-dessous. □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur □ Pages damaged/ Pages endommagies I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ n Pages restauries et/ou pelliculdes Pages discoloured, stained or foxei Pages dicolor^es, tacheties ou piquies Pages detached/ Pages ditachdes Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Qualiti inigale de I'impression Includes supplementary materit Comprend du materiel supplementaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible The poei of tl film Oris begi the slon othi first sion orii r~~1 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ r~| Pages detached/ r~;] Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ rn Includes supplementary material/ I I Only edition available/ The shal TINI whii Mar diff< entl begi righ reqi met Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont ixi filmies d nouveau de facon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 10X 14X 1SX 22X 9fiy 30X • _y 12X 16X aox 24X 28X 32X The copy ffilmad h«r« hat bean reproduced thank* to the generosity of: Douglas Library Queen's University L'exemplaire filmA f ut reproduit grAce A la gAnArosit* de: Douglas Library Queen's University The Images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or Illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated Impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. Les images suivantes ont AtA reproduites avec ie plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetA de l'exemplaire film6, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commen^ant par Ie premier plat et en terminant soit par la derniire page qui comporte une empreinte d'Impresslon ou d'lliustration, soit par Ie second plat, selcrn Ie cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont flimte en commenpant par la premldre page qui comporte une empreinte d'Impresslon ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle emitreinto. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — ^ {meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Un des symboies suivants apparaftra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon Ie cas: ie symbols —^ signifie "A SUIVRE", Ie symbols V signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure ere filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as rsqulred. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre filmte A des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque Ie document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un seul clichA, il est film6 d partir de i'angle supArleur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut on bas, en prenant ie nombre d'images nAcessalre. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mAthode. 1 2 3 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 LP LLz).T 1% ie>G4 MEMBERS OF THE SENATE Of THB llttivwitjj irf ^0mU. THE HON. JOSEPH C. MORRISON, Chancellor ADAM CROOKS. LL.D., Q.C., Vice-Chancellor THE REV. JOHN McCAUL, LL.D. HON. JAMES PATTON, LL.D., Q.C. JOHN LANGTON, M.A. THE HON. DAVID CHRISTIE, M.L.C. SIR WM. E. LOGAN, F.R.S. JAMES J. HAYES, M.D. THE REV. A. LILLIE, D.D. E. M. HODDER, M.D., F.R.C.S., Eng Presid.n, .r at ^- , » THP wnw TnuxT Tr /^ . , ^■' ^'"**"" of Medical Board. THE HON. JOHN H. CAMERON, Q.C Trea»,ir^r r,f r c. • THE REV. .3. RYERSON D D rw V ^ ^'"''^' THE PRINCIPAL OP QUEEN'S COLLEGE, Kingston THE REV. J. TABAREP, S.,,r;.r%,J„^,Z' J. B. CHERRIMAN, M.A. DANIEL WILSON, LL.D, \ THE REV. JOHN JENNINGS, D.D. \ HON. 0. MOVVAT, V.O. GEORGE HERRICK, M.D. \ IRA LEWIS, M.A. \ LARRATT WM. SMITH, D.C.L. S. 8. MACDONELL, LL.D. THE REV. H. BATE JESSOPP. M A v \ JOHN HELLIWELL, M.A. \ WM. GEO. DRAPER, M.A. 5J688S0 2 UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. MEMBERS OP THE 8EmTE^Continued T. A. McLEAN, M.A. JOHN BOYD, M.A., B.C.L. DANIEL MoMICHAEL, LL.D. JOHN E. THOMSON, B.A. E. C. JONES, B.A. J. D. ARMOUR, B.A. J. J. KINGSMILL, B.A. HON. WM. CAYLEY. REV. W. McCLURE, M.A. REV. R. FYFE, D.D, J. H. MORRIS, M.A. EDWARD BLAKE, M.A., Q.C. C. F. ELLIOT, M.A. EEV. j. BARCLAY, D.D. T. J. ROBERTSON, M.A. REV. W. F. CHECKLEY, M.A. REV. VICAR-GENERAL WALSH. REV. A. CARMAN, M.A. T. H. BULL, M.A. REV. J. DAVISON. REV. DR. HELLMUTH. i?«r,ar_DAVID BUCHAN, Esq. Hfffiatrar— THOMAS MOSS, M.A. Librarian— KEY, A. LORIMER, B.A. Bedel— T. C. JOY. EXAMINERS, 1884. LA.W. Adam Cbooks, Q.C, LL.D. E. FiTzaKaAi,D, M.A., LL.B. MEDICINE. Midwifery and VediealJurisprudence. C.J. rinLBRicK,M,D.,M.R.C.S.,Eng. Surgery and Anatomy \s, T. AiKiNS, M D. Physiology and Comparative Anatomy. M. Barrett, M.D , M.A. Medicine and Therapeutict Uzzxel Oqden, M.D. MEDICINE AND ARTS. Chemistry , Hbnry Croft, D.C.L. miural Ilittory i ]^^^ W. Hincks, F.R.S- ■ I T. J. Cottle, Esq. ARTS. Greek and Latin / '^"^ ^^^- John McCaui,, LL.D. \ Thomas Moss, MA. Malhenatics / J- B, Chehriman, M.A. I Rev. W. Jones, li.A. English and History i ?• .WiJ^*>n, LL.D. \J.A. BotD, M.A. French, German, Italian, and Spanish J i'^^^"'^ Fo«neri, LL D. ^ \ Robert SiJLiavAN, xM.A. Mineralogy and Geology T. S. Hunt M.A., F.R.S. Metaphysics and Ethics / ^^^^- James Dbaven, D.D. I Rev. J. C. Murray, M.A. Oriental Languages H' ^^- HiRschielder, Esq. * I Rev. M. WiLLft, D.D. Meteorology Q. T. KiNasTON,M.A. Civil Engineering T. C. Kkefer, Esq., c.E. UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO, GRADUATES. Diite of Admitcioo. D.C.L. 1850. Croft, H. H. {Hon.) 1852. Crookshank, G (o4.) 1847. Lundy,Rev.P.J.(^rfe«„rfeOT) 1862. Smith, L. W. LL.D. Croaks, A., M.A. Hurlburt, J. Mncdonell, S. S. ^McMichael, D. Patton, J. 'WicksoD, Rev. A. M.D. Beaumont, W. (/7on.) Bovell, J. {Ad tundem.) Boyd, W. Boys, H. {Ad emdem.) Chewett, W. C. Cronyn, J. Desmond, If, Eastwood, W. O. Eastwood, C. S. Freeman, C. Hamilton, J. (ob.) Henry, J. Herrick, G. {Admndem.) King J. {ob.) «AliIIer, T. McKenzie, M.B. {ob.) Nicol, W. B. *0ille, L. S. O'Brien, L.{Ad emdem.) Pfiillips, T. G. Richardson. J. H. Scott. J. {Ad eundm.) Shantz, S. E. Thorburn, J. {AUundem.) «TisdelI, F. B. {»b.) Turner, H., {AJ eundem.) Walker, N. 0. Wanless, J. 1863. 1856. 1858. 18(50. 1858. 1860. 1860. 1848. 1863. 1844. 1851. 1860. 1853. 1851. 1851. 1853. 18-f4. 1864. 1854. 1844. 1859. 1853. 1850. 1859. 1845. 1860. 1850. 1850. 1864. 1859. 1861. 1859. 1859. 1862. 1. Medallist In Metaplysics and Ethici. *• I'Old VledalligtinOftsslci. _. .,!...-, :>itrUaillSI. *. flold Mrdallifit •• fldvsr AledaJlUt. Date of M.D. Admisalon. 1853. Winer, W. 1856. Woodruff, W. M.A. 1849. Baldwin, Rer. E. 1857. Barber, G. A. {ob.) 1858. Barrett, M. 1845. Barron, P. W. 1858. Blake, D. E. 1857. Boulton, J. p. 1868. iBowIby, W. H. 1850. Boyd, J. 1861. ^Boyd.J.A. 1856. lloyd, W. T. 1856. 'Brown, J. I860. Cameron, H. {Ad eundm.) 1856. C&mhie, C. {Ad eundem.) 1858. *Cattenach, A. J. 1854. sciark, A. M. 1858. Craigie, W. 1864. «Cooper, G. 1867. TCrombie, E. 1868. scrombie, M. M. 1863. BCrooks,A. 1849. Crookshank, O. {ob.) 1850. Draper, W. G. 1863. lOEHof. C. P. 1857. "English, C. E. 1860. i^Fitch, B. p. 1867. "Fitzgerald, E. 1858. Francis, W, S. 1861. "Fraser, J. T. 1. Jameson Medallist. ^ ^Silver MedHllU in K?h?4 *""• "** 4. Gold Medallist in Modern u^guaee. . «"'';'»'ne*""n Medallist. ""'K'"'8"» '■''.fnKa,K*''^^-«-'«>'»J»n»p. 8. Gold M,.daliist in Classics. ^eJ'l' r.<*? "«"° ClHssics. and Sliver- iJ'II/^m'I"!"'''" Ethics. ^" "Naturaf?hii;«^^h;:^"^^'"-"«« '"'* U. Gold Medallist In ClLiM. Date of Admiation. UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. QRABVATEa—Conlinutd. MA. 1864. JSFrisby, E. 1864."aibson, J. Morison. 1848. Grasett, Rev. E. 1863, Hatton. J. C. 1850. iHelHwell, J. 1859. Hill, Rev. G. 1859. Ilodgins, T. H. 1860. JHylcomb^ J. W. 1864. "Hubbert, J. 1869. Hume, Eev. R. 1862. Hunter, J. H. 1849. *Je88opp, Rev. II. B, 1858. Jones, C. 1860. 6Kerr, W. U. C. 1860. "Kennedy, G. 1858. 'Kingsmill, N. 1857. Liiwrason, W. L. 1848. Lewis, I. 1864. Light, R.N. 1845. Lightburne, S. 1859. Litton, J. L. (Ad eundem.) 1864. SLoudon, J. 1849. Macdonell, S. S. 1858. Macnabb, A. 1856. «Marling, 8. A. 1868. Montgomery, Rev. D. E.{Ad leundem.) 1864. Morris, J. U. 1859. "AJosa, T. 1850. Murray, Rev. R. (oJ.)' 1857. "McGregor, C. J. 1856 McKeown, J. ih' I. """■ 'i^«L'""^t5n Mathematics 1. Gold Medallist in CIbspIck. S wT"" JI''?"'"'* In Metaphynlre. Ae 6. Gold Medallist in Classics. 8 n„r; »':?•'? '"'^'"Cla.s^c.s. ' " On M M*1" n!"'*" "atll«matio8. OoI,| Meda Ii«t in Classics, and Chan- „ andM^tn'i^an'^™' "*'"-«««« Date of AdmiHion. M.A. 1850. McLean. T. A. 1868. >McLellan, J. A. , I860. Ale Michael D. 1864. '.MoMurriob, W. B 1864. 'McNisb, N. 1868. Oille,L.S. 1859. Paul, CD. 1866. an^ Tr m — —.oOu, LI, rr. 1845. Bamsay, W. 1862. Reeve, W. A. 1848. fiRoaf, J. 1857. Ryerson, E. P. 1861. Sampson, D. A. 1858. 'Sanderson, Rev. J. E. 1848. «Stennett, Rev. W. 1854. TSuUivan, R. 1858. Tassie, W. I)lit« of « -, - Adinliiiun. B.C.L 1847. lloaf, J. 1861. 'Stinson, B. [oh. LL D. npguo, T. ir. Benson, R. L. n»lliune, J, Itliiin, D. Hoys, W. 1858. ^liowlKy, W. H. 18(10. Bowlby, J. W. Cocliriuie, S. II. Crombif, M. M. Cronyn, V. Cross, J. P. Cumin, J. Denison, 0. P. Donroclic, E. J. Douglna, W. Donaldson, J. Duggnn, a. P. 1858. n:nyl,Mh, C. E. 1801. English, L. Fiirewell J. E. Fitzyerald, E. Foster, W. A. llunn, J. V. Ilancook, J. W. 1858. Hoilgins, T. 1860. llodglns, J. O. 1862. Ilolcomb, J. W. 1864. Ellington, J. 1804. Joseph, J. p, 1804. Kennedy, 0. Laird, W. P. Lerinrx, D. I860. 'Livingsione, J. 1862. ■Marling, A. Meredith, W R. Miller. W. V. UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. GRADUATES— ronfffliwi. Dntn nf Adiiiliiklcin. 1863. 1800. .1801, 1850. 1801. 1860. 1859. 1800. 1802. 1800. 1801. 18Ga. 1861. 1804. 1804- 18U4. 1858. 1860. 1860. 1800. 1859 1S04 1803. 1861. LL.D. Moore, Q. E. MoCtiughejr, J. MoDonnId, J. P. O'llricn, W. L. O'Gnrft, M. Osier, B. B. Pnpp«, 0. S. Tenfon, E. Road, P. A. Robortiton, II. ^Sampson, J). A, Sisson, J. Smith, J. P. Smith, 0. T. 'Smith, R. Snelling, R. •Spencer, T. 11. Stftnton, W. I. Staynor, P. II. Stephens, R. P. Stewart, II. D. Stuart, A. II. Upper, M. C. Wood, S. O. Wood, S. 0. (ob.) M.B. *Aikins, M. II. •Barnhnrt, C. E. 1860. 'Bascom, J. 1864. Bell, W. II. Bell, J. ^Bolster, J. Cascaden, J. Constnntinides, P. Covernton, W. II. Dack, T. B. N. *DeGra8Pi, 0. P. 1808. 1858. 1804, 1801. 1801. 180 J. 1800. 1802. 1802. 1861. 1858. 1869. 1862. 1864. 1861. 1863. 1860. 1869. 1861. 1861. 1862. 1802. 1862. 1860. 18U2. 1868. 1859. 1861. 1862. 1862. 1864. 1863. 1803. 1862. 1. OoUl Meaallbt, li. Uo.J MtdHUi.-U 8. Silver Meilallist 4. Qoia -Medallist. i>. Siirvr MednUIUi 1. SilTer Medallist. 2. Silver Mtdaliist. 3. Silver Vledullift. 4. Silver Metfalligt. 6. Uold MeUalliKt. 6. Uold Me. 1858. 1868. 1845. 1848. 1853. 1857. 1857. 1804. 1864. 1862. 1849. 1858. 1845. 1867. 1849. 1850. 1804. 1862. 1864. 1857. 18ol. 1850. 1848. 1862. 1802 1. Gold MedAl list in Cla.«Mc8. 4. S ver Med«\li8tin Natural Scieucefc *• ^",T„*'':«l»^>"t in Classics. ' Villi: u''.^'' If '" MetaphyilM. dei^cis *^*«»''ii'''". and in Evl- ' iii„.„ i, •"■ ; 'iuui-Tn baiignagei, man. ^*'*'*' "' '"^ *''^'''*'« *""*«- UNIV»RgIT¥ Olf TORONTO. aRADUATE6h-.(7o«<»«tt«/. Date of Admiifion. M.B. 1864. Eby, A. 1862. Eokhardt, T. B. 1861. Elliott, J. 1867. "Francis, W. S. 1864. Fulton, J. 1864. Harley, J. 1864. Kelly, M.J. 1859. aKing, J. 1864. Laiigs, M. S. 1860. 'Martyn, DcW, H. 1860. *Morton, E. D. 1863. McAlpint, D, L. 1863. MoCallum, J. 1863. McCool, D. B. 1868. McKay, VV. 1864. «MoLaughlin, J. W. 1864, Newman, J. B. 1864. Nicol, 11. Date of AdmiMion. B.A. 1859. Appelbe, R. S. 1850. lArmour, J. D. 1854. ^Bayley, R, 1845. Beadle, D. W. (ad emdem.) 1864. Bell, J. W. 1868. Bernard, R. 1845. Betbune, N. 1853. Bettridge, W. 1858. Blake, S. H. 1845. Boulton, H. J. 1848. Boulton, J, 1862. SBucban, J. M. 1864. Bucban, H. E. 1853. Bull, S. J. 1857. Bui!, T. II. 1857. *Burn8, If. 1864. sConnor, J. W. 1864. «Crftiff. T n UKIVER5ITT Of TCIONTO. QKADVATES^Conitnutd. IMtAOf AdmlHlOD. 1801. 1850. 1861. 1861. 1868. 1860. 1864. 1862. 1845. 1864. 1868. 1864. 1848. D.A. Qillespie, A. 'Grant, A. J. •Grant, A. •Gront, O. Orajdon, S. (Ad eundtm.) Green, 0. Grovor, T. Hagar, C. Hagerman, J. T. *Harbottle, R. Hector, A. Hill, R. Hudspeth, T. A. (ob.) 1858. BHuggard, J. T. 1861 1848. 1850. 1846. 1858. 1864. 1864. 1849. Hunter, J. H. Hurlbwt, j. Hurlburt, H. Jones, E. C. Jones, H. C. {Ad eundem.) Keefer, W. N. King, J. Kingsmin, J. J. 1863. "Lafferty, A. M. 1868 1862. 1849. 1861. 1864. 1845. (Ob.) ^Le Sueur, W. "Livingstone, R. T. Lorlng, G. T. (ob.) LouDt, S. Macallum, A. •Marsh, Rev. J. W. 1848. "Marsh, Rev. T. W. 1856. Matheson, T. O. 1866. "Matbeson, R. 1853. Meudell, W. 1868. Milroy, W. 1. .Umenoii Medalliot. 2. Gold Medallist In Naturil Sci.>ii(!es and Plvcr Medallist in Metaphysica. 4o 8. Gold Medallist In Metaphysics, .tc.and . „.^T'"«inan in Oriental LanguaK^s. 4. Silver Medallidt in Nitural dcien-es 6. Gdid Medallist in Cliwics. e. Silver Medallist in Oassica and Mathe- matics. 7. Silver Medallist in Classics. o fill''*'" »''^".','.'''* '* i'o'BphyslcB, 4e. 10. Silv- Medallist fti Evidences. U. Gold MedalllBt ia Natural Sciencas. Pate of Admlsalon. B A. ' 1859. »MitolieIl, J. L. 1868. >Mulock, W. 1859. »MoDougall, J. L. 1859. Monearrnt, N. 1857. McDermid, P. 1864. «MoMiIIttn, J. 1862. McFayden, C. 1861. McOee, R. 1849. 'McKenzie, R. , j. o. D. 1849. McKtnxie, M. B. (ob.) •McMurcby, A. McNaughton, T. ^MoWilliam, W. •MoWilliams, W. Q. •Ogden, I. 0. (ob.) 1863. "Oidright, W. 1857. "Oliver, W. 1861. "Ormiston, D. 1804. Patte8on,T. C. (Adtundem.) 1857. Preston, Rev. J. A. 1857. "Rattray, W. J. 18G2. "Reeve, R. A. 1861. "Robarts, Rev. T. T. 1864. "Robertson, T. J. 1862. Roger, W. M. 1861. Ross, J. B. 1864. Rnssin, J. 1846. "Robinson, C. I860. Rock, W. 1857. "Ross, J. 1861. 1858. 1862. 1863. 1860. 6 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 1«. 17 18. ■ n^^ W<'d» list in Natural Sciences. ■ n M if^?' :' '^ M'^*" Languages. Silver MedalliHtin Mod.rn LanijuainML Silver Medallist in Metapbysiw, |^ and Prince's Prizeman. ' ■• Si ver Medrtilist in Evidences. I l«!; '«^ '!l!'" *" »'«thHn>atio*. f ^«' J^"^*'""* '" Metapbys cs. Silver Medallist in Metaphysics. Oo d Medallist in Metaphysics. r«M u*^*,,'-''?" ^''^'''•" '^"nguages. Gold Medallist in Natural Sciences ^'';'«',*'« list In Ethics. 6. Silver Medallist in Mathomatici 7. Qold M«dallist in Matbomaties. DIPLOMAS IN CIVIL ENQINBEBINQ. 1851. Robertson, C. F. (Prizeman.) 1862. Irwin, B. 1868. Bellairs, W. G. (Prizeman.) DIPLOMAS IN AGBICTILTUBE. 1860. Farewell, J. C. (Prizemw.) 1862. Forneri, C. C. 1862. Thompson, J. B. (Prizeman.) 10 UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. UNDERGRADUATES. Sate of Aiimission. 1857. Adams, R. W. 1859. Alma, T. 1864. Betts, J. 1864. Brough, C. A. 1860. Burnlmm, J. 1866. Cawtlira, II. 1857. Clarke, W. 1859. Clarke, A. A. 1860. D'Aub'gny, P. 1857. Dew; r, J. 1861. Dixon, T. 1862. Duncombe, D. ] 1859. Dunn, J. M. 1860. Freel, E. 1862. Frost, A. 1857. Ghent, S. 11. 1861. Gilbert, J. H. 1861. Glassco, J. T. 1864. Green, T. J. C. 1859. Ham.lton, J. C. 1857. Howell, A. 1857. Jones, H. C. 1863. Kelly, M. J. 1858. Kerr, J. W. 1859. Kerr, W. J. 1867. Lambert, W. 1864. Land, R. C. A. FACULTY OF LAW. Date of Admission. 1857. Lapsley, W. 1864. Lash, Z. A. 1864. Lillie, J. A. 1864. Masterson, C. M. 1860. McCaul, G.L. 1859. MrGlashan, J. 1858. McKelcan, F. 1860. McKellar, P. D. 1859. McKenzie, W. L. 1859. McLennan, D, 1857. McNaughton, A. T. 1860. Peebles, J. 1862. Preston, J. 1803. Preston, D. IL 1864. Richardson, W. 1856. Scott, A. F. 1800. Selby, S. B. J. 1857. Shaw, G. C. 1861. Smith, A. F. 1861. Smith, R. W. 1864. Smith, D. S. 1856. Sullivan, W. B. 1864. Sullivan, D. L. 1861. Warren, E, 1864. Webb, E. 1859. Wethey, H. 1864. Williams, A. FACULTY OP MEDICINE. 1863. Aberdein, R. 1862. Bulmer, T. S. 1863. Anderson, H. 1862. Burnett, D. 1863. Beith, A. 1862. Burnbam, E. L 1861. Bigelow, A. 1863. Burns, J. H. 1863. Bowmai), J. W. 1863. Carlyle, J. 1863. Buohanaa, C. H. 1861. Cassady, J. UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 11 UNDERGRADUATES— Con/mM«i. Date of AdmiBsion. 1864 1868 1863, 1863, 1858, 1861, 1861. Cttssidy. J. J. Chapman, 0. W. Chrysler, W. H. Clerke, C. H. Donaldson. J. G. DeLaHaye, A. .V.W.. Douglas, C. _ 1864. Douglasi /.rvT. 1864. Eccles, F. R. 1858. Farewell, J, E. 1864. Farewell, W. G. 1862. Fife, J. A. 1861. Forrest, R. W. 1S63. Goodell, R. H 1862. Gouinlock, W. v.. 1863. Grote, 0. W. 1864. Gwyn, 11. C. 1863. Harrison, P. 1861. Henry, J. 1862. Hodder. P. W. 1861. Holme, J. 1862. Holme, W. R. 1861. Hornibrooke, E. 1863. Howe, J. 1863. Hughes, J. 1864. Hughes. A. H. 1862. Jackes, A. G. 1864. Jacques, T. 1862. King, R. 1863. King, P. 1861. Kitchen, E. 1863. Langrill, J. A. 1863. Lynch, J. 1861. McCarthy, J. L. Q. 1864. McConnell, J. 1863. McCulloch, J. 1863. McDonald, A. E. 1864. McFarlane, L. 1864. Mclntyre, N. 1863. McKenna, C. 1862. McPherson, A. G. 1862. Miokle, W. * Date of Admlgflion. 1862. Miller, W.H. 18G1. Milne, W. 1864. Montgomery, J. 1864. Morton, W. 1861. Munns, W. 18G3. Murray, R. G. 1864. Newton, J. H. 1864. Oronhyatekha. 1864. Palmer, R. V. 1863. Passmorc, W. J. 1863. Pentland, W. R. 1863. Penwarden, J. 1861. Perchard, J.;P. 1864. Quinlan, J. ' 1862. Rae, F. 1858. Ramsay, R. 1800. Renwick, H. 18G1, Richardson, J. 18G0. Robertson, C. 18G0. Roche, A. 18G3. Ross, W. 18G2. Scholfield, D. T. 18G1. Shantz, S. E. 1861. Sinclair, J. 18G1. Smale, S. B. 1863. Smith, D. 1858. Sparrow, J. W. 18G0. Standish, J. 1859. Stinson, C. W. 18G2. Stubbs, J. 1860. Sutton, H. H. 1863. Tempest, W. F. 1864. Tennant. 18G3. Thorburn, R. 1864. Tyiwhitt, J. 1858. Wall, J. 18G3. Wallace. J. 1861. White, T. 1861. Wilkins, G. 1864. Workman, J. 185G. Young, S. H. 1^ UNIVBRSITT OF TORONTO. UNDERGRADUATES—Confj/iMcrf. FACULTY OF ARTS. I Date of Admission, Date of Aamission. 1860. ^llirrt CKwiuli, p. (Ad 1862 Byers, M. 1863. Adams, J. l^eundem.) 1861 Cameron, A 1860. Alexander, R. H. 1858 Campbell, A. -1864. Amos, W. 1861. Campbell, A. P. 1868. Anderson, A. 1853. Campbell, P. 1857. Andrew, A. 1861. Campb^JUJ. 1858. Andrews, H. A. 1864. V Campbell, J. . 1863. Austin, J. 1864. Carney, R. - 1859. Bain, W. 1858. Carroll, W. A. 1861. Baldwin, R. 1864. Carruthcrs, G. F 1862. Baldwin, R. R. 1859. Cassady, J. 1860. Ballantyne, W. D. 1864. Cassels, A. - 1861. Barber, R. 1861. Cassels, W. G. P 1861. Barbour, W.T. 1864. Chase, G. A. - 1862. Barker, P. M. 1861. Chisholm, W. R. 1862. Barron, J. 1861. Christie A. J. 1856. Bates, N. 1862. Clark, H. 1860. Bearman, E. C. 1860. Cleary, R. 1869. Bell, W. C. 1859. Coleman, E. 1862. Bell, C. W. 1863. Connon, C. H. 1861. Bemiss, D. 1859. Corbett, G. 1858. Bethune, J. 1861. Corbould, C. 1861. Bielby, P. 18G4. Coyne, J. H. - ^ 18G/. Brigg, E. M. 1859. Cowan, S. 1861. Black, D. I860. Croly, J. E. 1862. Bowes, J. 0. 1864. Crozier, J. - 1858. Boys, W. 1863. Currie, C. D. 1861. Bowers, J. E. 1860. Cutten, H. II. 1860. Bigg. W. R. 1852. Davidson, W. 1861. Brisbin, B. 1862. Davidson, G. 1857. Brodie, J. 18G1. DelaMater, H. 1857. Brown, W. 1864. DelaMater, R. A. 1858. Brough, R. R. 18G2. Delamere, T. D. >1864. Bruce, J. 1862. Denroche, H. M. 1862. Brunei, G. 1856. Dick, A. 1863. Bryce, G. 1861. Dickie, T. 1859. Buckland, W. G. 1864. Dickson, G. -. 1859. Budd, S. A. 1858. Dill, A. 1864. Burnfield, 0. 1860. Dixon, A. 1858. Burnham, Q. A. 1862. DobsoU, R. L. 1862. Butler, T. P. 1859. Donaldson, J. UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. 13 DNDERGRADUATES-Con 1864. Hamilton, A. 1859. Hastie, A. 1863. Hill, A. C. 1862. Hill, H.- p. 1861. Hill, J. - 1864. Hodge, G. 1861. Hodgson, J. 1860. Holme, J. C. 1862. Holmes, W. R. 1863. Hope, R. I860. Hopkin, J. W. 1863. Hudson, R. S. 1856. Hume, H. H. 18G2. Hunter, D. 1858. Hurlbert, J. 1860. Jackes, C. B. Dat«of Admission I860. 1864. 1863. 1860. 1858. 1860. 1860. 1861. 1861. 1862. 1860. 1861. 1864. 1859. 1858. 1861. 1858. 1859. 1861. 1859. 1863. 1859. 1863. 1860. 1864. 1860. 1860. 1861. 1862. 1857. 1861. 1861. 1860. 1861. 1861. 1862. 1861. 1861. 1857. 1860. 1861. 1863. 1864. Jackson, J. P. Jamieson, C. »• Jeffers. Johnstone, J, Johnson, M. M. Jolly, J. W. Jones, S. A. Junor, D. Kay, W. Kennedy, A. Kerr, G. Kerr, B. Killmaster, J. , Kilpatrick, G, King, W. 0. King, A. McP. Kirkland, T. Laidlaw, R, J. Lash, Z. A. Lazier, S. P. Lazier, W. D. Ledyard, T. Ledyard, W. E. Lount, G. Macdonald, W. - Magee, J. Malcolm, J. Malloy, W, Mewbum, H. Miller, A. E. Miller, J. H. Millar, W. Mills, J. H. Mitchell, G. A. Moore, W. Moderwell, M. C. Morgan, J. C. Morrison, J. Muir, T. Mulholland, J. Mulholland, J. W. P. Munro, W. Murdoch, A. _ 14 UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. UNDERGRADUATES-Cono^olfir}v odvr^ riyefiovL & Bolt), eTreadai, firj ^fia^' dydr/y 60ev ovx olov^ re eo-rafc e^eXdelv /3ovXoi/X7jv B" av, ukovto^ airmv Kvfiov. XaOeiv avrov aTreXOwv o ov Bvvarov iariv. 'A\\' eryw <^ixi ravra fiev (f)Xvapia<; eivai- Bokci Bi fioi, avSpa^ eXOovTa^ irpo^ Kvpov. oirive^ iirLTTjBeioi. i\,iav a0v iiro roO 7rarphv Xenophon, Anabaau, i., c. 9. 1. Karewiiirrer,. Force of Karh here ? 2. Kao-TwXoO irehiov. Where situate ? 3. ^pvyia^. How subdivided ? 4. arreecra^iyov K6pov. What is the construction ' cei^b^^tr;rl!nrtit^li^^^^^^ 6. Trpoo^To. What is the form in common Greek ? 7. /^6('oi.9. Give degrees of comparison. 8. Distinguish between Kal d and et Koi. ^' "^""''P^' ^"^ - T«/,ai/^6.o,. Explain the idiom. ■ 1^ 10. ToaovTov ypovov. Why ftccusativo ? 11. KaTaye7<''tt^. Supply tho ellipsis. 12. Parse : ttXc/o rov, /rirciVotTo, uvroo-p^otTO, c'/Xoi/to, yepoiv- TO, Trpd^eiau, el'a. 13. Mci tion any other historical works by Xenophon. 14. Form the cor narativo and superlative of: rap^i/?, ixBpo^, oKiyo^j pnSios, fieyu'i. ■'1.1 min\}tt:uit9 of ^Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. MATKTOULATION. LATIN. Uxaminets:!^^'^' ^^^^i McCaul, LL.D. \ Thomas Moss, M.A. Translate : ^ HsDC ubi dixit, pauUulum commoratiH, signa canere jubet, atque instructos ordines in looum a luum deducit. periculo animus amphor esset, ipso pedes cKercitum pro oco atque copus instruit. Nam, uti planit, .s erat in^e? 8.n. tros montjs et ab dexterarupis aspera, .cto cohortis colW^ Ah L"''' ^^^•'^"'^^""^ «igna in sub.idio arctius collocat. Ab his centunones, omnia lectos vt evocatos pr^terea ex gregariis militibus optumum que, .quearma: turn in primam aciem subducit. C. Manlium .n dextera Faesu anum quendam in sinistra parte curare j. bet fnse belTo rT V^T' P-P'-^uila^n assi i 'qZ bello Cimbrico C. Man us in exerciSu habuisseaicebTtu^ At> ex altera parte C. Antonius, pedibus ^cr >r m^nA pTmhtifTl "^\"''^^ ^- ^«^-- legl"^: Uum peiraittit. Illo cohortis veteranas, quas turau i causa suSi's'TcIt" t""^^' P"^ '^^ e'etlum^exercuum n subsidus locat. Ipse equo circumiens, unumquemaue ToZTZT.f-'''' '"''^^"'•' ^°Sat, ut' memrerinTs contra la rones inermis, pro patria, pro liberis, pro aris atqne focis su.s certare. Homo m litaris, quod anpZ SrcurmV"'"l"^-'^"^ P^^^^^^- au^lega^f u f'li'l.':!'^. ^^S"^ gJ?"^ ^n exercitu fuerat. plerosoue '^^;. x.;;;-.aque eoruiu tortia noverat ; ea commemorando mihtum aniraos accendebat. commemorando Sallust, Catilina, c. 59. 1. Parse signa^ pedeSj ah dextera^ ampUua anno8 tngintaj prcelio, tumulti causa. 2. What examples in this extract of " the ablative abso- lute?" S. Mark the quantity of the penultimate of paullulunty deducit, collocate colonis, neguihat, latrones. 4. Oeto cohort IS. How many cohorts in a legion ? How was each cohort divided ? 5. Centuriones. What was the designation of the chief centurion of a legion ? 6. Fsesulanum. Where was Feesulee ? 7. Bello Cimhrico. Give a brief account of it. 8. C. Antonius. What oflSce did he hold ? Who was his colleague ? 9. Distinguish appello and nomino, proslium, pugna^ and acies, prsefectus^ legatus^ and prator, tumultus and helium. II. 1. Decline fJia^ domus, hoe, vis, iter, senex. 2. What is meant by " apposition ?" 8. Compare pulcher, leviSf similis, parvus^ nequam, henevolus. 4. What deponent verbs govern the ablative ? 5. Conjugate mordeo, spargo, tollo, pendo, gigno, soleo. 6. Give a list of verbs Avhich govern the genitive. III. Translate : * Cuncta equidem tibi, Rex, fuerit quodcumque, fatebor Vera,' inquit : ' neque me Argolica de gente negabo : Hoc primum ; nee, si raiserum fortuna Sinonem Finxit, vanum etiam mendacemque improba finget. Fando aliquod si forte tuas pervenit ad aures Belidse nomen Palamedis et inclyta fama Gloria : quern fais^ su' proditione Felasgi Insontem, infando indioio, q^uia bella vetabat, Bemisere neci ; nunc cassum lumine lugent ; Illi me comitem et consanguinitate propinquum Pauper in arma pater primis hue misit ab annis : Dum stabat regno incoluinis, reguraque vigebat * Conciliis, et nos aliquod nomenque decusque Gessimus. Invidia postquam pellacis Ulixi (Haud ignota loquor) superis concessit ab oris ; Afflictus vitam in tenebris luctuquo trahebam,* Et casum insontis mecum indignabar amici. Nee tacui demens ; et me, fors si qua tulisset, Si patrios unquara remeassem victor ad Argos, Promisi ultorem ; et verbis odia aspera movi. ' Hinc mihi prima mali labes ; liinc semper Ulixes Criminibus terrere novis ; hinc spargere voces In valgum ambiguas, et quserere conscius arma. Nee requievit enim, donee Calchante ministro— Sed quid ego haec autem nequi(iquam ingrata revolve ? Quidve moror, si omnes uno ordine habetis Achivos Idque audire sat est ? jamdudum sumite poenas : ' Hoc Ithacus velit, et magno mercentur Atridse.' Virgil, uEneid, ii., vv. 77-104. 1. Parse neci, cassum lumine, afflictus. me, in v. 94, terrere^ veht. ^ , , , 2. Belidee. What is the origin of this name? What dimculty as to quantity ? 3. Falsa sub proditione. Explain the meanintr 4. Pelasgi. Who ? Why so called ? 5. Primis ah annis. Of what ? 6. Argos. In what part of Peloponnesus ? State the other divisions. 7. Write brief notices of Palamedes, Ulysses, and the ■Atridce, ^ 8. Calchante ministro. By what name is the figure 0. Give the laws of the quantity of final as, es, is, os and us. ' > > *'«> SlnfUctKiiUji of t!rocotito. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. MATRICULATION. LATIN. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. ET • f Rev. John McCaul, LL.D. ■^^^^*^^^*-'i Thomas Moss, M.A. Translate : I. Sic te diva potens Cypri, Sic fratres Helense, lucida sidera, Ventorumque regat pater Obstrictis aliis prjeter lapyga, Navis, quae tibi creditum Debes Virgilium, finibus Atticis Reddas incolumem, precor, Et serves animse dimidiura meao. Illi robur et jes triplex Circa pectus erat, qui fragilem truci Commisit pelago ratem Primus nee timuit praecipitem Africum Decertantem Aquilonibus, Nee tristes Hyadas nee rabiem Noti, Quo non arbiter Hadrise I\/l *i 1 #\*. ^■r\\l f\wr\ (^M«« »^rt»%«*«/\ ^Tiili* T*»rt4'0 XTXu-jui, luIxClC DCU pOiiClU T UiU llclu. Quern mortis timuit gradum, Qui siccis oculis monstra natantia, .i. If: P.-t; Ti iii Qui vidit mare turgidum et Infames scopulos Acroceraunia ? Nequicquam Deus abscidit Prudens Oceano dissociabili Terras, si tamen impige Non tangenda rates transiliunt vada. Horace, Odes, i, 3, vv. 1-24. ^.fh^^^^^'^ *^® following words governed— ee, CyprL hot, fimbus, zlli, Aquilonihus f 2. State the geographical position of Cmrua, Attica, Uadria^ Acroceraunia. 3. Fratres Helensc ; ventorum pater. What were their names ? ^ 4. Give the Latin designations of the winds from eieht points of the compass. ° 5. Reddas. Why in subjunctive ? 6. Write a brief account of the Argo. 7. Hijadas. What was their Latin name ? 8. Give scales of the metres in this ode. 9. Give scales of the metres in the Alcaic stanza. m II. 1. Distinguish ohlltus and bhUtus, sede and sede, vinci- turmd vmcitur, nota and nota, labor smd labor, iacerent and jaeerent. '^ 2. What verbs take a double accusative after them ? 3. Distinguish os, oris and os, ossis, vas, vadis and vas vasts, career and carceres, littera and litterx, opera and operse, quccritur and queritur. 4. Explain the use of the interrogative particles utrum auj ne, and num. ' 5. Distinguish dolus, fraus, and fallacia, segrego, se- pono, and sejungo, extemplo, repente, and subito. 6. What is oratio ohliqua ? How are the moods chanced When a speech is transferred to that form ? . 1-24. '» Oypriy Atticaj 3re their >m eight , vmci- icerent or d vasy 'a and itrum, 10, 86- anged Translate ; Netamen ignores variorum jura dierum • Ille Nefastus erit, per quem trk v^.l -i Fastus erit, pe; quem^i:geteb7tti ''"'"' ' Nonarurn tutela deo%aret. Omnibus stis Ne fallare cave, proximus Ater er t ^ Trnt'TV''-' ^"'^ ^'^ Roma kiebus Damna sub adverso tristia Marte tuli H^c mihi dicta semel, totis h^renia fastis Ne senem rerum scindere cogar, erunt ' Ecce tibi faustum, Germanice, nuntiat annum Inque meo primus carmine JanSadest' Jane biceps, anni tacite labentis orLo * Solus de superis qui tua terga vides' Ovid, Fasti, i., w. 45-70. 2. Tna verba. What ? 3. What are dies intercisi ? 4. Populum includere seiih'pa civaKTt' Irjvbe veov KXiairjOev e/Sav KyjpvKe^ ayovTeii, deiKea. II. Translate : T(o 7 o)pd(Ta-aTO, dXloio, BiKd^cfieVf iiriiXTreo. ^ 3. Derive : dpyvpoire^a. Keprofiio^, BoXofujTfj^, wpoApwv, aXo')(pdiir)v' 6 U p: olp^^a, ^p.e(^€ro uiOtp- o) iro-rroL rjpaXalij pe 7raXal6ara 0ia0' kdveL. -T^Xepo, hvpvpcSrj,, 6, pamoaiipr) iK^Kaaro, Kat pavr€vop€vo, Kareyi^pa KvKXd>7r€(Taiv' 09 poc e'jrri^. * ev0a8 eXeyaetfr ^t/^i, aai Ill" i m: n? dpa ^(avi'iaavre, Kaff "ttttwu dt^avre, \€tpd<; T a\\};Xwf Xa^eriju kuI mcrdiiaavTO, "VivO' avre FXau/cro KpofiBrjs' 0ptVa? efe\cTO Zeu?, '^0«? 7rpo«? TuBd^tjv Aiofii'jhea T€v')(e d/jL€i0ev Xpvaca '^aXKelwv, eKaTOfx^oi evvea^oifov- "VjKTMp 8' OS ^Kaid'i TC Trv\a dpa fiid'j(3r](nv, &c. Explain the allusion. 4. What were the sentiments of the heroic age vrith respect to the duties of hospitality ? 5. ^ptW? i^ikero Zev^. Mention any attempts of critics to explain the apparent meanness of this sentiment. 6. Parse and give the forms in Attic Greek of : ieiv(ov* 'E« TToXefiov dviovra' (pipoi S" hapa ^poToevra KreiVa? S}]L0v dvlpa, %apei7/ 8e ^peva MTrjp" ''XI9 elTTwv dXoxoto ^iXi]^ iv %e/3(Tif isdijKev UalS" koV rj S" dpa /jLIU KrjcoBei Be^aro koXttw AaKpvoev yeXdcraaa. lloai^ B' iXeijae vot]aa7]/jLi Trecjivy/Jbivov efifievac uvBp&p, Ov KUKov, ouBe fi6V i(rdXbv, iv^jv rd irpoiTa yivrjTai, 'AXX' ek oIkov iovcra rd a avrr]^ epya KoiiL^e, *Io"t6j' t' r}XaKdT7]v re, kuI dfi(pLTTo\oi iirot^eaBac- UoXcfio^ S' auSpeaai fieXy^u Uaaip^Jfiol 8e /xaXiara, toI '\X{(p iyryeydaaiv." ''nlX7f olKUV^e /3€J3t]Ket 'EvrpoTraXi^ofieur}. OaXepov Kara huKpu x^ovca. Alyjra 8' tireiO' iKaue B6/j,ou<{ evuaierunuTa^ "i:KTopo<{ duBpo(f)uvoio, Ki)^,jaaTo 8" tyZuOt -rroXXas ' hp.(j)i.'nuXov'^,jfi(Tiv 8e yoou irarTtjcnv ivMpaev. Aifihf hi ^a)bif y6ov"KKTopa m tvl oUtp' Ou yap fiiv tT tijjavTo virorpoTrov tK TroXefioco "l^ea-daij Trpo(f)vyuvTa p,ho^ KaX x^ipa^ 'Axaiwv. Iliad, VI., vv. 47G-502. 1. 'I\tou. Why in genitive ? 2. 8acfiovc7}. Explain the signification of this epithet. 3. ra a avrfj^ k'pya. Translate into Latin. 4. "AiSi. What was the Homeric idea of Hades ? 5. Distinguish between civjjp ajid avepoiiroK 6. Line 479 {kuI irore ri^. &c.) Explain the construc- tion. in. 1. To whom is the invention of the Greek alphabet ascribed ? Bj whom are additions said to have been made ? Whence were the forms of the breathings derived ? 2. What do you understanr i 1 a , 1 1 ing and annoying the reviving state. The Roman Cato, who was infatuated by a blind hatred of Carthage, partly perhaps because the Carthaginians had rejected his proffered mediation between them and Masinissa, and partly from a real, though unfounded fear of the growing power of Carthage, urged in every speech he made in the senate the necessity of crushing the African republic. Masinissa, who well knew the feelings of the party at Eome hostile to Carthage, and was sure not only of impunity, but of support and protection, increased his own dominion at the expense of Carthage, and by constant disputes and vexations drove the Carthaginians to the necessity of defending their rights by force of arms, because Rome, when appealed to, either delayed pronouncing sentence, or decided in favour of the aggressor. The Romans, gladly seizing the opportunity, charged the Carthaginians with having broken the peace. The people of Carthage implored their mercy ; and to assure them that they had no hostile intentions, they not only sent three hundred of their noblest citizens as hostages to Rome, but delivered up all their ships and arms. This happened in B.C. 149; and when all this was done, the Romans further demanded that Car- thage should be razed to the ground, and that the inhabitants should build a new town for themselves at a distance of many miles from the sea. The treacher- ous and insolent nature of this demand drove the people to despair and madness ; they resolved to perish under the ruins of their own houses rather than yield to such insolence. A bold patriotic spirit seized all ranks and all ages, and the women cheerfully sacrificed all their finery upon the altar of their country. The whole city was at once changed into a military camp, temples were at once transformed into manufactories of arms, and nothing was spared that could serve to deliver the country from its impending doom. III. In the high-towering poplar thus swinging, My harp! hang suspended at ease ; Thy chords at soft intervals ringing, As swept by the hand of the breeze. The blue vault its luH beauty displaying, Not a cloud the pure scther o'ershades; While in sighs his soft presence betraying, The greeu foliage young Zephyr pervades. m Thus I leave thee to murmur and quiver As waked by the slow-rising wind; While here by the side of the river I repose, on soft verdure reclined. Ah! along the horizon dark scowlino-, What tempest-bred shadows appeiu'! Clouds! clouds rise incessantly rolling; Hark! the storm rushes loud on my' ear. Oh ! my harp, ray companion, my treasure, Let us rise, let us hasten away ! 'Tis thus fly the phantoms of pleasure; Thus fade our bright hopes in decay. J- % I ntmtvm^ oc ^rotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18fi4. MATRICULATION. GREEK-LAW. Examiners :\ S'^^* ^'^"^^ McCaul, LL.D. \ Thomas Moss, M.A. I. Translate : airiot ray KXrjpovofirp KaraXtTr^v d7ro\a{>eiv a^TT??, a Jr^e raro CO, errraerv, rye,6f.euo, 6 ^al, red.'^^erac, dial TOP ^ev evrv^ovvra i-rrl rco Traihl i^elvov '6pa, r^/roO o^a? auTco KpoKrj, eKpifiaro. roi,, fxkv rydp -rrepl rtov '6oL ("^ «7ro. emovrayu dyy^Xcou re. kuX v^^perL. XAP V^-avToc, ^apd rhv ^lov, ^) rl i.elvo earcv, o5 Jrll Zai^rir"""""^ ^^^^- "^^^ 'y^^'' '"'^^ ^aaCxArj Tr T' ' T? '^^^^''f^oviaTaroL elvat SoKOvacv, ^^co rov Vhmv rh upcaph evp^aec nrpoa6vTa ai^J,,, c^^/3ov9, koL i I Tapa'xa'it koI fila-rj, koI im^ov\av IBlCOT&U aV €17]. LuciAN, Charon. i ■Sri" 1. iroii'^a-eiev. What part of the verb ? How used in Attic Greek ? 2. avTrj<;. (line 4). With what does this word agree ? Why in the genitive ? 3. ^OXvfjLTTia. What case, and why ? Mention the names of the other great games of Greece. 4. itcKOfii^ovra. What is the equivalent Latin word ? 5. Parse the following words, and give the future and second aorist active, and the perfects active and passive of the verba from which they come : fMcidoi. e^ei, xo^pf^v, hcKev, redv^^eraL, opa, evprjcreL. 6. Parse : iinOd'i, ^7r'o"TaTo, yevo/xiva), dOXrjTov, expi- /Liaro, ifKeiw, Trivdtj, IBiwtmv. 7. Conjugate the present of elfxt through all the moods. 8. Decline e??? iyco, ovto<;, '^11O'O.- i'^CO TTCOTTOTe €i<\ OXvi-iriaVi AHjVIi T( OVV ' 6e(opi](Tei<; varepov rd roiavra Be TroXXd irpoaKelaOat afxeivov. Kal iplarevae Be virep Tfj6- ^r](f)i(rjj,at o )(€KpaTL8oVf aXKa Kal VTa ypovov '■rixe Be ttv^., ]/Mepa<;, Kal 'AXA.* ovBe \J[. Tl n?m • — I — - J ■po(rK€i(Tdat 'ipvac 7rpo9 I fxo{paLa,xaTa ypdcf^cov kuI avfi^ov\e6cou, Kal arparv- Kara fvXa,, ^al roc, 8/i^ot, ' IBla, 'Ll Kocvr, •rrda-f uKpo-rroXec^ Kepavvov iv rfj Be^ul exovra, Kal uKrlva, i^c TV Keavcbcrac ai^rhv xpvaok , arecf^dvov, a^^epov Ilovv- am, rpayfoc, KaivoW {dxBi^va, yhp Bl avrov Bel rvfiepov ra ^tovCa^a). n-rre r^p yv^b^v ^rjuia, 6 fypTccp, avyyevp, airov dy^carel,, Kal ^^aOyr^T ai^rov Z' '^"^W P'/To,^ dpccro, ^Tlfxcou, Kal rd dXXa Trdvra Beaoc^ Kac rov mhv i^ovXa^v dyayelv Japl ovoiMajil[:iij,a>va^v6ixaKa. ' ^ ' '^^ LuciAN, Timon. 1. ^vvei\ey/jbivo<;. Parse. 2. at povXal ufi(f)6Tepai. Explain, and give a brief account of each. . 3. fioc'pa *■'• anLTilliT^/^^^li"?' which join the extremities of two equal and parallel straight lines towards the same parts are them- selves equal and parallel. (Prop. 33, B. I.) Define a parallelogram, and state what additions to the definition are sufficient to constitute the figure a squa e an oblong, and a rhombus respectively. square, an 3. Parallelograms on the same base and between Tthe samn parallels are equal to one another. (Prop. 35, B. L) I i A B D, A b c df are two parallelograms such that B lies in A h, and D in ^1 «/; if point E be taken in a h c so that cL\ AD are i'(|ual, the piiralleloH^ram of which EB, Ed are adjacent sides will be equal to tlie diflcrencc of the two. 4. If a straight line be divided into any iwoparls, the squares on the whole line and one of the )iarls are equal to twice the rectangle conluii;ed by the whole and that part, together with the square on the other part. (Prop. 7, B. II.) Slate the geometrical propositions which are equivalent to the algebraic identities, (2) {x-i/y=x'+f-2x7/, (3) (a:+3/)»+(a,— ^)'=2x'4-V- 5. To divide a given straight line into two parts, so that the rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts may be equal to the square on the other part. (Prop. 11, B. II.) The difference between the two parts is double that between the line joined in Euclid's construction and the given line. 6. Equal straight lines in a circle are equally distant from the centre; and those which are equally distant from the centre are equal to one another. (Prop. 14, B. III.) If two equal straight lines in a circle cut each other, the segments of one are respectively equal to those of the other. 7. In equal circles, equal angles stand on equal arcs, whether they be at the centres or circumferences. (Prop. 26, B. III.) If two equal circles cut each other, and through one point of section a line be drawn to cut the circles, the arcs between the other point of section of the circles and the points of section made by this line are equal, two and two. 8. From a given circle to cut off a segment containing an angle equal to a given rectilineal angle. (Prop. 34, B. III.) Also, to cut ofl such a segment by a line which passes through a given point. 9. If from any point without a circle two straight lines be drawn, one of which cuts the circle, and the other touches it ; the rectangle contained by the whole line which cuts the circle and the part of it without the circle, is equal to the square on the line which touches it. (Prop. 36, B. III.) 10. To inscribe a circle 4, B. IV.) in a given triangle. (Prop. If the points of contact be joined, and circles be in- scribed in the three outer triangles thus formed, the centres will lie on the circumference of the original circle. 11. To describe an isosceles triangle, having each of the angles at the base double of the third angle. (Prop. 9, B. IV.) In what cases can an isosceles triangle be divided by a straight line into two triangles also isosceles? 12. To inscribe a regular hexagon in a given circle. (Prop. 15, B. IV.) This hexagon is half the circumscribed equilateral tri- angle. fr + mni\)tvm» of SToronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. MATRICULATION. MATHEMATICS, II.-ARITHMETIC AND ALGEBRA. FOR HONORS. Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B.A. {Algelraical symbols must not he nsed in the first six questions.) 1. Multiply together 172814412 and 987654321. (Additional marks will he given if this is done in three lines.) 2. Whence does it appear thata v.ugar fraction may ahvav, be reduced enher to a terminated or\ circulatinrdec mal Explam how to determine by inspection which kind of decTm J any given fraction will produce. Reduce to decimals ^^ t and express as vulgar fractions in thei. lowest terms'y&Aj' 15'6013789- ^-ViJGi, 3. What is an aliquot part? Find by " practicn " the value of (i) 1589 bushels at $3.75 per bushel, (ii) 1 ton 6 cwt. 2 qrs. 6 lbs. 4 oz. at »17.13 per ton. 4. Explain what is meant by interest and discount. Find the time for which the discount on a certain sum of money will be equal to the interest on the same sum for a year, the rate of interest in both cases being 5 per cent. 5. What is meant by saying that gold is at a premium in the United States ? If the premium on gold be 105, find the discount on American treasury notes. I purchase in Toronto American silver on which there is a discount of 4 per cent., and taking it to New York where gold and silver are both at a premium of 80, I there buy Americm paper money with the silver; gold falling to 150, I buy gold with my paper money, and upon my return to Toronto find that I have made just enough to pay my expenses, which were 3120 in Canadian currency. What was the sum origi- nally invested? 6. What is meant by "the Funds?" Explainlwhy the English funds rose on the birth of the Prince Imperial of France A person holds stock in the English 3^ per cents, which are at 98 to the amount of £1500 sterling. This he transfers to Canadian Government 6 per cents, which are at 105; find the alteration in his income in dollars, if £1 sterling is worth ^'[m '"■'if m 7. Multiply a;'-7a;+6 by x'+3x^i, and divide the result by £c' — 3x4-24. o rr J ... tn n m4-n ». It m and n are positive integers, shew that a ^a ^'a Q —p ~z Establish consistent meaningsTor a , a , a • 9. Shew howj^o extract the square root of a binomial surd of the form a-\- y/b. Extract that of 17 + V53 • 10. Solve the following equations x-ir8 a;+5 -. = 6. (i) x-S X — o (ii) 5 + 1 a X n (iii) X!' ■ xy = 481 = 12;- xy =s 48 ! I, It. rtain sum of 1 fox a year, niutn in the [iscount on lich there is fork where '. there buy ig to 150, I I to Toronto nses, which I sum origi- nj why the Emperial of 3nts. which he transfers t 105; find ig is worth 11. ^ and 5 play a game together for a certain stake- A wms the game, and then his money is to B's as m to n Ha i won the game, ^'s money would hav^ been to «'«' !^ ^ find Che ratio of ^', mone/to ^'s at first '^ '"^ ^' 12. SiiC'v that if the squares of two numbers which H« between 20 and 30 end with the same digit, they wiJI end wi h the same two digits. '^ ' ^ ^^^ ^^^"^ ! the result n m-\-n a —a lial surd of i, ' i i 1 t 1 ' '<'! i ' iL,(ii IP nni\)nmij Of sroronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. MATRICULATION. MATHEMATICS, III. FOR HONORS. Examiners: f J* ^' -herriman, M a , Employ ihis pronosiimn ,„? . ' "' '" °"« ""■"her one-aJ«h\°"="'" '" "^ -»» -g«e„. of a circle are e,„a. ,o ori6ed?„;"„tb:r:'rrfir,i°", "'= ^-- -"« of u, are <,... "l«a ; from Ae e.x.remi,e?o,l '."!'"= '"■''' """'"I an. es Pendicular to ,l,e oppos e ?J "'''' ''""^ "" dra.vn ner which bisect the internal an/ l"' ' >]""" """ ""^ sets of ImJ: p"P^ndic„ia. pa.r ™iit^i™.t::i';:f„--„od b°; .i;;:: •™equal'';r,3! ="''«" -'--fe-nce, that -, .0 divide it into i"t-gl°e''"c',^t!''"^^«'«'"al and equiangular ,ui„decag„n n P 1 » :w- ! (!■■ .1 Hence inscribe in a circle an isosceles triangle whose ver- tical angle is (\) thirteen times each of its hase angles, (ii) one seventh of each of its base angles. 5. The perpendiculars from the angular points of a triangle ABC upon the opposite sides meet in ; shew that the circle which passes through the middle points of OA, OB, (9C passes also through the feet of the perpendiculars, and through the middle points of the sides. vi. When gold is at 250 in Wall Street, what further rise will make a reduction of one cent, in the dollar ? vii. The value of the old Spanish dollar (which was the unit of ex'chancre between America and England) was 4s. 6d. ster- \in"« «f 'he the prince hlhZT^wlTihlo,^''''"^ ? P°'^l'?»'' "=' t-y Expose thefaisit;of':^o'th:'<^/r:;rti'oV'"'p"" a ""galar, and some without a plural '^ ""' *""'°"' ,4- 7. The following phrases are in use in conversation and in literature : many men, many a man, a many men. If these expressions are all correct, reconcile them in parsing. If not, point out which are proper, with reasons. 8. What etymological peculiarities do you note in the words childreuy chickens, songstress, whilom, twain ? 9. Dr. Witherspoon, in his Lectures on Divinity, has this passage : " What I chiefly mean is to repeat, and endeavour to bring you to enter into the great and leading view which you ought to have in your studies, and which I desire to have still before my eyes in teaching. This may bo expressed in one sentence : to unite together piety and literature to shew their relation to, and their influence one upon another and to guard against any thing that may tend to separate them, and set them in opposition one to another." Point out the syntactical faults of the last period, and re-write it correctly. ADDITIONAL FOR STUDENTS-AT-LAW. 10. What do you understand by the term " orthographical expedient ? Give examples thereof. 11. Give examples of what Latham styles the erroneous- ness and redundancy of the English alphabet. 12. Explain fully the force of the word the in these phra^ses "^Z^ the more,'' ^^ All the better." How oriei- nated this pecuharity of employment ? nnmvniU) of ^Toronto, ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. MATRICULATION. ENGLISH. HONORS. 1,1 UxaminerscI^^^.^^It Wilson, LL.D. \ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 1. Punctuate, and state reasons for the distinction in the use of semicolon and colon : — " God will render to every man according to his deeds to them that are contentious and do not obey the truth but obey unrighteousness indignation and wrath tribulation and anguish upon every soul of man that doeth evil of the Jew first and also of the Gentile." 2. Re-construct or amend the following, with reasons :— a. " Buonaparte, as well as Charlemagne and the Fifth Charles, were re-modellers of Europe." Alison, h. " He was under no small confusion to find that what he thought was a new conceit, and had appropri- ated to his own use, had appeared in print before." Addison, c. Human is what every man is, humane is what every man ought to be ; but he is only rarely found to combine the two. 8. Write all tense-forms of the verb to strike, and state how many of them arc, ctymologically, truu tenses ; with reasons for the answer. ■i ion in the (leeda to tho truth nd wrath man that Gentile." asons : — the Fifth i-lison. hat what appropri- before." at every found to md state Bs; with 4. "Tho logical dlfTorcnco botwoon a noun nnA „ . / • less TTjarked than tho «raunnatical one " Zlllhf fV''^ '? give illustrations. J^xpiain this, and 5. ^<'«^ wo/ is correct French Am .v • . . , correct English ? Give reasons. ' '' '' ""'' ' '' *' ^">'» C. What is indicated in ichitlnn t.^ ,..„ .• . must fl,.,t ,,,.30 it." Explain ^Zt:^'^.:^:^^ ' womar of Sam i" ?" ' ^ '"^'' "™ •■' t>. "Prevent m O T ,rrl in ..ii i ■ graeioua .u.-our/' ' ""' ''""'S'' ■■'"' "'J moBt (?. This is Flias which was for to come." i» town b^°.i.^fS"""'"' ""'• '"■' '■■"" S™'' ; f- "- tree casc:-of";i!l-rt";e™?„! "t'^r Thlr^ -;"..no™„„,,e tions. ^ -i-xpiam this, and guo illuatra- 10. In tho Latin, hio (this) rofoi-s tn th^ i . cedent, and ille (thit) to the fii^t' c g ' "'"""^ ^'"'^- Quocunquo aspicies nihil est nisi pontus et ae.- Hunndus /.. tnmidus, fluctibus il mZ:^''''n,,cl e.am^f''' ^--^Ponding rule in English? Give an 11. Define the difference in tho following •- a. He ]3 a better soldier than scholar. ° 6. He IS a better soldier than a scholar tracS-n^^:::^^^^-^-^ of the English race can be Wini\t$vms of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. MATRICULATION. ,llli(iti!!!l I ■' m HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY. Examiners: l?^f ^^ ^^^^on, LL.D. / J. A. Boyd, M.A. ANCIENT HISTORY. 1. Under what circumstances did the Tarentines apply for aid to Pyrrhus ; and with what results ? 2. Explain the difference between Municipia, Oolonioe, and FrtBfectura. 3. State the circumstances under which the naval victo- ries of Salamis, Mylce, and Actium, were gained. 4. What course was pursued by Octavianua after the assassination of Julius Ctesar ? 5. Sketch the Roman conquests in Britain by Agricola. BRITISH HISTORY. 1. Sketch the history of the Long Parliament. 2. What order of succession was disturbed by Queen Anne's accession to the throne ; and with what results ? 3. Name the chief victories of Marlborough ; and define the terms of the treaty of Utrecht. 4. State the claims, (1) by constitutional right : (2) bv x, ujr- Huieu tno iiuuuvunan uynasty suc- her ceeded to the English throne. 0. ay. GEOGRAPHY. Neva; Volga rinrsVioSd":/ Khone; Elbe; Tagu,; 2. State the boundaries of Wft]1iir.T.;o . -d x , ^ gi»m; Brazil; and the chLf dties of etch.' '"«*'' ^^'- 3. Name the chief colonies of thr^ TJrJfioi, t? • .D. sntines apply pea, ColonioBf ) naval victo- sd. Lus after the by Agricola. nt. d by Queen results ? ; and define ght ; (2) by ynasty sue- ^niHeriSfti? of ^otonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. MATRICULATION. HISTOM-ARTS. HONORS. « . f Daniel Wilson, LL.D. t ■ 1 t • I) 3't * f fe..,. 1. Shew by genealogical tables tho several titles to the throne of the Houses of Tudor and Stuart respectively. 2. Hamilton says that "Henry VII. endeavoured to strengthen his family interest by matrimonial alliances vrith the continent." Specify what marriages were thus con- tracted, and discuss in how far their ultimate results an- swered the king's expectations. 3. When did England first exercise an important influ- ence in European affairs ? Under what circumstances did this influence arise, and how was it manifested ? 4. What difficulties as to the succession to the throne arose in Edward VI. 's reign? How were these difficulties resolved? 5. Sketch the circumstances connected with the disgrace and death of Sir Walter Raleigh. 6. 5'v.vo some account of the cbrr ictsr and policy of the v.ar\ n\' : ,rafford. 7. How many Convention Parliaments assembled during the Tudor and Stuart period, and under what circumstances were they convoked ? 8. Name and give the position of all the insular colonies and dependencies of Great Britain. Specify the dates when each was acquired or established. TK :, i 1 'ir* 1 ' ■v;v:! •■ t " n ]:■: r fw mni^itvniis of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. MATRICULATION. HISTORY-LAW. HONORS. Examiners : ] ?^f ^^ Wilson LL.D. J J. A. Boyd, M.A. 1. Justify the use of the appellatives, '-Age of Augus- tus" and " Age of Pericles ; contrast the characteristics of these two periods. 2. Define the limits of the Periclean era, and mention the representative men who flourished therein in architecture sculpture and painting. ' 3. Name the most eminent prose-writers of these two periods and their productions ; point out the distinguishinff excellences of each Avriter. 4. Sketch the foreign and domestic policy of Pericles. 5. Trace the successive steps whereby Augustus ascended to the height of power and managed to centralize all authority in himself. Show by a genealogical table his relationship to Julius Csesar. ^ 6 Describe fully the developements of the drama in the hands of JEschylus. "^ $■ SInCberfiifts of STotonto. AN; L EXAMINATIONS: 1804. MATRICULATION. FRENCH .-ARTS AND MEDICINE. . HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Exp miers'l^^^^^^ Forneui, LL.D. ' \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. I. Translate : On s'dtait adresse ti cette regcnce de Vienne, parce qu'alors I'empereur d' Allemagne, Charles, Buccesseur de Joseph ler, dtait en Espagne, ou il disputait la couronne ^ Philippe V. Pendant que I'envoye allemand ex^cutait 't Vienne cette commission, Ic grand vizir envoya trois bachas au roi do Su^de pour lui signifier qu'il fallait son h* leur et lui manquer d .c-spect, il les ferait pendre t( ^ trois sur I'heure. Le ba " !e Salonique, qui portait irole, ddguisa la duret James Fornert, LL.D. Uxannners: ^ ^^^^^^ Sullivan, M.A I. Translate : Les patriciens voulant erapecher le retour des rois clierchcrcnt a augraentur le mouvement, qui etait dana I'esprit dupeuple; raais ils firent plus qu'ils nc voul- urent ; a force do lui donner de la haine pour les rois ; ils lui donnerent un desir imnioddre de la liberie. Comme Tautoritd royalc avait passe toute entiere entre les mains des consuls, le peuple sentit que cette libertd dont on voulaitlui donner tant d'amour, il no I'avait pas: il chcrcha done a abaisser le consulat, a avoir des magis- trats pldbeiens ; et Ti partaker avec les nobles les magis- tratures curules. Les patriciens furent forces de lui accorder tout ce qu'il demanda ; car dans une ville ou la pauvrete dtait la vertu publique, oil les richesses, cette voie sourde pour acquerir la puissance, etaient mepris^es, la naissance et les dignitds ne pouvaient pas donner de grands avantages. La puissance devait dune revenir au plus grand nombre, ct I'aristocratie se changer peu a peu en un dtat populaire. Grandeur des Romains, c. viii. 1. Parse chercherent, firent. voulurent. 2. De la haine. Why is the article used I S. Lui donnireni. What part of speech is lut ? 4. Dont on voulait. What part of speech is dont, and by what other French words col'M you express the same meaning ? 5. Oil les richmes. What part of speech is oH, and liow would you otherwise express the same meaning ? Q. Be grands avantages. Why is the article not used here? 7. Se changer. Why is changer in the infinitive mood ? ar des rois etait dans Is ne voul- ur les rois ; la liberie, itiere entre ette libertd I'avait pas: des ma£;is- 5 les magis- rces de lui ine ville on esses, cette t meprisdes, 5 donner de jnc revenir mger peu a ;«, c. viii. GRAP-IMAR. 1. What is the general rule for the formation of the plural of substantives ? Give the plurals of chapeau, hibou, clou, sou, gouvernail. 2. How many degrees of comparison of adjectives ? How are they formed ? 3. What is the difference between the superlative relative and the superlative absolute ? 4. When do vingt and cent take an s in the plural, and when not ? 5. Where do the personal pronouns generally stand in relation to the verb ? Mention the exceptions to the general rule. ° 6. Explain the use of cclui-ci and oelui-Id in referrintr to two or more objects. ^ 7. Translate into French, " The man of whom you 8. Explain the use of the word personne as a pronoun and as a noun. *^ 9. Go through the imperfect subjunctive of vendre and parler. 10. What is a neuter verb? Give an example. 11. Translate into French, " This book is mine." I i^ni\}tv»ltiit of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS .• 18G4. MATRICULATION. NATURAL HISTORY-MEDICINE. Uxaminers: \ ^^''' P/ofessor Hincks, F.L.S. I Tiios. J. Cottle, Esq. BOTANY. 1. Explain the term Monocotylcdonous. In -what other particulars respecting the structure of the stem, the venation of the leaves, and the prevailing number of parts in the floral circles do Monocotyledonous plants differ from others ? 2. Stomata, their structure and probable use, where occur- ring, and in what number. 8. The difference between definite and indefinite annual growth, and between deliquescent and excurrent trunks. 4. The exterior two circles of parts forming the flower, with the terms applied according to their degrees of combi- nation or separation, regularity and irregularity, compara- tive development and tendencies in respect to figure. ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ADDRESSED TO CANDIDATES FOR HONORS. 5. Chemical composition of plants, their food and the sources from which it is obtained. 6. The ovule, its structure and parts, varieties in its position in respect to the carpel. The four kinds of ovule named and defined. te annual unks. iG flower, of corabi- compara- e. ^ES FOR and the 7. Modifications of the receptacle or torus, and terms expressing its relation to the circles of the flower. E. I.St COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. 9. Name the functions of animal and vegetative life. 10. Describe the process of aeration or respiration and the pnncipal varieties in the methods bj which it is effected hat other i venation 'ts in the tn others ? 3re occur- ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ADDRESSED TO CANDIDATES FOR inlL'^M^Lri^^^^^^^^ ''-'' ^^^^^ -^^ "!> '^^ ^-in 12. Describe the development of medusfn, and the manner m whicn numerous animals are produced f;om a singTe egg' 13. D ,Mhe gemmiparous and fissiparous re-production. BS in its of ovule ai mni\^tvuit» of ^ovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FIEST YEAE. GREEK. JExaminersJ^^"^- ^^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. i Thomas Moss, M.A. I. Translate : "Hv yovv roi,9 ^acCKia^ % t«9 alr&v, o'^ep eiBaiao- vedraroL uvai^ Sokovctiv, ^^co tov d/3e,^al'ov Kai i^o\ov rrj, r^xn^, 'rrXetay tw ^8eayu tA dvcap^ evprjcret ^poaovra avrol,, ^6^ov, koI rapax^^ koX aUrr, /cat eni^ovXa^ Kac opyairoL Ka\ o ^io^ dira^ airS^v. A irork 'TTOf.^oXvya, euvBarc eOedaco V7rb Kpovv^ tlvl Kctrapdr- TovTc avLaraiieva^; raj vaa\iBa^ Xiyco, d d>v Pwa- ye.perac o ac^po,' eKecvcou rolvvv nvk fih fivKpai elac Kac avTiKa eKpayetcrac airia^rjaav, ai 8' eVl -rrXiov diapKovac^ Kai irpoaxyovaiov airac^ rcov dXXcov a{rrac v7repfva pu^ fie aTTiSovaa, Toiyapovv djueiylrofiai ere, e(f)r}. , rSe t*;? SiKatO(TvvT}<:, on KaXwov €Keivr]v s Tijv Haiheiav vovv r} (TkutoXt] ^h(p fioL x^^^ 'jiyjov i)'^/avdKTei vveirpte' Te\o9 et Kal eh 6 op ■^ < '^ r)T€' a S> pos' fie I)?;, T,,/Se T//9 lOi , at eXOe ^aad rt o^Vfia OlKOriCV OTTO)? Ifiol wyvorjaeiv CIAN, Vita. ?, iverpiyJraTo, lative. isus. reipTi, 'TTjV 2?. f ^J BeX\epo<^oinri79 Se ypvceov ^ v, auv ta>< "• ac7r6Xotai ntXeve Epyov eTToipaeai. UoXepo^ 8' dvBpeaat peXijaei ^a(Tiv,Jfxol Be p-dXtara, rol 'JX/w eyyeydaaivy "n? dpa j)Oivr](Taro vTroTpoirov eV noXepoLo "l^eadai, irpod jovra. ptvo^ Kat ;^et/ua9 'AxaiMv. Homer, Iliad, VI., vv. 486-502. I'S'^^n^ '^^i>^f^^^ov, yeprjrai^iyyeyc'iaaiv, evcopaev, Uavro, and t^eadai. r ■> t » 2. ^e^rJKei. What is the force of the tense ? 3. Give the ordinary forms of any dialectic varieties in this extract. 4. What changes in the Greek alphabet ? 6. State the different opinions, and the grounds thereof, as to the age of Homer. .0^,. V> "^^x^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // Mil'/ ^^^S^ ^y^Jk S 1.0 I.I 11.25 ■ 50 ^ ill 12.2 2.0 1.8 U llllli.6 <^ /A 7 '*> >/ ^ ^ '^r ^'^ // f '#■ 7 Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ,\ 4? '^' \ \ % .V ^> ™^u- ;\ «r..j«> rv -9,^ mmvmti ot ^otonto. '^u'^^y ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FIEST YEAR. LATIN. JSzaminers.'f^^^- John M^q^^j^^ j^j^ j^ i Thomas Moss, M. A. Translate : I. Ecce gubernator sese Palinurus agebat : gui Libyco nuper cursu, dum sidera servat, ^ixciderat puppi mediis effusus in undis. Hunc ubi vix multa maestum cognovit in umbra. Sic prior alloquitur: " Quis te, Palinure, deorum ±iripuit nobis, medioque sub aequore mersit ? gic age. Namque mihi, fallax baud ante repertus Hoc uno responso animum delusit Apollo, Qui fore te ponto incolumem, finesque caJiebat Venturum Ausonios. En haec promissa fides est ?" Ille autem : « Neque te Phoebi cortina fefellit, Dnx Anchisiada, nee me deus sequore mersit. Kamque gubernaclum multa vi forte revulsum Cui datus haerebam custos, cursusque regebam, Prsecipitans traxi mecum. Maria aspera iuro, Jjon ullum pro me tantum cepisse timorem, Quam tua ne, spoliata armis, excussa magistro, Deticeret tantis navis surgentibus undis Tres notus iiibernas immensa per sequora noctes Vexit me violentus aqua ; vix lumine quarto I'rospexi Itaham summa sublimis ab uada. Paulatim adnabam terroe : jam tuta tenebam; ^1 gens crudehs madida cum veste gravatum, Prensantemque uncis manibus capita a^pera montis, i^erro invasisset, praedamque ignara putasset. Virgil, JEneis vi., 337-361. 2. Anchiaiada. What other form ? stru'ction! ^''^'''^^'^ oursusque regeham. Explain the con- Tut; fZ teek™'' ""'"^^ ^' '^' "^''^ ^^^^^^ ^^P^^««^^^ ? 5. iVow ullum cepisse timorem. Give different con- structions, and translate accordingly. "^nerent con- 6. Ignara putasset. What other reading ? 7- Summd subUmis ah undd. Quote Homeric phrase. imft'atldT ""^"^ '°'^^'"' ''^''^*'^ ^y ^""'^ '' tM« P^s'^age 9. Give the derivations of 'puppis, prsecipito, maqister hems, subhmis, tutus, uncus. "^ ^^ * ^ ^ V ''"ff^^^^^y II. 1. Mention any minor poems of Virgil. 2. How do you account for the fact that in the middle ages Virgil was considered a wizard ? 8utunTtive%'^''' ^''""' '"^"''' *^' indicative, and when the 4. Explain the terms arsis, thesis and csesura. Translate : III. Ti. Gracchus regnum occupare conatus est, vel regnavit IS quidem paucos menses. Num quid simile populus Komanus audierat, aut viderat? Hunc etiam post mortem secuti amici et propinqui, quid in P. Scipionem effecerint, sine lacrymia nm an,>n Aio-.. . autem tribunatu, quTd ^"^^^^^^^^^ ,?« C. Gracchi semel cc«pit, labi J tt nli^^^?^"^' ^""^ quanta sit facta labes, primo >?' a ■ *^^^P* J"°^ »«te autem post, C7a.m. 7ide"e iam Tl '^'' ^^'^"'^ senatu disjunctum multitudinisVue arh ? • ' ^^^"^""^ «» agi. Plures enim discent 2^'.^^^^^^^^ quam quemadmodum his resltXr "o ™ ^""^ ^"*' Quia sine sociis nemo quLuam fn^I' ^."°''"'° ^«^° ? endum est igitur bon?s uf ^ • '°"^*"'- ^^*<^'Pi- ignari casu aliquo i„dder L '" ''^"''^^^^ ^"^^^i^ias alligatos, ut ab amici n ma ^na ^lln"''^^ ^^* «« non discedant: improbis S^ ."^"* '^ P'^^^ntib"^ nee vero minor iis mii l! .• P^""? statuenda est : qui ipsi fuerinl im^ttirdSces""' ^^'"""^^ ^^^^ -> i>e Amicitia, ch. 12. fir,t-appt".edt ^"^'^ "■•" "''^'"''anoes were tribm,es 4. m..,. « .oM. Mention variou. V- .«J.««n'.. <^''*»'«i''y- ^tat was the purport of this law? IV. neaV^trt:\-'<^^«:ip^^^^^^^^^ ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIRST YEAR. GREEK. HONORS. JExaminers : I 5^^' '^^^^ McCaul, LL D 5 Thomas Moss, M.a! Translate: . IIAOTT. O^^ ^,1 roOro, & 'Epav ^XV ' ' 2i%r^P,- rem ^e^cf>eek'MZ\Toirol^"^''^' eWor/rw,- 0ear&7' ''^''^'""' '""'■"^^'O" oiSUS6:^Jp 0^09 iTT^n^e Wore ^T' ^^^^«^-o^ra9, oh odSe Khv 'rrepcep^ovrac oiB' airol Zre^Zt^olaa^ ^P^-o^^e, 'rrXovTova-ip. j^TtvovT€e trap* avrov^ &re TrXotn-oSori;? KoX fi€yd\68a)po9 (f)op7)Bbv dpdfievot fieraKOfii^ouai' koI 6 fiev V€Kpofin.tive and imperative ofX? " P""'^™' indicative, T. R.p.ain the meaning and use of the suffix ^. „r ^.. o. What indicator- -V 'i. —• , ^ original poem ? ^" '^^ ^^^^^ ^^ additions to the T] 8ainitiet«f(3? of ^rovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIEST YEAR. LATIN. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: I ^^^- John McCaul, LL.D I Thomas Moss, M.A. I. Translafce : Haec ubi dicta dedit, solio se tollit ab alto- Post hinc ad navIsSL^ .„ •''•'"'™'"'- Quorum de numrro^aut!"' °T,'?™ "■'"«'»! Ooius ire eq„i.L K„ra7ter '•''^'"' Turn pater Euandrua d^^tL^ »«paret imago. Qualis eram, cum Brimlm f„- ^ b ■■ '""«'«' |ravi ...oJum^nS^^^^^^^ .ub ip. |pn|o"un^~r^:-^S^^^^^^^^ Horrendum dictu— dederaf fJrrTo ueaerat, terna arma movenda; >i U.' Ter leto sternendus erat ; cui turn tamon omnia Abstulit haec animas doxtra, et totidem exuit armis : Non ego nunc dulci amplexu divellerer asquam, Nate, tuo ; ncque finitimo Mezentius umquam Huic capiti insultans tot ferro saeva dedisset Funera, tam multis viduasset civibus urbem. JEneid, viii. 541-571. 1. Herculeis. What diflSculty in this reading ? Explain the reading, Herceis, 2. Lares, Penates. From what sources was their worship derived ? 3. Propius periclo it timor. Give different explanations. 4. Praeneste. What is tho modern name ? What cele- brated temple in the town ? Why were the people nick- named Nuculce? 5. Scutorum. How did the scutum differ in form from the Clipeus ? What is the corresponding Greek term ? 6. Tyrrhenis. What is supposed to have been the origin of this people ? Give a brief sketch of their political con- stitution. 7. Nate. When is the form gnatus inadmissible ? 8. Give the derivations of ara, hesternus^ macto, cetera, pronus, nuncius, imagot letum, aegnis, acies, sopor. 9. Distinguish between inter csedes Rutulorum and inter csed^m Rutulorum. 11. 1. Point out differences in epic treatment between the Iliad and the JEneid. 2. Prove from the 8th Book that interdum dormitat Vir- gilius. 3. Under what restrictions is the hiatus admitted by Virgil? 4. Give biographies of Ennius and Livius Andronicus. III. Translate: Age vero, ilia res quantam declarat ejusdem hominis apud hostes populi Romani auctoritatem quod ex locis tarn longinquis, tamquo diversis, tarn brevi tempore omnes uni huic so dediderunt ? quod Cretensium leLti cumm eorum insula noster imporato- exercitusque esset! ad tn. lompeium m ultimas propo terras venerunt eiquese omnes Cretensium civitates dedere vello dixl erunt ? Quid idem iste Mithridates ? nonnc ad eundem tn. I ompeium, legatura usquo in Hispaniam misit ? eum quem Pompeius legatum semper judicavit • ii quibus semper erat molestum, ati oum potissimum esse missum, speculatorem, quam legatum judfari maluerunt. Potestis igitur jam constituere, Quirites, banc auctori- tatem, multis postea rebus gestis, magnisque vestris judicus amplificatam, quantum apud illos reges, quantum apud exteras nationes valituram esse existimetis ^ Reliquum est, ut de felicitate, quam praestare de se ipso nemo potest, meminisse et commemoraro de altero possumus, sicut aeauum est homini de potestate deorum timido et pauca dicamus. Ego enim sic existumo.' Maximo, Marccllo, Scipioni, Mario, et ceteris magnia imperatoribus, non solum propter virtutem, sed etiam propter fortunam, saepius imperia mandata, atque exer- citus esse commissos. Fuit enim profecto quibusdam summis viris quaedam ad amplitudinem et gloriam et ad res magnas bene gerendas dirinitus adjuncta fortuna- de hujus autem hominis felicitate, quo de nunc agimus* hac utar moderatione dicendi, non uf in illius potestate tortunam positam esse dicam, sed ut praeterita memin- isse, rehqua sperare videamur, ne aut invisa diis immortahbus oratio nostra, aut ingrata esse videatur. Cicero, pro leg. Man., c. 16. 1. Cretensium legati. Give the true statement of this affair. 2. Noster imperator. Who ? 3. What was the exact technical meaning of imperium 2 How only could it be conferred ? ^ 4. Usque in Hispaniam. In what was Pompey then en- gaged ? *^ '' 5. Iste Mithridatesi. Mpnf.ion *^^ »^».;t,-: — i „ • Which iste is used. 6. Vestris judiciis. Give instances. * 'llH M H ' if , '* ..*'! 7. Maximo, Scipioni. Write brief notices of these com- manders. 8. Nunc agimus. Translate agere cum populo, IV. 1. Who were the principal opponents of the Manilian law? 2. What was a rogatio ? Explain the formulae with which it always commenced and terminated. What was adrogatio ? 3. How does Sallust describe the character of Pompey ? 4. Distinguish between the gerund and the gerundive ; and explain the origin of the latter. 5. Give a sketch of the second Mithridatic war. nnmvuitp of srotronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FIRST YEAR. EUCLID. Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 1. On the same base and on the same side of it there cannot be two triangles which have their sides which are terminated in one extremity of the base, equal to one another, and likewise those which are terminated in the other extremity. the^'thtZsidl! ^'^^^ ""^ "" *"''''^^' ^'' *'^'*^'' ^'"^*'' *^^" nf fe/i??'/''"^ any proposition beyond the first book of Euclid, that two circles which have not a common centre cannot cut one another in more points than two. ,2' ^V\*';r^^'? ^^^^ ^''^ angles of the one equal to two angles of the other, each to each, and have also those ^inl? T '^'''^.^'^ f^J^^ent to equal angles in each, then hall the other sides be equal, each to each ; and al o the third angle of the one to the third angle of the other i> and E are the middle points of AB, AC sides of a ir\ Fd'^ FE^n^o'd " ?^ -^^ produced, any poi^; FVLken ; ^P in ? ^It ^''^ ?•'' •'' ^T '^''^^'^ *'"ough A parallel to iiC m (x, H respectively; shew that GH is equal to BQ. 4. If a side of a triangle be produced, the exterior angle LTlf • ^^^ '"'"/'"' ^"^ ^PP*^'^*^ ^"g^«« ; ^nd the right an iT' """^ ^'"'^ *"''"^^' are equal to two If from two of the angles of a triangle perpendiculars be drawn upon the opposite sides, the third angle of the tri- if n '1 it ■J. it '1 ' g''g1 <^f' it' ti angle is equal to the sum of the angles contained bj the side opposite to it and the two perpendiculars. 5. To divide a straight line into two parts, so that the rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts may be equal to the square on the other part. If a line be thus divided, shew that the rectangle con- tained by the difference of the parts and the greater part equals the square on the other part. 6. The angle at the centre of a circle is double of the angle at the circumference on the same base, that is, on the same part of the circumference. Two lines which cut a circle intersect ; shew that the angle between them equals the semi-sum, or semi-difference of the angles subtended by the intercepted arcs at the centre of the circle, according as the point of section falls within or without the circle. 7. The angles in the same segment of a circle are equal to one another. Construct a triangle, having given one angle, the side opposite to it, and the point in which the bisector of the given angle meets the given side. 8. If from any point without a circle two straight lines are drawn, one of which cuts the circle, and the other touches it; the rectangle contained by the whole line which cuts the circle, and the part of it without the circle, shall be equal to the square on the line which touches it. A straight line BC of given length is intercepted between two straight lines AB, AC given in position, and two circles are drawn touching each of the three ; shew that for all posi- tions of BC, the part of AB intercepted between the points of contact of the circles is constant. 9. To describe an isosceles triangle, having each of the angles at the base double of the third angle. In the figure of this proposition, let the two circles meet in D and E, and let ABD be the triangle required shew that if a tangent at A meet BD produced in F, AFD is a triangle having the required property. Shew also that if BA bo produced to meet the circle again in G, and GE be joined and produced to meet BD in K, GBK is another such triangle. 10. If the vertical angle of a triangle be bisected by a straight line which also cuts the base, the segments of the IT.^M! ^T *^' ""V^^'^ ^^^^^ *^« ^*^er sides of the triangle have to oiv mother. op^rlt^aSja^^^X; tto^ ^^^ «^^^ ratl^onS^r;!:^^:?,:^^^;^^ ^"^^'^^ ^^ *^^ ^^p"-^^ Through a point in the side of a triangle draw a line cutting off a quarter of the triangle. r;in\!; Jfl^ rectangle contained by the diagonals of a quad- rila eral figure inscribed m a circle is equal to both the rect- angles contained by its opposite sides. 29nftiev0U|l of SToronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIEST YEAR. ALGEBRA. Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 1. State the reasoning by which the truth of the following formulas ia established : ah = ba; a(p-\-c) — ah + ac ; a^^.a"* = a»H^». What are the values of the quantities Q >c a,~ . a\ 0" for different values of a ? Find the values of first, when w = ^, a = 0, 6 = 1; second, when w = 1, 6 = — 1. 2. Investigate Horner's method of division, and show how it may be used in finding the value of /(a), where fix) is any rational and integral function of x. Shew that whether we divide /(a;) by aa; +6 or by » + ^, a the remainder in either case will be the value of /(— - ). ^ a' 3. Prove the rule for finding the least common multiple of two or more Algebraic quantities. If a, 6, c be three quantities, having respectively the factors a, ^, 7 such that no two have any common measure, and L^, L ^L be the least common multiples of (6, c), (c, a), (a, h) regnectivelv* prove ^ ^' \ ' i J 7 «A = /5A=7A' J* * 4. Shew how the magnitude of a fraction is altered by increasing or diminishing both its terms by the same quantity. Show that a j^roper fraction is less diminished by adding the same quantity to both its terms than it is increased by subtracting that quantity from each term. Trace the changes of magnitude of y^j and y-rj as w changes from 4- CO to — CO. 5. Prove that every quadratic equation has two roots, and investigate a rule for finding them. Find the condition that the equation (a -r x) {b — x) = c' may have its roots equal. 6. If a : 6 :: c : d. then will pa + qb:ma-{- nh '.: pc ■{■ qd : mc+nd ; and m» + qab I mab + nb^ :: \ J^ I — f 7. Explain the notation called " Variation." If a'+i" CO be, and ac vz b\ then -. + _ is invariable. 6" 6 8. When are three quantities said to be in arithmetic, geome- tric, or harmonic progr'^ssion 1 In each case, given two of the quantities, show how to find the remaining one. The equation aa;" + 2 i.c + c = 0, will have its roots real and unequal, equal, or imaginary, according as «, 6, c are in the above progressions respectively. 9. Investigate a formula by which the sum of n quantities in arithmetic progression can be found. The sum of the successive odd numbers, commencing with 2p + I, and ending with 2q - 1, is q^ - p^- 10. Shew how to find the sum of a series of quantities in geometric progression ; and tL o limit of this sum when the series is prolonged indefinitely, the ratio being a pro[)er fraction. This ratio being — shew that the sum ad inf : can be bi relied upon as giving correctly the first n figures for the sum of n terms, when (-)" > 100 001, (w zeros.) ^a * 11. (a) Multiply together the following : a' _ 3 a; _ 1, 2a;^ 4- 4a; + I , ■:>? - ^a; - 3 ; and extract the square root of the product. \ (0) Divide, by Homer's method 1 + a: + 45x« + 135x' by 1 + 3a; + 4aj», and continue the quotient as far as a;", giving the finite remainder tiien leit. (y) Find the greatest common measure of 1 — a? + y + « ^xi/ + i/z — zx — xyz, and '^—x^y — z+xy+yx + zx — xyz; and shew that their least common multiple is a complete square if a; = y» + «" — y V. 12. Beduce to lowest terms : (a;— 1 3:4.3 1-a: 2+a; ^ (^) -7J-, o ., , ^jrr + anal + 13. Solve the equations : (a) h{x - 1) - Ka? - 2) = \{x - 3) - ^(cr — 4) ; (/9) (10* - xy + 10*(a:* + 1) «^ a;' + 100000001 ; (7) (a: + «)(« + *) = (« + c) (6 + c) ; (8) Va-+6J- v^+^= 7^~r-^^«'. V a + c 14. Sum « -(i+|)-(2+!i^')-(3 + !l^% to w terms; , f/3) (1+ vi) + i 4- H 1 - ^/D + to n terms. w 7f-VI+7l- to infinity. 15. A pamphlet, when set up in type, is found to contain 2000 lines, and will make a certain number of pages ; but by closing up the lines so as to get into each page one-fifth more and one over, the number of pages can be diminished by 20. How many were there ? M >'■<'« ^;;j*^ I 4; WinmvuHsi Of SToronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIKST YEAR. TRIGONOMETRY. Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 1. State the rule for finding the characteristic of a logarithm and prove that the maiitissa is unaffected by any chanrof th^ position of the decimal point in the number. ^ ^ characYeiStV^ri "^ u> ' T*"?" °^ logarithms were such that the cMracteiisticof log 10 is 2, what may the characteristic of lo- 100 be,^and what must be the least value of the base thatlfmay byyoTCrithm: '" ^"^'^'"^°^ multiplication and involution Given log 2 and log 3, find the logarithms of 0-5, 60, 0-8, 250, 4-5. 2 «n/n^f.i!°° ^^'^^ " ~ ^°o^' ^' ^^y ^^^« "'^'^ the logarithms of jS and 0-5 the same mantissa 1 ® 3. Perform the following operations by logarithms: («) Multiply 123-45 into 5-4321 ; (i3) Find the value of (±?^)' ' 67059 ' (^> ^'-^-^I- , 4. Define the trigoaometrieal ratios of an angle less than 90° 900 a^dirtltlsoof "*"'^*'""'^'' '■""'""8"' S'-**^*""^ "Why need not the tables be ext- ^d beyond 90° 1 %\ ' "' H'xt 'i;| '"' i'^'^ '''"$% ^ ' •*' vS '■ '^*"^''«i i^^ ' "^ ^ '-" N^ Vi.- * [if "' ■ Write down the five independent relations connecting the ratios of an angle. 5. Find tan 45^ and sin 30O. Deduce from them sin 45° and tan Z0°. Write down the tabular logarithms of these quantities. Having given the tabular logarithms of the sines of all angles up to 90°, shew how those of the other ratios of these angles can be found. 6. State the different cases that arise in the solutions of right- angled triangles, and solve one of them. A ladder rests between a wall and the ground at an angle of 45^; if its foot is moved halfway towards the wall, through what angle will the ladder have revolved 1 Shew that the top will have moved ( y/f — 2) times as much as the foot. 7. Prove the formulas : {a)\ sin {A-{-B) = sin J. cos JB + cos A sin J9; (j3) ,.. 2 sin'^ = 1 - cos 2 ^ ; Bin J: 4- sin J? _ tan \ { A-\- B ) . ^^' sin A ^ain H " t^^ {A-B)' (5) sin -4 cos 2 -S + cos 2 .^ sin B = sin f (A+B) Cos ^ {B-A) + cos | {A-B) sin I {B-A). 8. How many independent relations connect the six parts of a triangle ] When three parts are given, in what cases may they fail to give a distinct triangle ? If the angle A be obtuse, shew that no triangle can exist unless "' > --°^---. , where A' is the supplement of A. h coaB 9. In any triangle, prove the relations : , . sin A Bin B sin C . (o) = — f — = , ^ •' a c (^) c = 6 cos^ + acosB; A-B a-b . G . ('y^ *^^-T- = m:6 '°'t' (8) tan ^ = ^(i^^.^, (. the semiperi- meter.) A BO ((£\ cos -^ cos — cos -- (cot A+coi i?+cot C) ___ (a±h+c) (g' +y+c*) ^ Sabo 10. Solve the following triangles : (o) a = 209-88, 6 = 333-33, C= 122© 26'. (3) « = 753.09, 6 = 333-33, c = 66666. (7) A = 57034', a = 54-32]. b = 87-654. (^) A = 57034', a =: 47-979, b = 54-321. 11. A person coming straight down an incline notes the dia- tance between two points of his descent. On reaching the foot of the incline, he walks straight on along the horizontal plane for a known distance, and then measures the angles of elevation of the two points. Shew that he is able to calculate the angle of the inchne, and the heights of the two points above his level. Num. Log. Angle. Log. 12345 09149 7° 07' tan 9-09639 15000 17609 13"08 tan 9-36795 20000 30103 15"18 sin 9-42139 20988 32197 21"40 cosec 10-43273 30000 47712 31 "07 tan 9-78077 42755 63099 45"45 tan 10.01137 43269 63618 49"34 sin 9-88148 47979 68105 57"34 sin 9-92635 50000 69897 10.07365 9-73987 54321 73497 61"13 cosec cot 60000 77815 69"18 cos 9-54836 67059 82646 72"52 sin 9-98029 87654 94277 94105 97361 1. whicl Sol 2. I ber "wi of 5 ai J by th( that it is so d 3. ] tional. (l+x- ^o""^- im tliutievjeifti? of ^oronio. Annual examinations • i864. FIRST YEAR. ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Uxaminer: Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 1. Find by means of indoteminate multipliers the value of z whicJx satisfies the simultaneous equations, «i^+*i y+Ci 2r = f/j Solve the equations : (i.) {x+a-\-b)* + {x+b+cy + {x+c-\-af =3 (x+a+b) {z+b+c) (cc+c+a). 2. Shew how to (\-pres3 a given mixed number iu any scale. Express 7593 7 in the scale whose radix is G. What num- ber will be expressed by the same two digits in each of the scales of 5 and 71. If a number, exppressed in the common scale, be denoted by the digits p p^,p,^, beginning with the unit digit, shew that it will be divisible by 12, when Po—2p, +4,(p + p + ) is so divisible. i \i-2 j 3 "-j 3. Investigafo the general term of the expansion of {%-\-a 07+ f?*+ )"' where n is positive or negative, integral or frac- tional. If c,Cj, c be the coefficients in the (l+a;+a;V', tli en expansion of CoCft.-C,6- . + c„c„_„— + (-1/ ''^.+iC.-i=J{i-H'"-.} 5s! r m 4. If the denominators of the fractions -tS f-S ••• r" have all the same sign, shew that the fraction ^1+^2+ ••• +^>» Ues between the greatest and least of the original fractions. Shew also that if there be n positive quantities, a, hj c, ... which are not all equal, then ^+^+"+ - > {aba ...f' 5. If A-\-Bx-{-Cz^+ ... = a+bz-{-cx^ -\- ... for all values of X, shew that A=:a, B—b, <5*c= tan A + tan B tan (A + 5) = i_tanA teO- Prove also the formula 2 sin -'^ x — vers — ^ 2a;', and shew that if sin (0— a) sin (0—^9) ~ sin a sin ^, then tan 6 = tan («+yQ), unless =1 nir. 8. Shew that if be the circular measure of an angle less than 90°, sin ^ < and > — ^ • Q R ff Shew that the limit of cos ^. cos ^ ...cos ^,, when m is sin infinite, is e :f%'> '• If / (0) be a function of given by the equation / (2^)= (1 — tan'^)/(0), and if/(0) = m, shew that /(^) = mO cot S- 9. Find a formula which will include all angles having a given sine'. Solve the equation cos — sin 5fl = cos 3 — sin 3 0. 10 Define the base of the Napierian system of logarithms, and expand log, (l+») in ascending powers of x. 11. Obtain exponential expressions for the sine and cosine. From the equivalence of the expansions of log(i. ■X e "•'-') + log (i+.7'^') and log -j 1— a; (2 y/1Il sin + x)l obtain the expansion of cos 2nB and of sin (2n+l)0 in terms of powers of sin $. 12. Sum to n terms the series cosa+cos («+i3)+cos (a+2l3)+ , and shew that sin o+sin 3a+sin 5a -\- .... to w terms = ^^^' ^° . sino t'i centi pend ABC inter and • the s scrib poini tions and i cube. Unibtvms ot Zovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD YEARS, AND CANDIDATES FOR B.A. PROBLEMS. HONORS. Uxaminers : \ ^' ^' S?\^^™^^ ^'^' I Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 1 . If a trapezium be inscribed in a circle, the line joining the centre of the circle with the intersection of its diagonals is per- pendicular to its parallel sides. 2. The middle points U and F of AB, BC aides of a square ABCD, being joined with D and A respectively, ED and FA intersect in G ; shew that a circle may be described about EBFG, and that the length of a tangent drawn to it from D is equal to the side of the square. 3. Upon the sides of a triangle as diameters circles are de- scribed : shew that their three common chords intersect in a point. 4. If x^ — y. 2/2 — x^i X xyz tions, is equal to y xy xyz shew that each of these frac- 111 -, to a; + 2/ + z, and to .—f - + — xyz xyz 5. Eliminate x, y, z from the equations ax = c'y + b'z \ by =. a'z ■\- c'x I • cz = b'x 4- o,'y j 6. If aoi? '+ 3 iaj'' + 3 ca? + t/ contain acc^ -j- ^hx + c as a factor, and the latter be a complete square, the former will be a complete cube. '*8 ■ ».'»| ■J.1 7. If 'it- S i , <(» r. T?«; A X = 6« + cy } 2/ = ex + az ay + bx prove /i\ 1 «2 1-&2 ]- -C2 (0 ••• a;'^ y^ -ft* V -b' + i ' (ii) ... V 1 a' a c VI a' Vl- '1- -c" a 8. In any scale of notation, radix r, the (r — 1) digits are formed into any number of numbers, oach digit being used once and only once ; given that the sum of these numbers lies betfl^een ^r and (p+l)r, shew that it is pr-\-s, where s is the number which must be added to the sum of the digits in the lower limit to make it divisible by ^ — ]). 9, A train in consequence of meeting with an accident is obliged to lessen its speed ; had the accident occurred a miles further back, the train would have been p minutes later than it was in arriving at the terminus ; and if h miles further on, it would have been q minutes earlier. Shew that the difference of the times of ninning a mile before and after the accident is Vj±l a + h minutes. 10. Prove, (i) (ii) u y.i8 4- :iL_l.__ 4- ad inf: 9.18.27 "^ 1 01 ~l . (n-l)(n-2) __ (n-.l)(n-2)0z-3) + 3 ^ 3.4 3.4.5 2 n a positive integer . 11. m If '<'!±m}±l)'i:-^j:.^:^^^^^ be denoted by /(«,,.) , a,,d ■^(^^-1)(^^-2) lorjactor^ ^^^^^^ , prove /(w, 2r) +/(n, 2r— 1)(^(«, 1) +/(7i, 2r— 2) ^ (w, 2) + = '-*i f^f*fy ."» ■♦ •V*' 1^5 ^^;gj»fe's4';- mnmvuiis of ^Toronto. It''* I/* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. FIllST YEAR. IIISTOllY. IT . f D. Wilson, LL.D. iiu.1 *^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. I. Outlines of Ancioat History, (1.) What led to the Hegemony of Sparta over the rest of Hellas, and what consequences resulted from this Hegemony? (2.) Givo some account of tho battle of Marathon, and estimate its importance. (3.) Mention tho circumstances connected with tho estab- lishment and the abolition of the Deccmvirates. (4.) Give the character and chief incidents of Vespasian's reign. (5.) What chief points of distinction existed between the Germanic conquests of Roman provinces on the continent and the Saxon invasion of England. II. British history to Henry VIII. (1.) Give a summary of the advantages derived by Eng- land from the Norman conquest. (2.) Writo brief notes upon the lives and influence of Wickliffe, Thomas a Becket, and Archbishop Langton. (8.) "With the reign of Stephen," says Hamilton, CI0808 the pen. ! which maybe emphatically styled the era of the conqueBt." (a) State the reasons from which this conclusion is drawn. (J) Trace the lines of descent of the immediate suc- cessor of Steph n. (4.) Relate the circumstances connected with the con- quest of Wales. (5.) What causes contributed to the extension of royal prerogative during the reign of Henry VIII ? letween the ) continent s I Wini\>tvnit!J! of STovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. FTllST YEXn. *' % ■■-'» ENGLISH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. ■p ' f D. Wilson, LL.D. ■^^^^^'^^^^•^•ij.A.BoYD,M.A. B** I. Prosody. (1.) Give an example of " Service metre," and of " Gay's stanza." Name the measures which we have borrowed from Italy, and characterize each. (2.) Give an account of the introduction and naturaliz- ation of Hexameters as an English measure. (3.) Analyse the following rhymes, stating which are perfect and which imperfect, with reasons : — Aiuay and sway ; made and strayed; go and flow; light and satellite; remained and land; path and faith; hosanna and banner. (4.) Discuss the advantages or disadvantages which h:\ve accrued to English prosody, owing to the various verbal and inflexional changes of the language which have taken place since the time of Chaucer. (5.) Sketch the history of the English sonnet. II. History of the English language, (1.) Shew, by a table, the relationship which exists n Encrlish and other lano^uasres '^anoient bet\ and modern) of the Teutonic Stock. -Q \- (2.) Specify some of the chief peculiarities of Chau- cer's English. (3.) Classify the various accessions to our vocabulary from the Latin, and give examples of each class. (4.) Latham says : " The determination of the amount of Danish in Engliyh is difficult A few years back the current opinion was against the doctrine that there was much Danish in England. At present, the tendency is rather tlie other way." Shew wherein consists the diiHculty, and give reasons in support of the more modern opinion. (5.) Compare and contrast English prose as exhibited in the following authors: Hooker, Addison, Swift, Johnson, Lander and Trench. * '/' -rf ' *.*ym ' >l i ,. U^JBgW Unmn'tiitu Of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIEST YEAR. HISTORY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners ••{ D. Wilson, LL.D. J. A. Boyd, M.A. *^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut PULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. 1. Describe the character of Pope Nicholas V., and the course pursued by him in relation to Turkish aggression. 2. Trace to their sources the claims of the houses of Anjou and Aragon on the kingdoms of Sicily and Naples ; and give a sketch of the proceedings of Charles VIII. of France in asserting his Italian claims. 3. Describe the character of Pope Leo X., and trace his personal influence on European History. 4. State the circumstances of the fall of Granada ; and account for the successful aggression of a Mahommedan power in tho east of Europe, and the fall of another in the west, within so brief an interval. Give the two dates. 6. Define the influences at work towards the close of the 16th century, which led to the decline and extinction of the commercial republics of Italy. i?A ^' ?r%%^ *^^ genealogical relations of Henry VIII. to Jidward III., and assign the causes which rendered England indifferent to the fall of Constantinople. ^ 7. Specify the prominent historical events connected mth J^ ranee and Germany at the commencement of the loth century. 8. Describe the characters of Cardinals Xavier and Adrian; and assign to each his share in the development of the character and the fortunes of Charles V. 9 Compare Constantine XL of the Eastern Empire, and Boabdil of Granada, in personal character, conduct and influence on the events which closed the career of each. 10. Describe the personal character of Henry VII.- and trace his influence on English domestic and foreign policy and on maritime enterprise. ^ ^* 11. What peculiar circumstances tended to keep alive the crusading spirit in Spain down to the 15th century, when it had died out elsewhere throughout Christendom? TransL to nu In fei lOi if Transk Et M Je M D' Ls J'l Tc wmmvnits of Eovonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS a 1864. FIRST YEAR. FRENCH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Uxaminera.'ii'''^^^ Forneri, LL D. (.Robert Sullivan, M.A. I. Translate into French : Fear seizes man in his cradle and accompanies him to hi8 grave. Scarcely is he born, when he fears his nurse. As a child he fears him who brings him up. In his youth he fears his superiors ; in his manhood he fears a multitude of evils, the reverses of fortune and the loss of all that is dear to him, sickness, shame, death; if he IS good he fears the wicked ; if he is bad the laws. Lastly, in his old age he trembles at eternity. Translate into English : Ah? qu'dtait-il sans toi? qu'ai-je aim^ que toi mgme ? ±it qu est-ce auprt:>s de toi que ce vil univers ? Mon ^me va te suivre au fond de tes deserts* Je vais seule en cea lieux, ou 1' horreur me consume, Languir dans les regrets, s^cher dans I'^mertume, Mourir dans le remords d'avoir trahi ma foi D'etre au pouvoir d'un autre, et de brfiler pour toi. i ars, emporte avec toi mon bonheur et ma vie • LaiBse-moi les horreurs du devoir qui me lie. ' J'ai mon amant ensemble et ma ^loiVfi k sanvor Tous deux me sont sacr4i; je les veux conserver. VoLTARiE, Alzire, Act iv., Scene v. r' ^:i\ mut ' m f'##'* 1. Qu'^tait-tlfSanstoi? What does i7 refer to ? 2. Qu'ai-je aime que^ ^c. Fill up tho ellipsis. 3. Et qu'eit'CCy 8fc. Destroy the pleonasm in this lino. 4. Auprcs de toi. Give the true force of aupres hero. 5. Oil V horreur me consume^ (j-e. Where ? Explain. 6. D' avoir trahi ma foi. To whom ? and how ? 7. D'Slre au pouvoir d'un autre^ et de brUler pour toi Explain this line. 8. JDii devoir qui me lie. What duty ? 9. J'ai mon amant. Et ma gloire a sauver. How ? III. Translate into English : Capitaino renard allait de compagnie Avec son ami bouc des plus haut encornds : Celui-ci ne voyait pas plus loin que son nez : L'autre etait passd maitre en fait de tromperie. La soif les obligea de descendre en un puits : \A chacun d'eux se d^saltere. Apr^s qu'abondamment tous deux en eurent pris, Le renard dit au bouc : Que ferons-nous, compare ? Ce n'est pas tout de boire, il faut sortir d'ici. L^ve tes pieds en haut, et tes comes aussi ; Mets-les centre le mur : le long de ton ^chine Je grimperai premi^rement ; Puis, sur tes comes m'^Ievant, A I'aide de cette machine, De ce lieu-ci je sortirai, Apres quoi je t'en tirerai. Par ma barbe, dit l'autre, il est bon ; et je loue Les gens bien senses comme toi. Je n'aurais jamais, quant h moi, Trouv6 ce secret, je I'avoue. Le renard sort du puits, laisse son compagnon, Et vous lui fait un beau sermon Pour I'exhorter a; patience. Si le Ciel t'efit, dit-il, donne par excellence Autant de jugement que de barbe au men ton, Tu n'aurais pas, d la leg^re, Descendu dans ce puits. Or, adieu ; j'en suis hers : Tfi,cho de t'en tirer, et fals toua tea efforts ; Car pour moi j'ai certaine affaire Qui ne me permet pas d'arr^ter en chemin. En toute chose il faut conaiderer la Jin. LaFontaine, Livre iii., Fable v. 1. Dea plua haul encomia. Form a relative sentence, and state what part of speech is plua haul ? 2. Plua loin que son nez. Give the force. 3. Toua deux en eurent pris. What does eti refer to ? 4. Ufaut aortir d'ici. Resolve aortir by a conjunction, tense, and mood. 5. Aprea quoi. Suppress quoi and give the equivalent. 6. Je t'en tirerai. What does Ven refer to ? 7. Par ma barbe. What does this expression mean, or what part of the speech ? 8. 11 eat bon. Suppress il and give the equivalent. 9. Lea gena bien senaSa comme toi. Form a compara- tive of equality. 10. Ce aecret. Give the force. 11. Et voua lui fait un beau aermon. What is voua ? 12. Que de barbe au menton. Fill up the ellipsis. 13. Ala legere. Give the force. 14. Tdche de t'en tirer. Suppress en and give the equiv- alent. 15. Faia toua tea efforta. Add the complement. 16. Qui ne me fermet, ^c. Suppress me^ turn arreter into a reflective verb, and resolve it by a conjunction, tense, and mood. 17. lljaut conaiderer la fin. Make it definite. I .'wm \> ' mk 'A -li - 1 » Wk J. ^ ' ' *'w i Mfi > '■} 1 1' -f. *tf 'b '\ ^t, * 1 1 .L..^1L. 1 1 1 ■ 1 V ^fr^ V ■ . , ■■ i ^Iniiietfiiita? of Toronto; ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FIRST YEAR. FRENCH. Uxaminers'f'^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. Ji^xammers, | ^q^^^,j, Sullivan, M.A. I. ■Translate : Tous les gens qui avaient eu des projets ambitieux avaient travaille ^ mettre une esp^ce d'anarchie dans la republique. Pomp<5e, Crassus et C^sar y r^ussirent k merveille. lis etablirent une impunitd de tous les crimes publics; tout ce qui pouvait arrSter la corruption des moeurs, tout ce qui pouvait faire une bonne police, ils Fabolirent; et comme les bons le'gislateurs cherchent k rendre leurs concitoyens meilleurs, ceux-ci travail- laient a; les rendre pires : ils introduisirent done la coutume de corrompre le peuple a prix d'argent, et quand on ar toutes justice on du peuple lir retabli, nt froide- jmains. 3 oi gens. ivalent. s and V. 3 it, and Unif^tvutita of Eovontoi ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FIRST YEAR. FRENCH. Examiners .'liZllI'^^''^^'' ^^m\ \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. I. Translate : Tous les gens qui avaient eu des projets ambitieux avaient travaillc^ a, mettre uno esp6ce d'anarchie dans la republique. Pompee, Crassus et C^sar y r^ussirent ^ merveille. lis etablirent une impunitd de tous les crimes publics ; tout ce qui pouvait arrSter la corruption des moeurs, tout ce qui pouvait faire une bonne police, ils I'abolirent; et comme les bons le'gislateurs cherchent k rendre leurs concitoyens meilleurs, ceux-ci travail- laient d les rendre pires: ils introduisirent done la coutume de corrompre le peuple a prix d'argent, et quand on ^tait accuse de brigues on corrompait aussi les juges ; ils firent troubler les Sections par toutes sortes de violences, et quand on 6tait mis en justice on intimidait encore les juges; I'autorite mSme du peuple etaifc aneantie : temoin Gabinius, qui, apr^s avoir re'tabli, malgre le peuple, Ptolomee il main armee vint froide- mcnt demander le triomphe. Cfrandeur et Decadence des Romaim. 1. Tous les gens. Give the various constructions of ^ews. 2. Y rSussirent. Suppress y, and give the equivalent. 3. lis Vaholirent. Give the antecedents of ils and V. What figure do you perceive in V ? Suppress it and re-arrange the sentence in regular order. 4. Ceux'ci travaillaienU What does ceux-ci refer to ? 5. Travaillaient, Why the imperfect ? 6. i?« introduisirent. Why the preterite definite ? 7. (?Mawc? on etait. What sort of pronoun is on. From what IS It derived ? Give its peculiarities. 8. L'autorite mSme. What part of speech is me'me. 9. Apris avoir r^tdbli. Resolve by tense and mood, and^v ^^^^ *^^ primitive Um^^oi r6u88ir,pouvoir, corrompre, ir. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 1. Before what countries is the definite article omitted ? 2 Name some substantives which are masculine in one signibcation, and feminine in another. 3. WV ; do proper names of persons take the mark of the plur r!d vhen not? 4 Mention some of the compound substantives, and state how they form the plural. .;v.f ■ T^''""'' '' an adjective placed after two or more substan- t^ives, to agree wi^h the last only, and when only with the before ?^^^° ^' ^^^jective or participle past take en govJ;n7n'FS''^^'''"°"^ ^''' ^ ^"P^^^'^^^^^ ^^^^-^ 8. With what verbs are disjunctive pronouns, or pro- nouns preceded by a preposition, used ? .vn?' ^T^ '"""^ collective general, and some partitive, and explain their respective agreement with the verb. dif^'tn^rj".-'^-^'''*^'^' ^i '?,''^^'^^^ number be an antece- sentences : ''' "^^ ^'"''''^ ^^^""^*^' '^' *'^"^^^»S iVbws e^<20«* c7^w3 ?w^ ^, comm;>r., II. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 1. Before what countries is the definite article omitted ? si JfipfZ' «°"J^/'^^«!^»t!ve3 which are masculine in one signitication, and femimne in another. 3 When do proper names of persons take the mark of the plural, and when not ? -lu. ui 4 Mention some of the compound substantives, and state how they form the plural. ' 5. When is an adjective placed after two or more substan- ^ives, to agree with the last U, and when only wiT the befor'e ?^*''" ^''' ^" '"^J''^''' "' P'^'^^^'P^^ P^^^ *^k« '^ govI;n7n'FSr "'''"'"' '°" ^ ^^P^^^^'^^' -^^^-^ .n„f ; ^'"'^ /if ''^'^' '''^ disjunctive pronouns, or pro- nouns preceded by a preposition, used ? ^ .^nfnJn^.W^ """' Collective general, and some partitive, and explam their respective agreement with the verb. 41^'is'owVatr'" " "'^'' *'' "^^""^^" ^'^^^ "^"^ A.lh ^""^ an adjective or cardinal number be an antece- s^ntL^r^^"^ P""°"" • ^""^*' ^^'^-^^^' ^^^ following Mus e'tions deux, qui Staient du meme avi. • .,«, panez comme un homme qui entendez la maUei'l ' ■5 1. 1 . .4-1 J ^a . ''1 ft\ t I tf ti m. r 1 1 ^^^^1 ai g€ K= Wini\>ttuitp of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIEST YEAR. ELEMENrARY CHEMISTRY. Examiner: Henry Croft, D.O.L. 1. What changes accompany chemical action ? 2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides. 3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is an acid salt i Give instances. 4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids? Give the general formulas of their salts. 5. Describe the preparation and properties;^of oxygen. 6. In what forms may carbon occur ? 7. Give the general properties of the metals. 8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides. 9. What metals are not acted on by nitric acid ? Kia'g^si'ie 0=8^ equivalent of bisulphate of potassa: •" * 'if' fli^Ei^ MttM^aiMMfli '■.pt-^}'t ■-'I... ■iji^^B^M \^- ■ -^^H E. ■ nM \-f- ■ '"- m ;: mi an gei 1 WLnmtmn of Zovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIRST YEAR. ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. Examiner: Henry Cbopt, D.CL. 1. What changes accompany chemical action ? 2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides. 3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is an acid salt ? Give instances. 4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids ? Give the general formulas of their salts. 5. Describe the preparation and properties'of oxygen. 6. In what forms may carbon occur ? 7. Give the general properties of the metals. 8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides. 9. What metals are not acted or by nitric acid ? 10. Calculate the equivalent of bisulphate of potassa: K=39 S=16 0=8. BnmvultVi of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIEST YEAR. ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. Examiner : Henry Ckoft,' D.C.L. 1. What changes accompany chemical action ? 2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides. 3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is an acid salt ? Give instances. 4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids ? Give the general formulas of their salts. 5. Describe the preparation and properties'of oxygen. 6. In what forms may carbon occur ? 7. Give the general properties of the metals. 8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides. 9. What metals are not acted on by nitric acid ? 10. Calculate the equivalent of bisulphate of potassa: K=39 S=16 0=8. 1. 'i'i ■■ ■» rt \ . WLnmvnit^ of Zovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIRST YEAR. ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. AK Examiner: Henr\ CaoF , D.C.L. 1. What is meant by single and double elective affinity ? Give instances. 2. What circumstances favour chemical action ? 3. Give the laws of combination. 4. Show by formulas the different modes of preparing oxygen. 5. Give the preparation and properties of hydrosulphuric acid. How does it act on metallic oxides ? 6. Give the preparation and properties of sulphurous acid. What is its action on vegetable colours ? 7. Give the sources and properties of boracic acid. 8. Give the preparation and properties of potassium. 9. How does carbonate of lime occur in nature i 10. Mention the principal minerals in which alumina is found. 11. Give the ores and oxides of lead. 12. Give the ores and oxides of tin. How are the latter prepared r ". ''K^^t^r:,: ■?^:i*^1 .» . • * Wini\}tv&itp of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIRST YEAR. ELEMENTARY NATURAL HISTORY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. ^^a'niner.l^llZi^^^^T'^-^-'- i t 1. Sketch of vegetable anatomy, an accosnt of the elementary parts of plants, with their principal variations. 2. Food of plants, with the means of obtaining it. 3. When a plant is removed from one place to another, what are the causes of danger, and what are the precau- tions proper to be employed ? 4. General structure of Lamellibranchiate Mollusks— points of chief importance as affording useful discriminating characters. The five orders, with the families under each. 5. Proboscidean Gasteropoda: the families, with their distinguishing characters. 6. Analysis of Raptorial birds, distinguishing the families and sub-families, with the habits peculiar to each. 7. Family Magapodidae : their relations with other birds, and their peculiar habits, especially in respect to the pro- duction of their young. * -m ft.- AT. c I' l'^?•'!'®® ""i Grallatorial birds, with the sub-families of the RalhdaB, and their distinguishing habits. 9. What are the characters which have caused the family Columbidae to be placed among Rasores? What are the objections to this view ? 10. Insessores : the sub-orders with the families of Firsirostres, and particulars of their mode of life. ij:av8a, (jJiXrjv e? TrarpiSa yatav Nrja KaTca-xefievat, iirel ovKerc irKnh, yvvai^iv.'] AXX aye fioi roBe elire koI drpeKew^i KardXe^ov, Et irov en ^coovTO'i aKovere 7raiB6 dvBpe^ ^Adrivaloi, tovtm ; el ydp /x?} f-^o'tjO/jGere ttuvtI crdevet Kara to hvvarov, Oeo.oacrOe ov rpoTrov vfieh earpa- rTjyrjKora iruvja eaeaOe v-rrep i\L7r7rov. virijpxov ^GXvvdioi BvvafJLiv rtva KeKTrjfxepoc, koX 8ie/cei6' ovtco to. Trpdy/JbaTa' ovre ^I'tAtTTTro? iOdppet rovTovi ov9' oiiToi iiv'-i ^CXiTTTTOv.^ eTrpd^afzev r)fieh KUKetvoi irpo^ r)fia^ €ipi]vr}v. WrcvTO coa-rrep ifnr68iapLdTi rrp ^tXiWw Kai ^vayeph TToXiv fxcyd\7)u €(f)opfielv rot? iavrou Kaipol^ ScriWay'- fievTjv 7r/309 77/itt9. €/ciro\€fii](7at 8uv fpofieOa roix} dvOpd}. TTov^ iK Travrb^ rpoirov koX S iravre^ hdpvXovv riay^ TOVTO ireTrpaKTat vvvl OTrcDaSi^Trore. ri o^u VTroXoi-rrov, & avbpe^ Mvvaioc, ttXtjv ^o'qdelv ippcofiivco^ Kal 7rpo0t)ua)<;; 67C0 fxev ov^ \opS>' x09 ravra iiriKXivai r^ 'Trpajfiara. Olynthiac, III. 1. Xprjcro/xeea rourtp. Supply the ellipsis. 2. eddppet. What is the difference in meaning between tfappetv riva and Uappetv rivt ? 3. KdKelvoi. When is the iota subscribed where Ka\ is thus united with another word ? 4. Kal hvaxepk. Explain the construction. 5. icpop/xelv. Give the full force. 6. €0pv\ovv, What other form of this word ? 7. Kaducpeifxeda. Parse. 8. eTTiK^ivai. What is understood ? 9. T»]9 7repL(7rd(Tv^ Up. How is dp used with a participle ? rv. r/•^,?f•''^i^^!^^ geographical position of Olynthus. How did Philip finally succeed in capturing it ? rev'eniJI?''* ^^^° '^^ princii.4l sources of the Athenian 3. What is meant by the trierarchy ? 4. Who was the real founder of the Athenian democracy? 1 "« r-f ,i ?•.:; A Translat omt vasi atqi est, sev( si t( jura exic pen dub ."aci rogj con£ 1. Dig parietes, 2. Qu What? 3. Gi\ Winii^tvuitS! of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. LATIN. Examiners .'i^^""' "^Tt^^'^.V^' ^^•^• \ Thomas Moss, M.A. =ii I. Translate : Templa Deorum imraortaliura, tecta urbis, vitam omnium civium, Italiam deniquo totam, ad exitium et vastitatem vocas. Quarc, quoniam id, quod primum, atque hujus imperii disciplinccque raajorum proprium est, facere nondum audeo; faciam id, quod est ad severitatem lenius, ad communem salutem utilius. Nam si te interfici jussero, residebit in republica reliqua con- juratorum manus : sin tu (quod te jumdudum hortor) exieris, exhaurietur ex urbe tuorum comitum magna et perniciosa sentina reipublica). Quid est, Catilina ? num dubitaa id, me imperante, facere, quod jam tua sponte .aciebas ? Exire ex urbe consul hostem jubet. Inter- rogas me, num in exilium ? non jubeo ; sed, si me consulis, suadeo. Cicero, in Oatilinam^ I., 5. 1. Distinguish templwm and delulrum, muri, mania and parietes, exilium and relegatio. 2. Quod primum. What is meant? Wi What? 3. Give list of verbs governing two datives. Mj.: ■ IP t:' hF i'>i 1 ' *'' ' -hI ■1 rf. .'- >* ;"i ? ''.'• i 1 ij'i ^ bE-^"' ,s ^ Ik ii4r r . II. Translate : Ergo illi alienum, quia poeta fuit, post mortem etiam expetunt : nos bunc vivum, qui et voluntate et legibus noster est, rcpudiabimus ? prcesertim cum omne olim studiiinj, atqne omne ingenium contulerit Arcbias ad populi Romani gloriam Laudemque celcbrandam ? Nam et Cimbricas res adolescens attigit, et ipsi illi C. Mario, qui durior ad bscc studia videbatur, jucundus fuit. Neque eiiim quisquam est tarn aversus a Musis, qui non mandari versibus ccternum suorum laborum facile prteconium patiatur. Themistoclem ilium, summum Athenis virum, dixisse aiunt, cum ex eo qusereretur, quod acroama, aut cujus vocem libentissime audiret, ejus, a quo sua virtus optime prsedicaretur. Cicero, pro ArcJua, 0, 1. On wbat grounds was tbe citizensbip of Archias im- pugned, and on Avbat defended ? 2. Write brief notices of C. Marius and Themistocles, introducing dates wbcre you can. 3. Give tbo otlicr degrees of comparison of facile and libentissime. III. Translate : Diversce voluntatos civium fucrunt, distractrequo sen- tential Non enim consiliis solum et studiis, sed armis etiam et castris dissidebamns. Erat auiem obscuritas quredam, erat certamcn inter clarissimos duces : multi dubitabant, quid optimum esset ; multi, quid sibi expe- diret ; multi, quid dcccret : nonnulli etiam, quid liceret. Perfuncta respubiica est hoc misero ffttalique bello : vicit is, qui non fortuna inflammarct odium suum, sed bonitato leniret; ncc qui omncs, quibus iratus esset, eosdem etiam exilio aut morte dignos judicaret. Arma ab aliis posita, ab aliis crcpta sunt. Ingratus est, injustusque civis, qui armorum periculo libcratus, ani- mum tamen rotinet armatum ; ut etiam illo sit melior, qui in acie cecidit, qui in causa animum profudit. Quaj enim pertinacia quibusdam, eadein aliis constantia videri poteiSt. Cicero, pro MarcellOf 10. 1. What classes of verbs govern the ablative ? 2. Inflammaret. Why in subjunQtive ? 3. Give examples of nouns used only in the plural. 4. What other extant spoccli ^vas delivered by Cicero in the same year with that for Mavcellus ? Translate : Septimi, Gades aditure mecum ot Cantabrum indoctum juga ferrc nostra et liarbaras Syrtes, ubi Maura semper iEstuat unda ; Tibur Argeo positum colono Sit mcae sedes utinam sencctce, Sit modus lasso maris et viarum Militiaeque ! Undo si Parcse prohibent iniqujc, Bulce pellitis ovibus Gala33i Flumen ct regnata petam Laconi Rura Phalanto. Horace, Odes, II., 6. 1. Give scales of the metres. 2. What is the construction o? maris and of ovibus P 3. Write explanatory notes on Omitabrum to nostra, Tibur to colono, and regnata to Phalanto. ^, -tibur V. Translate : * ' Delicta majorum immeritus lues, Romane, donee templa refeccria' iEdesque lobcntcs Deorum ct Focda nigio simulacra fumo. J) IS te minorcm quod gcris, imporas : ILnc omne principium, hue refer exitum. Di muUa /lo^lecti dedorunt Hesperip;^ mala luctuos!>3. Jam bis iij. ureses et Pacori manus Non auspicates contudit impeius Nostros et adjecisse precdam ■* •-•i-^v.iuuo caI^uis iuniuet. Horace, Odes, III,, 6. If*! >i- I** ril 1. Give scales of the metres, 2. Write explanatory notes on Jam bis to nostroSy and Torquibus exiguis. 3. Give scales of the Epichoriambics found in the odes. VI. Translate : Ne forte credas interitura quse Longe sonantera natus ad Aufidum Non ante vulgatas per artes Verba loquor socianda chordis : Non, si priores Mseonius tenet Sedes Honierus, Pindaricse latent Ceseque ot Alca3i minaces Stesichorique graves Camense. Horace, Gdes, IV., 9. 1. Explain natus ad Aufidum^ Mceonius^ and Cese. 2. What were the birth-places of Pindar^ Alaseus^ and Stesichorus ? 3. Give examples of Grcecisras used by Horace. 4. What were the circumstances of Horace's introduction to Msecenas ? and what the probable date ? i. S- i 1' ■. 1 mnmtms ot jKototuo. J •'nr * ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. SECOND YEAR. GREEK. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. ^xami7iers : J ^^'^' ^0"^ MgCaul, LL.D 1 Thomas Moss. M a Moss, M.A. *.'.«^ .'>■; n Translate: ypd^f^ara; ""Ap^^^.o'" cbX^Pu'ffA ^4^'' ^^ -^ ^^ S.^o.a rco. rare 'AZ^^XTara?! ' " ^^ i](Tec€V uTifMiav rl yap tgj ZeKelrr}, rcou ^Adrjvaicou Koivoiv el fj,r] fieOe^CLV efieXkev ; a\X' ov tovto \eyei, aXX! iv Tot? (jjoviKoli; yiypairrai vofioL'i, virep wv av fxr) ciSo) ^ovov BiKaaaadaL, dXV evayk y to diroKTeluai,, " ml drLfjLo^" (fiTj^rl " redvarco." tovto 8)) \iyei, KaOapov tov rovToyv tlvcl airoKTeivavTa ehac oukovv evo/xi^ov gkuvol rr}? TrdvTcov TOiv '¥Jk\i]V(ov a(OTripia, m I \ I ■ ■•■ »8 6. Parse Bo^^fitaVf /MeXicoVj a/jLTrerdaa^f Be^eroj '^a-rat. 7. Accentuate tlip following words according to their different significations : oposr, ev Xiyeiv Tvyqv' ')(pV B\ ocTTi^ eta-i, Kaprepdv 6eov Soaiv. HP. el fydp roaaurrju hvvajXLV el-)(ov coaTe ai]v e? (pco'i TTopevaai vepTepcov ex Bco/xdrcov ryvvatKa^ Kol aoi rrjvBe Tropcrvvai %a/3ty. * IV. 1. Howij t'litj partially comic character of this drama accounted for \* 2. Whai r. 'igious meaning is supposed to be involved in this legend ? 3. What restriction upon the use of the Iambic syzygy in choriambics ? 4. When is a verse called dvaK\cofievo<; ? 5. Give instances of lonicisms used by the tragedians. 6. Give a brief biographical sketch of the inventor of Greek tragedy. 7. Mention any extant specimen of a Greek historical tragedy. What other is known to have existed ? 8. Quote instances of the sophistry of Euripides. ttnflif tfiifti^ of SToronto* At UAL 1 WIINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. vr Examiners : LATIN. HONORS. T Rev. John McCa \ Thomas Moss, M D. .v^ I. Translate : Ergo ipsas qnamvis angiisti terminus SBvi Excipiat, (neque enim plus septima ducitur sestas), At genua immortale manot, multosque per annos Stat fortuna domus, ct avi numerantur avorum. Praeterea regem non sic iEgyptos et ingens Lydia, nee populi Parthorum aut Medus Ilydaspes Observant. Roge incoluini mens omnibus una est ; Amisso, rupere fidem constructaque mella Diripuere ipsoc, et crates solvere favorum. Ille operum custos ; ilium admirantur, ct omnes Circumstant fremitu dense, stipantque frequentes Et ssepe attollunt humeris, et c rpora bello Objectant, pulchramque petnnt per vulnera mortem. His quidam signis atque oc exempla secuti, Esse apibus partem divinac mentis et haustus iEtherios dixere : deum namque ire per omnes Terrasque tractusque maris coelumque profundura ; Hinc pecudes, armenta, viros, genus omne ferarum, Quemque sibi tenues nascentera arcessere vitas ; Scilicet hue reddi deinde ac resoluta referri Omnia ; nee morti esse locum, sed viva volare Sideris in numerum atque alto succedere coelo. Virgil, Qeorgics, iv., vv. 206-20T. * ;. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 4. 1.0 L£|2.8 1.4 HmSSSs IP I.I 1.25 — 6" V] <^ /] 7 >^ (9 / Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ^ Irii' f w ft !;*>■ ;-^- ■ !«# 1. When is finaU-* long ? When short? 2. P/Ms sf^^ewza ^sto5. What is the construction > 3. Distinguish mdnet and wawef. 4. Distinguish avi, abavi, atavi, and proavl 5. 7/i^.ns Zyc^ea. What is the meaning of the epithet ? 6. 7psa?. What is the force ? 7. Eis signis. In what case, and why ? thiL^Sr'""^"'' ^'- ^^^'' ^^^*^ ^f philosophers held II. Translate : d,vl*!S?''°'' f ^'''!.' "^^ *"'P" '^*' P^<> fortissimo viro dicere incipientem, timere; minimeque deceat, cum 1. Annius ipse magis de reipublic^ salute, quam de sua perturbetur, mead ejus%ausam parem aTm^ magnitudmem afterre non posse; tamen hL novi iud icii nova forma terret oculos ; qui, quocumque inciderint veterem consuetudmem fori, et pristinum morem iud ! ciorum requirunt. Non enim corona consessus vester cinctus est, ut solebat; non usitata frequentia stipati sumus. Nam illa prjesidia, qu^ pro templis omnrus ta^n Vf .'T^.r^ ^.o^ocata"^ sunt, non affe un tamen oratori aliquid; ut in foro etinjudicio, quan- quam pr^sidiis salutaribus et necessariis septi slu^ tamen ne non timere quidem sine aliquo timore poss ! mus. Qu^ SI opposita Miloni putarem, cederem temper judices, nee inter tantam vim armorum existimlS' oratori locum esse. Sed me recreat et refia cT Pompeii, sapientissimi et justissimi viri. consilium: qui profecto nee justitiae suae putaret esse, quem reum sen tentns judicum tradidisset, eundem teli's militum rdere nee sapient!^ temeritatem concitat^ multitudinis auc- toritate publica armare. Quamobrem ilia arma cen- tariones, cohortes, non periculum nobis, sed pr^es dium denunciant: neque solum, ut quieto, sed etiam^irmaZ ammo simus, hortantur; neque auxilium mode defen- sioni meae verum etiam silentium pollicentur. Reliqua vero multitude, quae quidem est civium, tota nostra est- neque eorum quisquam, quos undique intuentes ex hoc ipso loco cernitis, unde aliaua nara fnr,' o.7a«;«; ^^.._. et hujus exitum ju(3icii expectantes, non cum vlrtuti M, onis favet, turn de se, de liberis suis, de patria de fortums, hodierno die decertari putat. ^ ' Cicero, 'pro Milone. 1. Eeec novijudicii nova forma. What is the meaning ? 2. Corona consessm. Explain each of these terms. 3. Tamen to possimus. Give the meaning fully. plated'^rt tf:S '' ^'^^ P^^"^^^^ circumstances was he 5. Quidem. What is the force ? 6. i)....^.n- What is the effect of de in composition^ n. aldefof cfodiuf """"^ ^' *^^ '''' '' ^^^ before the 8. Discuss the question as to the date of the murder. m , III. Translate : Quando repostum Coecubum ad festas dapes Victore iaetus Ccesare ^ Tecum sub alta, sic Jovi gratum, domo, Beate Mascenas, bibam, Sonante mixtum tibiis carmen lyra Ilac Dorium, illis barbarum ? ' Ut nuper, actus quum freto Neptunius JJux funrit ustis Havibus, Minatus Urbi vincla, qua) dctr.-^xerat teervis amicus perfidis. Romanus, eheu, nosteri ncgabitis, iliraancipatus ferain^ Fert vallum et arma miles et spadonibus teervire rugosis potest, Interque signa turpe militaria Sol adspicit conopiura. At hoc fremences, vcrterunt bis mille equos balli, canentes CcGsarem, liostiliumque navium portu latent ■^ "PPcs sinistrorsura cita3. lo Trinmr)lip tn mor"T"'- -.i,-. tarrus et intactas boves ? » h i.' amsimtliiiiiM L lo Triumphe, neo Jugurthino parem Bello reportasti ducem, Neque Africanum, cui super Carthaginem Virtus sepulchrum condidit. Horace, UpodeSj ix. 1. Give a scale of the Iambic Senarian, as used by Horace in the Epodes. 2. Freto. What ? NeptuniuB dux. Who ? 3. Feminse. In what case, and why ? 4. Potest. Give the corresponding Greek term. 5. Oonopium. What ? Whence derived ? 6. Hoc. In what case, and why ? 7. (}aU{. Who ? Describe the position of their country. 8. Sinistrorsum. What is the meaning ? », IZ. Horace ountry. ' ni _S*_iAi"* 1_ ..*». j , Uni\}tvuitu of ^iToronto, ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. TRANSLATION INTO LATIN PROSE AND VERSE. Examiners • / S^^' "^^"^ McCaul, LL.D. •^^^'"*"^'^*' \ Thomas Moss, M. A. I. I have assisted your commanders with naval forces, so that not one of your allies can equal me ; I have furnished supplies by land and and by sea; I have been present at all the naval I ittles, that have taken place; I have no where spared my labour or my risk. I have suffered that which is most wretched in war, a siege, having been shut in at Pergamus with the utmost danger at once of my life and of my king- dom. Afterwards having been freed from the siege, I met your consul with my whole fleet at the Hellespont, that I might assist him in getting his army over. After your army had crossed into Asia, I never departed from the consul ; no Roman soldier was more regular in your camp than I and my brother. No expedition, no cavalry engage- ment took place without me. Navalis copia, ut nemo vester socius ego cequiparo possum f imperator vester adjuvo; commeatus terra mareque sUppedito ; navalis proelium, qui jio, omnis adsum ; nee labor meuSf nee periculum usquam parco. Qui miser sum in helium^ ohsidio patior, Pergamus includo cum discrimen ultra simul vita regnum que. Libera deinde obsidio, totus classis ad Sellespontus consul vester occurro, ut is in trajicio exercitus adjuvo : postquam in Asia exereitus vester trans- gredior^ nunquam a consul abscedo : nemo miles Romanus magis assiduus in castra vester sum, quam ego frater que meus. Nullus expedition nuUus equestris proelium sine egofio. II. How happy had it been for him to have died in that sick- ness, when all Italy was putting up vows and prayers for his safety ! or if he had fallen by the chance of war, on the plains of Pharsalia, in the defence of his country's liberty, he had died still glorious, though unfortunate : but as if he had been reserved for an example of the instability of human greatness, he who a few. days before commanded kings and consuls, and all the noblest of Rome, was sentenced to die by a council of slaves ; murdered by a base deserter ; cast out naked and headless on the Egyptian strand ; and, when the whole earth, as Velleius says, had scarce been sufficient for his victories, could not find a spot upon it at last for a grave. His body was burnt on the shore by one of his freedmen, with the planks of an old fishing-boat; and his ashes being conveyed to Rome, were deposited, privately, by his wife Cornelia, in a vault of his Alban villa. The Egyptians, however, raised a monument to him on the place, and adorned it with figures of brass, which being defaced afterwards by time, and buried almost in sand and rubbish, was sought out and restored by the Emperor Hadrian. III. The wind, that beats the mountain, blows More softly round the open wold, And gently comes the world to those That are cast in gentler mould. And me this knowledge bolder made. Or else I had not dared to flow In these words toward you, and invade Even with a verse your holy woe. 'Tis strange that those we lean on most. Those in whose laps our limbs are nursed, Fall into shadow, soonest lost : Those we love first are taken first. God gives us love. Something to love He lends us ; but, when love is grown To ripeness, that on which it throve Falls off, and love is left alone. 1 UWym < - '> 5 ••'sSiL Unmvuitp of STotonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAR. STATICS AND DYNAMICS. Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B. A. ■f 1. Enunciate the parallelogram of forces, and assuming its truth as regards the direction of the resultant, prove it for the magnitude of the resultant. Also assuming its truth for the magnitude of the resultant prove it for the direction of the resultant. 2. State and prove the triangle of force. Two forces act at, a point. Their magnitude and the an»le made by one of them with a fixed line being given ; shew tbat^in general equilibrium may be maintained by either of two forces acting at the point in a direction parallel to the fixed line. Point out the exceptional cases. 3. Enunciate the condition of equilibrium of a rigid body capa- ble of turning about a fixed point, when actad on by any forces in a plane passing through that point. State the different propositions which must be proved in order to establish this condition of equilibrium. A uniform wire is formed into a triangle ABC, right angled at C, and is suspended from C, ^ is the angle which the side AC makes with the vertical : shew that tan fl = r • t-^ 6 6+c. 4. Shew that every system of heavy particles has one, and only one centre of gravity. Investigate the position of the centre of gravity of a triangular lamina, and shew that it coincides with that of three equal heavy particles placed at the angular pointa of the triangle. 5. When a rigid body ia suspenJed from a fixed point, shew thatthe point of suspension and the centre of gravity of the bodv must lie in the same vovtical line. o j « uuuy A triangle ABC, light angled at C, is suspended successively T ft ^""^3 '• 1^' ^ ^t ^^^ .*"«^^« "^^^^ ^y AC, BC respectil.i? with the vertical in each position ; shew that cot $. cot = 1 ated. ^^'"'^® *^® common steelyard, and shew how it is gradu- 7. Desciibe that system of pullies, in which each hangs bv a separate string, the last puUy supporting the weight, ^i^d the relation between P and W for this system, (i.) when the wethte of^the pulhes are neglected, and (ii.) when\hey are 41^ Shew that if the weight of each of the pullies equals P no mechanical advantage is gained or lost by the systel ^ ' 8. Explain how velocity and acceleration are measured (1.) when uniform, and (ii.) when variable. "measured ,- ifi'i /?»rT'''^ ''{.^^'^ °^ *^« «y°»^ol« i° the formula » = «« + */^' ? Prove this formula. 'ormma 9. Two bodies P and Q are connected by an inextensibln .,tr,-r.« whjch passes over a smooth fixed pully ; U tL acceS^^^^^^ each body, and the tension of the string. acceleration of JJ'J'^^y tbe range, time of flight, and the greatest elevation of^a particle projected in any direction from a pit in a W^ Shew that the tangent of the inclination of the direction of motion to the plane at any time = ^^''^^^al velocity^ Tf fl , , . , , horizontal velocity. fn!l^' ^.u ?^ ^°^^^^ "^^^^^ ^t^ *lie horizon by the tan«Pnf« to he path of a projectile at the points P and Q the tLl J ^ aonbmg the arc P Q is proportional to (tan ^ I' tl ^^ I Jihe-rXlr^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^*^^ -^^ ^-- vdocities, I 4"ai A, moving with the same velocity and in the same jdirectioD, each move with a velocity u ; shew that §• =. J±ii lutukstlt^^^ obliquely upon a ball B at rest, their ffterLpact *^ ^ '' ^^*«^^^«« *^« "Motion of each ball ! «;« ^ , ■ 1 , «r »' .' ' Aid 'i >'| ^ni\^tvuitp of tsotonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner: Rev. W. Jones B. A. y ■ VTVPT 1. Define the locus of an equation. What are the looi of the following equations 1 (i.) {Ax+ByJrCy+{A'x+B'y^Cy=(i (ii.) {Ax-irBy^C) {A'x+B'y->rC')=.0 (iii.) /(|) = (iv.) /(0=0 (V.) /((9)=0. 2. Shew how to find the equation to a line which passes through the intersection of two lines whose equations are given, and also through another point. Shew that the lines which pass through the origin, and the CC 'U »Xj f/ intersection of the line l ^ = 1 with the lines H v = 1 ■' * p ah a and — + — - = 1 will be at right angles to each other, if 6' a 3. Find an expression for the area of a triangle in terms of the polar co-ordinates of its angular points, and deduce the expres- sion in terms of the rectangular co-ordinates of its angular points. Shew that the area of the triangle made by the three lines whose eauations are eriven in Question 2 is + h { aa' {h-hj ah' •a I + a' a {h'-^y aa (/3-&) a '|3~a6' '- + ab—aB ) 4. Obtain the general equation to the circle in the form is a fixed point from which any straight line is drawn meeting a fixed straight line in P ; in OP a point Q is taken such that the rectangle OP. OQ is constant, shew that the locus of Q ia a circle, and find its centre and radius. 5. What is the test by which we determine whether the general equation of the second* degree represents a central curve or net 1 If it represent a central curve and be reduced to the form Ax'-{- Bf-\-2Cx7/-{-F=0, shew how it may be further reduced to the form Ax^+B>/^+F=0 by a proper choice of axes. 6. Investigate the equation to the tangent to the ellipse -7+ -XT = 1 at the point x'?/\ and express it in the form X coso:,-\.i/ sina - v^o*cosV+6^sin^ • If two tangents drawn through an external point h, h make with the major axis the angles a, «', shew that cot a 4- cot a' = 'ihk ~ h'-Ic'. 7. Shew that the points of the intersection of a tangent to an ellipse with the perpendiculars on it from the foci lie on the cir- cumferen e of the auxiliary circle. Hence obtain a geometrical construction for drawing the tan- gents to an ellipse from an external point. 8. Shew tihat the polar equation to a conic section is 1 = 1 r + e cos^, and that the polar equation to its tangent at the point whose angular co-ordinate is a, is-= co3(^— a) + ccos^. r 9. Define pole and polar. Shew that the polar of a point x^, y^, with respect to the ellipse ?! i J^ _ i i« £5a. Vh _ i If from any point in a line at right angles to an axis of the ellipse a hne be drawn perpendicular to the polar of the point it will intersect that axis in a fixed point. ' 10. Define conjugate diameters and supplemental chords in an elhpse, and prove that diameters drawn parallel to a pair of sup- plemental chords are conjugate. 11. Find the equation to a hyperbola when referred to its asymptotes as co-ordinate axes. What is the general equation to a hyperbola having two given straight hnes as asj^mptotes 1 ° 1 i ^i t' t^#^!^wH||ii ^- - -»•. 'vV.^^lli i^i '<. '« ', H *\ ■*-^m 1 . '■■;.A'M '•. ■• 11-4 * n . A f'i •^.> -> rT^^^^^^^^^En^S^^I « " '^^^H^l itOBSL '-^^^^H ■ mi ij^i^L i "i^ji^^^^^^^^^B^^^^^B • *■-■ *■ V , '_" ! ^ ' ftf ^^^^^^^^^HSSJ^lnd^^^^^H I!!'*-;: 2.* 1. Shew proaches, a negative or Defiui those of lo^ figure that i 2. If y = Differ (i: (iii: 3. Find t (i) 4. Prove the conditio] I^ni^tvuitp ^t SToronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAE. DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B A. 1. Shew that the limiting value to which A -f. 1. )* ap- proaches, as a; is increased indefinitely, is the same whan x is negative or fractional as when it is a positive integer. Define a differential co- efficient. From your definition find those of log(aa:), and a^ with respect to x. Also find from a figure that of tan 6 with respect to Q. 2. If y = J\z) and z = Zi -=_i ind a formula of reduction for /- — - — „ . Find a+6 cosx * (iv) cos^0. log cos . dx i' l-L.^ j, lit: ^ntt^tvMtip ot Sotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAR. NEWTON, SECTIONS L, II., III. Examiner: J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 1. State and prove Lemma 2, Section I. If the equal bases be each divided into n equal parts, and on these as bases two series of parallelograms be constructed as in the Lemma, the difference between these two series will be - of n that in the Lemma ; how then can each of the four series have the same limit 1 2. Define "similar" curvilinear figures, and prove that similar conterminous arcs, which have their chords coincident, have a common tangent. At corresponding points of two similar curves, the tangents are equally inclined to the radius-vectors, and the curvatures are proportional. 3. Obtain Newton's expression for the radius of curvature. If a curve pass through the origin, touching the axis of ?/, (coordinates rectangular.) the radius of curvature there == - Lt : ^ ; or if the curve be referred to polar coordinates, a point in the curve being pole and the tangent being initial line, the radius of curvature then = - Lt : - . 2 e 4. Prove Prop, 1, Section XL If impulses be communicated, as in the proposition, along parallel and equidistant lines, the timea of the body moving from « ^ '''"■• J Jt* i 1 •Si i,»U ^p:^ . -,: .. -L..,^^ :t1 * 1 t'wS >'< •,1 one line to tke next are the same, limit 1 Wliat cloes tills become in the 5. If J^Q be an arc of a plane orbit de.v»ribed by a body in time T, and QH be the subfense jmrallel to the direction of the resultant force at P; then, when FQ iind T are diminished indefinitely, ForceatP = 2Lt: ma ' Deduce expressions from which may be found the law of force tending to a fixed centre by which a given orbit may be described, and the velocity at any point. If the whole acceleration at P be resolved into two, one along the tangent and the other along the normal, and QR be the perpendicular subtense, shew that the latter component ia 2 Lt : 2? , but the former is not 2 Lt : ^. 6. A body revolves in the circumference of a circle, to find the law of force by which it is attracted to a given point. (Prop. 7.) If the centre of force be an external point, what part of the circle will bo described ? Deduce the law of force when it acts in parallel lines. 7. A body describes a hyperbola round a centre of force iu its geometrical centre, to find the law offeree. (Prop. 10.) In all similar hyperbolas described under the same force tending to the centre, the times of describing a given angle from the apse are the same. 8. A body revolves in an ellipse or hyperbola, to find the law offeree tending to a focus. (Props. 11, 12.) A particle at an assigned point, moving in a given direction with given velocity about a fixed centre of force which varies as I may be describing either of two distinct hyperbolas, (Dist)" according as the force is attractive or repulsive ; shew that the latera recta of these hyperbolas are the same, but the lengtlis of the transverse axes are not. 9. Obtain an expression for the angular velocity at any point in a central orbit. In an ellipse round the focus, excentricity being -— , the v2 difference between the greatest and least angular velocities h eight times the mean angular velocity. 10. State Kepler's laws o^che planetary motions, and examine what inferences can be ft awn therefrom by aid of the propositions in these sections. How is tJie third law to be extended so as to include the cases of parabolic or hyperbolic orbits 1 Shew how the force of gravity at the earth's surface may be compared with the force, tending to the earth's centre, which retains the moon in her orbit. » * ■■ if! ■'". m 1. : n dim a mnfiierfiiftj? of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. SECOND AND THIRD YEARS, AND CANDIDATES FOR B.A. PROBLEMS. HONORS. ExaminerB: \ i ^' Cherriman, M.A. I Rev. W. Jones, B.A. rifs I 1. If yt«) be a rational and integral function of x of less than n dimensions, and a, 6, c, .... be w quantities, prove M. . 1 ,Mi 1 a (a — 6)(a~c) . . ."^ 6 ' (b—a) (A— c) . . .+ ' ' ' a6c. . . 2. In a fixed line AB, any point M is taken, and ^ J/ is A^'j, ^^ * ^^^^ '^'^^^ ^ ^' tJirough J/ a perpendicular to ^ ^ IS drawn, and in it a point P is taken such that AP + AN IS constant. Shew that the locus of P is a conic. 3. In a rectangular hyperbola, the length of normal intercepted by the axes is bisected by the curve, and is equal to the length ot the corresponding tangent intercepted between the asymptotes. 4. C is the centre of a hyperbola, and C7P, CD are conjugates : 1 n IS produced to cut the axes, and perpendiculars to them are erected at the points of section. Prove that these perpendiculars meet the intermediate asymptote in the same point aa the tangent 5. In a central cojiic, (excentricity e, conjugate axis 2 6,) the ■'. ->>J : n i f'r. I:, r . ;■•♦ tangent of the angle betwoou the tangent »t a point (ar,y,) and the central mdiuB vector, is . 1 6' the princii)al axes being axes of co-ordinutcH. 6. If PF be the perpendicuhir dropped from anv jMjint /* of an ellipse upon the conjugate CD produced, and another oliipse bo constructtd with F m centre, FP m one Hcnii-axis, and the other Bemi-axis equal to CD; shew that the two ellipses will cut off equal chords from any line drawn parallel to CD. 7. Pornbolna are described with the same vertex and all touch- ing the p;ime straight line ; find the locus of their foci. 8 Through each of two points of a curve a line is drawn equally inclined in the same sense to the tangent there ; shew that as one of these lines ajjproaches to coincidence with the other, their ultimate intersection is the foot of the per{)endicular drop[)ed on the latter from the centre of curvature at the corres- ponding point. 9. Find the value for a; = 0, of -j-j- (x cot a); and shew that dx' dr if the value of -j- (x cot .t) for cr = 0, bo denoted by \j^ u^^ then will, for values of n gieater than 1, 2/1-1-1 , , — - — u = u u-{-u u + 2 2n 2n— 2 2 2«— 4 4 + U n+1 1 , + 2^' u , (n odd) n-l (n even). 10. Two given points A, £, lie outside a circle, (centre C); P is a point on the circumference such that the path APB is a minimum : shew that CP produced will bisect the angle APR 1 1 . No parallelogram inscribed in an ellipse can exceed half the rectangle under the axes. 12. Two similar and equal conies are placed with their vertices and the direction of their transverse axis coincident, their concavities being turned in opposite directions : one remains fixed, and the other rolls ufion it ; sh» w how to find the locus of a point whose position relative to the rolling curve is fixed. If the curves are parabolas, shew that the locus of the focus of the rollinc curve is the directrix of the fixed curve j also find the locus of the vertex of the rolling < urve. iff!" -Vf 13. Show how the ^mac^mj, r.=3 2a cos 0—a, in generated by taking points upon conterminous chordH of a circle, and explain tjie reason tor its name. Tract .ae curve completely, and shew that the area between the Circle and outer branch of the curve exceedei that between the circle and the inner branch by the area of the circle. 14. Two forces acting at a fixed point are represented by chorda of a given ellipse, drawn i);irallel to pairs of conjugate diameters ; show that their resultant is constant in magnitude aud direction. 15. A lino moves so as a' "ays to form wi*h two fixed straight lines a triangle of c< tstant rea ; shew t'lat the locus of the centre of gravity of tht .>u)gi>' is hyperl a. 16. From a pouit in • her ol two confocal ellipses a perfectly elastic ball is pro/'cted ih a dir' otion which would pass through one of the foci, and after imi>ingi ' {2n — 1) times on the ellipses returns to the point of pr^ nction ; shew that the length of its path is n times the differei f the major-axes of the ellipses. 17. Parabolas in the ^ particles projected from tht but in different directions tangent to one of the para through the point where thu that the locus of P is a circle. vertical plane are described by ame point with the same velocity P k & point in which the initial IS meets a vertical which passes arabola meets a fixed line ; shew 18. If S, R, be two centre, f force round which the same orbit can be described se[)aratei by a body in the same periodic tine, and SB meet the tangent u P in T; the duplicate ratio of the forces at i' in the two cases is RT*RP: -^.'SP, i . *--*..v I. «• H*M r. ■ 1 1 1 If'' ^ II • * SUmtietrttiti? of SToronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864 FACULTY OP LAW, FIRST YEAR. FACULTY OF ARTS, SECOND YEAR. ENGLISH. -i&^ar.r../«:/?-W^i«ON,LL.D. \ J. A. Boyd, M.A. %*Answer8 to all the questions are not indispensable; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. L He was the bravest that Home sent forth. He was the first that came. There is an elliptical form hero, involving ambiguity • define all possible meanings, and re-construct the sentences so as clearly to express each. (a.) " I was never yet once, and commend their resolu- tions who never marry twice." Religio Medici. {b.) "If it were done when 'tis done, then 'twere well It were done quickly." Macbeth. (^^| h^'-3j1 1 gH^il ffill j. .'W 3'3f'' •J.'i » ^ ■■<■ s.. ,.••* Cttsaawuu^Eii. JT*bi%jn jiH It i ' Unititv^ittjf of tElotontn. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAR. HISTORY, Examiners • i ^' Wilson, LL.D. *^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. I. Outlines of Mediaeval History. (1.) What events mark the beginning and the close of Mediaeval History ? Apportion and characterize the periods into which it may be divided. (2.) What causes contributed to the extinction of feudal- ism ? Explain generally how it was that thereafter a free constitution was established in England, but absolute monarchies arose on the continent. (3.) Describe the character and historical importance of Gregory VII. (4.) Sketch the establishment and progress of the Swiss confederacy, and the manner in which it maintained its independence. (5.) Sketch the history of the Hanseatic League. II. British History, from Henry VIII. to the Revolution. (1.) Contrast briefly the Reformation in England and Scotland, as regards its introduction, progress, and results. (2.) State the circumstances which led to the downfall of the Earl of Essex, in Elizabeth's reign. (3.) "When Elizabeth came to the throne," says Lingard, "England ranked only among the secondary kingdoms; before her death it had risen to a level with the first nations of Europe." Detail the chief causes whereby this was effected. (4.) What differences of opinion existed as to Elizabeth's successor, and what considerations ultimately prevailed ? (5.) When and by whom was the " Declaration of Rights " drawn up and confirmed? What are its most important provisions? :: T'-n i r/i-.i v<: k '• I » 'f . * 'in 11 ■"'■'•-■ ^ ''^ • an t "i«S- * fc-f : -vf'» ?' Winii)tvniti!! of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIKST YEAE. (In Law.) HISTORY. Examiners • / ^' Wilson, LL.D. ■^^'^^^"''^^•tj. A. BoYD,M.A. ' . f« "^^^ Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to to as many as can he over- taken within the time. I. British history, Charles I. to William III. (1.) Trace the descent of Charles I. from the house of Tudor. (2.) When and by whom was the Declaration of Rights drawn up and confirmed? What are its most important provisions ? (3.) What great constitutional principle was settled by raising William III. to the throne? Give some account of the parliamentary discussions which preceded this event. (4.) What do you understand by the " Act of Settlement "? Set forth its most important enactments. II. Salic law and Feudal system. (1.) What contributed to the extinction of feudalism? Explain how it was that thereafter a free constitution ws established iu England, but absolute monarchies arose on the continent. (2) Whit was the c lef object of the Salic Law ? Why so called ? In what manner was its observance established as a constitutional principle in Franco ? (3.) In what respects did feudalism, as it obtained in England, differ from continental feudalism? State the causes of this difference. (4.) Give some account of the feudal incidents of escheats, aids, and wardship. Vf' I •M « . * 'i'. i'.'^mir A USBit? ^^ >M -iil 11 1^ Wini\^tvnitt}! of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. ENGLISH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. [t5Sf- '•* ' IT . > D. Wilson, LL.D. Jbxavuners : j j^ j^ ^^^^^ ^^ j^ ■«5:, " Merchajit of Venice ;" Etymology a?id Synonyms. (1.) Set forth the peculiarities of structure in this play, and give the sources ^herefrom the plot was dra^vn. (2.) Describe and contrast the characters of Antonio and Shylock, of Portia and Jessica. (3.) Cite passages which refer or allude to circumstances of English history contemporaneous with the date of the play. (4.) Give the origin and meaning of the following (( (5.) OS- words: "vailing," '' eanlings," " sonties, tent," "peize," "tranect," "patines." " Lor. The moon shines bright. — In such a night as this, When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees, And they did make no noise ; in such a night, Troilus, methinks, mounted the Trojan walls. And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents, Where Cressid lay that night. Jes. In such a night Did Thisbe fearfully o'crtrip the dew ; And saw the lion's shadow ere himself, And ran dismayed away, r Lor. In such a night, Stood Dido, with a willow in her hand. Upon the wild sea-banks, and waved her love To come again to Carthago. Jes. In such a niglit Medea gathered the enchanted herbs That did renew old iEson." (a.) Point out all the figures (syntactical and rhetorical) in the foregoing passage. (6.) From what sources did Shakspeare draw his classical references therein ? Mention the vari- ations made by Shakspeare upon his originals. {c.) G ive an epitome of the classic stories referred to. {d.) Give groups of synonyms for the italicised words, distinguishing between the shades of meaning of the words in each group. (6.) Give the derivations of, and where applicable, the transmutations of meaning in the following words: "JoMw/cer," '^anon," '^ renowned suitors," '' r)<^- gan," ''usance," ''bankrupt," " Jcnave," " un- bated" "rnoiety," " shreivd" and " gossip " (7.) Parse the following phrases : — ''He falls straight a capering." " I do know a many fools." " I scant this breathing courtesy." ■•ill ••■ ' 'c .; i'f in-jl; iliai ■ T. -, » ' fit /I ^ , -5', i ^ iM' \i *•* ■ 1 ffcV Uni\}tvniW of STotonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. SECOND YEAR. HISTORY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. ET . ID. Wilson, LL.D. ^xa7mner8:jjj^^ Boyi, M.A. *i^.* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. 1. Define the territorial sovereignty of Charles V., and the basis of his claims in each case ; and compare the political sub-divisions of Europe at his abdication, with those at the death of Louis XIV. 2. Taylor says: 'Two monarchs contemporary with Charles V. were almost equally bound by their interests to check the preponderance of the house of Austria." Name them ; define the obligations of interest in each case ; and show how far each accomplished the object. 3. The results of the battle of Pavia are said to have " made Charles V. master of Italy, and arbiter of Europe." Show the grounds of this statement ; and the causes which deprived the emperor of any substantial advantages from it. 4. Trace the causes which led the Guise party of France, and the Catholic party of England, to favour Mary Stuart's "''-tim'm^ ;j» T claims to the English throne ; and define, and account for the policy of Philip IT. and Catherine do Medici in reference to this. 5. State the parties in the struggle, and the principles involved, which were settled by the peace of Westphalia. 6. Construct a genealogical tree, showing the descent of George I. from Ilonry VII. ; and point out every interme- diate departure from the regular succession to the English throne, with the causes. 7. Trace t? . means by which Prussia was raised to the rank of a monarchy ; and define its acquisitions of territory under Frederick the Great. 8. Compare in detail the influential relations of England to continental powers, under Cromwell, Charles 11. and William III. 9. Specify the parties and the terms of agreement of the Peace of Ryswick, and of Utrecht ; and trace the influence of each on subsequent European history. 10. Trace the causes, and results, of the rivalry of Peter the Great and Charles XII. of Sweden. '. J » 5 Jl'S •i "1 61,^.14 1 i ■ V^ 31 i[ lHll ■ '-' <■ t 1, S'l. ) ar;i ■im .¥ , ^-i '#*» ••'11 *» i ■•i^ '-Vi.,- , 7< «M6i<»nir«.i^ Brail iSiIarfci'iaiia ml i* ;* i„ * ' M II limi 1, ,•: ...; - . '% pHhir 1 w\ li 1' . .f '. Vt , nil ■C-Lj 1 .1 * m I MR?7^^^^ n ^ Elil ; IL^iss yyii pv^inpi ^ M\: •., TI^Hl 3. Where is the verb and where arc the pronouns placed in phrases imperative-affirmative, and in the negative ? 4. What is the order of the words in sentences expositive- affirmative ? In what do negative sentences differ ? 5. Illustrate each answer by an example. III. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 1. What difference between elle a gardS le lit and elle a garde son lit ? 2. Explain the use of the possessive pronouns in French, when connected with any part of the body, or physical and intellectual faculties. 3. In what case or cases can the relative bo separated from the antecedent ? 4. When is distributive ? 5. When d^Ly .d Vun nt I'antre govern the verb in the singular, and when in the plural ? Give examples? 6. When are sortir, demeurer and perir conjugated in the compound tenses with the verb avoir and when with the verb Stre ? Give ex ^^os ? 7. When does si c on, take the future and when the present tense ? 8. Give some examples in which the suppression of pas and point is obligatory ? 9. What participles past are never declined in the feminine. 10. Name some of the prepositions always repeated, and state the difference between en and dans in point of time ? IV. Translate : Tel autre fait la satire de ces gens qui s'engagent par inquietude ou par curiosity dans de long voyages ; qui ne font ni memoires, ni relations ; qui ne portent point de tablettes ; qui vont pour voir, et qui ne voient pas, ou qui oubiient ce qu'iis ont vu; qui desirent seulement de connaitre do nouvelles tours ou de nouveaux clochers, et de passer des rivieres qu'on n'uppclle ni la Seine, ni la Loire ; qui sortont do lour patrio pour y retourner, qui aiment a etro absents, qui vculcnt un jour gtro rcvenus do loin : et co satiriquo parle juste, et so fait dcouter. 1. Tel autre. What part of the speech is tel, can it be used for quelque que ? 2. De ces gena. Give the various constructions of gens ? 3. Ni menoires ni relations, wliy not an article ? 4. Point de tablettes, why not des tablettcs ? 5. Nouvellea tours, nouveaux clochers, what difrorence in meaning if nouvelles, nouveaux are placed after the substan- tives ? 6. What is the antecedent of the various qui in this extract ? V. • French Literature to the 17th century. (Sismondi's.) 1. When was the first establishment formed in Paris to amuse the people by regular entertainments, and by whom? 2. By what name was the company formed of that es- tablishment called ? 3. Which is the most ancient dramatic work of modern Europe ? 4. To whom are we indebted for the invention of the comedy, and how did the comedy originate ? 5. What era is assigned for the commencement of the French literature? ^ rrf? -Ci K, .<»#r f'l fl ^1 hm L ' . 5* ■ nffli tUnmvms^ ot tRotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. FRENCH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. U^i *«).. i Examiners: ] i^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 3 Robert Sullivan, M.A. Translate into English : Vous ne d6mentez point une race funeste; Uui, vous etes le sang d'Atrde et de Thyeste • Bourreau de votre fille, il ne vous roste enfin ' Que d en faire a sa mere un horrible festin. Barbare ! c'est done la cet heureux sacrifice Que vos soins preparaient avec tant d'artifice ! yuoi ! 1 horreur de souscriro a cet ordre inhumain ^ a pas, en le tra^ant arr^te votre main ' Pourquoi feindre a nosyeux uno fatisse tristresse ? ±^ensez-vous par des pleurs prouver votre tendresse ? uu sont-ils ces combats que vous avez reudus ? Que s flots de sang pour elle avez-vous rdpandus ? Quel debris parle ici de votre resistance ? Quel champ couvert de morts m.^ condamne au silence? Voila par quels temoms il fallait me prouver, ^ruel ! que votre amour a voulu la sauver. ; •i■-■,'• ■J} .^» 1^ E, Translate ir Inl sand m Dieppe thousai League artiller which i he reli( happen danger Galaty, honour were n battle. complet Translate in' Monsiei L*] Dumer (■Ijyaiijiiiit' Uni\}tvmp ot Sovdnto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FIRST YEAR, (LAW.) FRENCH. HONORS. 1 i 1 III i -• '':, k% ' \ 1 t a ' .• ''! '■■i V ' i Examiners: [i^^'"^^ Forneri, LL D ( Robert Sullivan, M.A. Translate into French : I. In 1589, Henry IV., who had only five or six thou- sand men, was attacked at A , a village not far from Dieppe, by the Duke of M , who had about thirty thousand men. That prince suspecting, that the Leaguers would turn their principal efforts against his artillery, placed there the Swiss regiment de Glaris upon which he relied much, and Colonel Galaty upon whom he relied still more. What he had foreseen having happened, he flew, according to his custom, where the danger was greatest. "My comrade," said he to Galaty, on arriving there, " I come to die or to acquire honour with you." These words had the success they were meant to have; they decided the fate of the battle. The Leaguers were repelled on all sides and completely beaten. Translate into English : Monsieur... 11. ALCESTE. ORONTE. L'Etat n'a rien qui ne soit au-dessou3 ^ Du merite eclatant que Ton ddcouvre en vous. ■e'-^i li.' •,»ti ' ! mil 4i *! Monsieur... ALOESXti. ORONTE. Oui, de ma part, je vous tiens preferable A tout ce que j'y voia de plus considerable. ALCESTE. Monsieur... ORONTE. Sois-je du ciel dcrase, si je mens ! Et, pour vous confirmer ici roes sentiments, Souffrez qu'a cocur ouvert, monsieur, je vous embrasse, Et qu'en votre amiti^ je vous demande place. Touchez la, s'il vous plait. Vous me la promettez, Votre amitie ? Monsieur. ALCESTE. , ORONTE. Quoi ! VOUS y r^sistez } ALCESTE. Monsieur, c'est trop d'honneur que vous me voulez faire; Mais I'amitie demande un peu plus de myst^re ; Et c'est assurdment en profaner le nom Qne de vouloir le mettre a touto occasion. Avec lumiere et choix cette union veut naitre ; Avant que nous Her, il faut nous mieux connaitre ; Et nous pourrions avoir telles complexions, ^ Que tons deux du marchd nous nous repentirions. MOLIERE, Le Misanthrope, Act i.. Scene ii. 1. Que py vois. What does y refer to ? 2. Sois-je du ciel eerase. Turn it into an active verb governed hj pouvoir. 3. Pour vous confirmer. Resolve confirmer by conjunc- tion, tense, and mood. 4. Touchez Id. Explain what he means. 5. Vous me la promettez, votre amiti6. What figure ? 6. Quoi! vous y r^sisiez. Give the equivalent oiy. W.' Ail 7. Vn peu phi de myithe. Oive tlie force. 8. Et o'ett asaurementf ^c. Destroy the pleonasm, re- arrange the sentence into a regular order, and give tho equivalent of en. 9. Avant que nous lievy il faut nous mieux connattre. Resolve both Her and connattre by conjunction, tense, and mood. 10. M noua pourriona avoir. Turn et into a causal con- junction, and give the term of condition. 11. Du marc1i6. Give the force. 12. Nous noua repentmons. Turn it into an infinitive with a preposition, suppressing que. 13. Point out the two most striking inversions. ,'f' M • • » * -il ■i ,M2mfii ? "j; ^'^: mw mnih(Vf$its rit Eoiont0. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS. 1864. SECOND YEAR. GERMAN. \ Robert Sullivan, M. A. Translate : I. Qintx ot>et bcr 51 n be re. ^ 3ur 3ett ^cimidf^ IV., mnlo,^ yon gfranfrcfc^, rttt etnmal etn S3ducrlcin vonfctncm 3)orfe nac^ faxi^, ^i6)t nic()r mit ^on ter ®tabt ki^ecinctc cr etncm flamfdjeit 3ficitcr. Q^ mx tcr mnic^. ©em ©cfolge war abftd;tltd^ m cmtficr Gntfcrnung (^cbliebeit. „2Bo!)er m SSeg^, metit greunb V Jpaht t()r C^kfc^ciftc ju ^artg r //3a/' antwortcte bcr 33uuer; ,,aurf) miJd[)te td; gent einmal unfcrn gutcn ^iJntg fcbcit/ bcr fcin ^Colt fo jartltd^ ^'fbt." 3)er ^^am'.q ladjcUc unb fagtc: ,/2)aju fann u4 Dlatb werbcn." /'^ber ttjciin id) nur waffte, njelc^cr e^^ tft unter ben »ielcn ^(Jflingcn, »on bencn er umgeben fetn loirb." j,3)ag tt)tU trf) md) fai^en: 3^r biirft nur M)imc^ gekn, wclct)cr ben ^ut auf bem ^opfc be^a en wtrb, wann aik allc 5(nbern ftcl; e^rerbiettg raerben entbiapt ^aben." m\^ rtuen fte mtt etnanber tn ^art^ l)min, unb ..vflr bag ^auerlem auf bcr retc|)ten @ette beg OliJnt'ag: benn was bie itebe ixinfalt, eg fei mi't M\id)t ober burd) 3ufalC llngcfc^tcftcg t^un fann, bag t^ut [tc. Adlei,, p. 46. 1. Koniga von Franhreich. Tn what relation ? W"'i: 2. JRiV^ einmal. Give the infinitive and participle past of ritt. 3. J57m Bduerlein. What do c^ew and lein denote at the end of a noun ; and why is lein here employed ? 4. Begegnete er. Give the antecedent of er. 5. Einem stattUehen Reiter.. What case and why? 6. Cfeblieben. Give the infinitive and imperfect. Woher des Wegs. Fill up the ellipsis. 7. Bazu kann euch Rath werden. What is the aubject of hann ? Give the force. 8. Aher wenn ich nur wilsste. Give the infinitive and participle past of ivUsste. 9. Welcher es ist. Give the various constructions of es. 10. Ihr dilrft. Give the infinitive of durftj imperfect and participle past. 11. Benn was. Set all this sentence in a regular con- struction, taking in zwar^ and making it emphatic. 12. Bie liele Einfalt. What is liehe., what is its meaning, and in what sense is it here employed ? 13. Ungeschicktes. Turn it into a relative sentence. II. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 1. When is of omitted, and by what preposition is it rendered when expressing locality or tendency ? 2. What preposition do adjectives take referring only to a part of the whole ? Translate, the bird has beautiful feathers. 3. When a relative pronoun refers to a whole sentence, what gender does it take ? 4. What is the peculiarity of zu after the verb to be ? 6. How ia the English participle present rendered after the word kommen ? 6. Name some verbs which require the genitive case, and some which govern two accusatives. t ' > 7. By -what verb ia rendered to he before an infinitive ? 8. What participles past are turned into infinitive when they govern an infinitive ? 9. By what verb is would rendered in the sense of used ? Translate thus he would sit and talk for hours. 10. What case does the impersonal gehen govern ? and when is the participle past worden and when geworden used ? 11. When are iiber durch wieder urn separable and when inseparable ? and what verbs must take an impersonal form in their passive voice ? Til. HISTORY OP GERMAN LITERATURE, PERIODS 1, 2, 3, AND 4, (GOSTICK'S) 1. Why did Ulphilas in his translation of the Scriptures into the Gothic language omit the book of Kings ? 2. What remains now of this translation ? 3. What do you perceive in the work of Ulphilas with regard to the German tongue ? 4. Give the character of the German language. 5. What does the 1st period comprehend, and how far does it extend ? 6. How far does the 2nd period extend, and what does it contain ? 7. What title can you give to the 4th period, and how far does it extend ? 8. What character did Luther impress on the literature of the 16th century? 9. How far is Germany indebted to Luther with regard to the German tongue ? 10. What difference can you draw between the literature of the north and that of the south of Germany ? m J- 11 4 I V . ''»S' ■^WBDJI^: *" Tranglate : Tw< pond ■' the ic where from 1 and W were e Byde, he waj breaks too bri conseq love fc M\tx unb f 3flmmer»on Die er oft u ^kx mfci) t) ^tegt bfe txf\ 2infli(tfiiit|? of ^Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. GERMAN. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. SJxaminers.'f ^-^^^^ Forneri, LL D. \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. I. Tranglate into German. Two boys went together, one winter morning, on a pond which was frozen. Many people were skating on the ice. At the end of the pond there was a place where the ice did not bear. Every body stood aloof from this place in order not to be drowned. Charles and William (these were the names of the two boys) were scarcely ta the ice when they hastened to slide. By degrees W. always came nearer the dangerous spot ; he was too thoughtless to ob'^erve it. Suddenly the ice breaks under him ; Charles lii to his assistance ; he too breaks in, and both are ned — the former in consequence of his thoughtlessness, the latter out of love for his friend. II. ^If m{(| bag m&t^tn txUidtt, fo trat fic ben ^ferben flelaJTcn mtx unb fofltc ju mtr: 9?tc|t I'mmer mx eg mtt xim fo 3ammer»oH, dg 3t)r ung Ijeut' anf bi'efen mc^m crbltcfct. |o(| ni^t bin i6) flewofjnt, um 3remben bte @ak ju I^etfil^cn, 2)te er oft unflcrn m^i, urn log ju werben ben 5(rmen; ^m rnicl) bvancjet bie moil) ju rcben. ^ter auf bem etvo()c Vtegt blc erft entbunbenc grau beg retd)en 53cftijerg, '- ' 3J -H '^^^' ^ ^ 'rl T)k id) mil (Sttcrcn unb 2Bfl(^ctt noc| U\m, b(c fc^njancjrc, ^crettet. Spiit nur fpmmeu mx md), itub faum ta^ Seben cr^ielt fie. 9^un Itcgt, ncui-jcborcn, ba^ ^inb tt)r nacfcnb tm 5lrme, Hub mif Sentflcm nur »ennOgm btc Unfcrn p f)elfen! ®cnn wix tm nad)ftcn Dorf, wo wix l)eute ju vaftcn j^cbcnfen, 5lud; ftc ftnbcn, wtewel)l tc^ fuvd)tc, fte [inb fd)on ijorubcr. 2Bar Gud) trqenb you SciniDanb nur wag gntbef)rltd)cg, wcnn 3^r .^tcv aug bcr" ^ladjbarfdjaft [epb, fo [penbct'g flfittg ben 5lrmen. Goethe's Herman und Dorothea^ pages 16 & 17. 1. ^0 irat sie. Explain the discordance of sie. 2. Den Pferden. What case, and why ? 3. G-elassen. What is it? 4. Nicht immer so jammervoU. Give the force. 5. Als Ihr. What difference in meaning between Ik and ihr? 6. Die er oft ungern giebt. Give the antecedents of die and er ; and state what case geben, when impersonal, governs. 7. Um los zu werden. Give the force of lo8 zu werden; and state what cases it governs. 8. Den Armen. What case, and why so ? Would de« Armen, or der Armen be good German ? Why spelt with a capital ? 9. Aher mid drdnget die JSFoth. Why the subject after the verb? 10. ffier auf dem Stroke Uegt, &c. Why avf with the dative here ? 11. Die erst entbundene Frau. Give the force of ent and turn entbundene Frau into a relative sentence. 12. Die schwangre gerettet. With what word, and in what relation does die schwangre stand ? Fill up the ellipsis. 13. Spat nur kommen wir nach. What is nach here? 14. Das Leben erhielt sie. Give the antecedent of sie; and point out the subject of erhielt. 15. 2hr im Arrne. Explain the rule affecting these words. 16. Liegt neugehoren, das Kind naekend, &c. Turn neugeboren and nackend into adjectives, qualifying dfas kindf and re-arrange the words. 17. Die Unsern. Who are they ? 18. Wenn wir, &c. Suppress ivenn, and re-arrange the sentence. 19. Schon Voriiler. Fill up the ellipsis. 20. War' euch, &c, Prefix wenn, and re-arrange ; but turn war into an active verb, with euch as a subject. 21. Was Enthehrliches. What does was stand for? Turn Enthehrliches into a relative sentence, and state by what is von Leinwand governed. ^-if't^fciMfaTCi!.. .1., - ' ■'^■^*-. IM Xi Wini\^tvuit^ of ^ovonto. 'H ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR EXPERIMENTAL CHEMISTRY. Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L. '.■m 1. Describe the construction of a mercurial thermometer. What is its range ? 2. Bj what means may the conducting power of bodies be determined ? 3. How may the radiation of heat be proved ? 4. What is meant by a magnetic meridian ? 6. Describe a galvanometer and its action. 6. Describe the diflferent frictional electrical machines. 7. Give the preparation of ozone, iodine, bromine, chloric acid and hydrofluoric acid, with their general properties. 8. Give the principal ores of silver, arsenic, mercury, copper and platinum, and the formulas of their oxides. 9. Give the general principles of organic analysis, and the general composition of natural organic bodies. 10. Give the preparation, properties and formulas of acetic acid, cyanide and ferrocyanide of potassium and fultaiuating mercury. g ,#^5t>. U5 Am * >• n Kf M /fg 1 -'S -i'laiSi -f-is 1>-'>.W," .1 ** nni\}tvnit^ of vonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. EXPERIMENTAL CHEMISTRY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner: Hent Croft, D.C.L. t - « • # 1. Describe the principles and construction of the com- pensating pendulum, and of Breguet's thermometer. 2.^ V is meant by thcrmometric equilibrium? and explain ma bu-called radiation of cold. J. Whnt is the law of the diffusion of gases? How a&oertaiD " 4. Menuoi e relative powers of lamp black and pol- ish' d silver as regards absorption, radiation and reflection of heat. 5. What is meant by 'ho magnetic equator, ^ ^y isoclinal lines. 6. Describe an inductioi joil, and explain the effect o» introducing a coil of wire in- o tl o circuit of a weak battery. 7. E. plain the action of a Ticyden jar, and show how several can be charged n* S. Give tl preparation of proto. anl binoxideof nitrogen, phosplmretted h iogei! cijfi gas and ter- 9. Give the preparation of arsenic acid, chromic acid, permanganate of potassa, binoxide of tin, and corrosive sublimate. 10. Give the sources and preparation of light carluretted hydrogen, methylic and cetylic alcohols, formic and pal- mitic acids. 11. Give the sources and preparation of benzole, and mention the substances obtained from it by the action of i.itri'" acid, giving formulas. 12. In what substances are fibrine, albumine and caseine found ? What are their characters. ll 'ih '.•11 ■< i^^Kf ^Jt^ •ii * f A" ■\ f * s uni\^tvmtt of STotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. MmERALOGY AND GEOLOGY, Examiner: T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 1. Explain briefly the scale of hardness, and give the hardness of albite, of epidote, and of galena on the scale of Mohs. 2. By what chemical and physical characters would you distinguish fluor-spar from apatite ? 3. Give the mineralogical characters and composition of the constituent minerals of syenite. 4. Describe the four most important ores of iron. 5. Describe the sulphuretted ores of copper, and their composition. , 6. Name the mineral species corresponding to t\iG fol- lowing characters: (a) Vitreous lustre; hardness 7, gravity 3.35, color pale green; monoclinic. (6) Vitreous lustre; hardness 4, gravity 3.16, color yellow; monometric. (c) Metallic lustre; hardness 3, gravity 11.10, '^olor white; monometric. 7. Muiilion some of the characteristic genera of the ani- mals in the Devonian period. f^n^ I I'l 8. By what marks may deep-water deposits be distin- guished from those of shallow seas ? 9. Give the sub-divisions of the tertiary system in Europe, and Lyell's names for them. 10. Explain what is meant by unconformable stratification. 11. Mention the prominent facts in the history of fossil fishes. 12. Describe common and magnesian limestones, and give some of the peculiar characters of the latter. '*!» 4 i 'i ■ rfll ■"■■■ ;Vik# 'ull Uni\^tvniip of ^otonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAK. GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. HONORS. Examiner : T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 1. Explain what is meant by hemlhedrism, and illustrate it by monometric and hexagonal forms. 2. Describe the cleavages of calcite, and those of chlorite, and show how they are in both cases related to the hexagonal prism. ° 3. What are the chemical and mineraloglcal differences between hornblende and pyroxene ? 4. What are the principal silicious minerals found in granitic veins ? 5. Describe the miner«.logical differences of arragonite and calcite. and give other examples of dimorphism. 6. in what form Ho/iS does coal occur, and what are the conditions of its production ? 7. What are the principal genera of crustaceans and bra- chiopods in the Lower Silurian rocks ? 8. What are most remarkable geological and mineralo- gical characters of the Salt-bearing rocks. 9. What are the differences between granite, trachyte, and and gneiss, and vrhat their geological relations ? 10. State the principal phenomena presented by volcanic mountains. *■■■ il 'm .»-.ii ■■ 1 '' .« 1 • H HilHHH flfflKlffll^^^l^H ■■ l^ffl^^^^B ^M^^^H H m': ■1 Winl\)ttuits of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. ■ ■ ! ♦ Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. WAYLAND AND LOCKE. 1. a. In what two senses may the term law be employed? b. In which of these is it employed in ethics ? 2. How would you prove that our notion of the moral quality of actions is derived neither {a) from an act of judg- ment, nor {h) from association, nor ic) from the idea of the greatest amount of happiness ? 3. What answer would you give to the arguments against the existence of a moral faculty, founded on the difference in the moral judgment of the diiferent nations? 4. a. What is meant by self-love^ and what is the rank which it holds in relation to passion on the one hand and to conscience oh the other ? 5. a. What are the two general divisions under which the duties to man are arranged by Wayland ? h. What are the main classes into which these gene- ral divisions are subdivided ? 6. In what sense is the word idea used by Locke ? 7. a. From what two sources does Locke derive all our ideas ? ^ *a h. Which of these does he regard as the source of our first ideas ? 8. a. What does Locke mean by a simple, what by a com- plex idea ? b. Mention some of the simple ideas which he derives in the first place from each of the sources separately, and in the second from both conjointly. 9. How does Locke explain the origin of our ideas (a) of space and [b) of time ? 10. State and criticise Locke's account of what constitutes personal identity ? m K ' ;,' w^ ^'M 11 I p- p^ ,,. . :\j fXh ! *.* KisVivW *^:i M mil •^* "J^ ^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) /.^ 1.0 I.I 1.25 ■ so "^^ '^ US. 1.4 2.5 2.2 20 1.8 1.6 ^ V] ^;. "s y^ '/ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716)872-4503 Winmvm^ of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. MURRAINS LOGIC. Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. a. Explain the fi7e predicables. a? w"» l>-''^ 3. 4. b. a. h. c. a. h. c. a. h. Illustrate the five predicables, by giving an exam- ple of each as a predicate to the subject hone. What is meant by the quantity, what by the quality of a proposition ? Hov^ many species of propositions are there, divided according to both quantity and quality? By what symbols are these species severally denoted ? What is meant by the conversion of a proposition? Explain the three modes of conversion. Convert the following propositions, and state by which of the three modes each is converted. All negative propositions distribute to the pre- dicate. No aflSrmative propositions distribute the pre- dicate. Some propositions are true. Some propositions are not true. What is the difference between the opposition of contradictories and that of contraries P Of A, E, I, 0, state which are contraries, which coatradigtories ? 5. a. What constitutes the figure of a syllogism ? b. How many figures are there, and by what are they distinguished from each other ? 6. Why are (a) only negative conclusions possible in the second figure, (6) only particular conclusions in the third ? 7. In hypothetical syllogisms what are the two legitimate, what the two illegitimate modes of drawing a conclusion ? 8. State to which of the figures Cameatres, Featino. dmmi8, Bramantip belong, and explain the meaning of their symbolic letters. ° 9. Throw into Felapton the following argument, and reduce it to its corresponding mood of the first figure • "Some animals have not the power of locomotion, for sponges are animals." 10. Name and point out the fallacy of the following arguments : ° a. Whatever is universally believed is true. The existence of God is not universally believed • Therefore it is not true. b. What one troweth is not eternal and unchangeable; Truth is what one troweth ; Therefore truth is not eternal and unchangeable. , ' ! ,'■<*.)) 1 5^ . » . ~ ' ti ' '"A -ftpt^j^plfl «»•'; ''-4 UniMtvnit^ of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. If I* i ; ^■SV' ft ■ iff . it Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. 1. a. What was the earliest school of philosophy in Greece ? h. What is the problem with which the specula- tions of that school began ? ea^ Bvaiiwv ciirep^ar /j^era Se, ipyd- ^ecreatJQjvTa) KeXeveiv irdvTa^ Alyvrrrcov^. rotai fieu Sh UTToSeSexOai, €k t&v XiOoToixiewv t&v kv too 'Apaj3ico ovpei, €K rovrewv eXKCiv \idov^ to AijSvkov KaXev- fievovopowv iyyeyXvfifiivfov) Ta{,Tr) re B^ rh teKa erea yeveadai, Kal rwv eTrl rov X6cf)ov, eV odiaracn at TTvpafiiBe^^ rdv inrbyrjv olK^fidrav. r^^ eiroiiero e/]Ka<: e(ovT(pev vrjam, Suopvxa rov NetXou eaarvarycov. t« B^ ''" P^f^^^'' ^^'^V XP^^ov yeveaBuL eeUoai erea TroievfLevr)' " / ^ ft'.: ^.^j ^^'- '■.H-'- T»). Give a list of Greek Tragic authors, introducing dates where you can. III. Translate : Beivov 8' diia-a^, &>apa. (boiviac 8' ofiov yXi)vai yeveC ereyyov, ou8' avieaav i^ovov ixvB(i>aa^i.^'d - :. ^ 1. Quum gravius dorso suhiit onus. Give the construc- tion. 2. Membra movere. Give different explanations. 8. Invideat quod, ^c. What is the construction of quodf 4. Quarta jam parte, ^c. What hour of the day? 5. Caau. Give different explanations. 6. Notice any metrical peculiarities in the p'',ssage. 7. Sodes. Whence derived? 8. Distinoruish between agnati and cognati, dolor and luctus, perdere and amittere, amare and diligere, properare and festinare. II. Translate : Quis tamen exiguos elegos emiserit auctor, Grammatici certant et adhuc sub judice lis est. Archilochum proprio rabies armavit iarabo ; Hunc socci cepere pedem grandosquo cothurni, Alternis aptum sermonibus et populares Vincentein strepitus et natum rebus agcndis. Musa dedit fidibus dives puerosque Deorum, Et pugilem victorem et equura certamine primum Et juvenum curas et libera vina refer-e. Descriptas servare vices operumque colores Cur ego si nequeo ignoroque poeta salutor ? Cur nescire pudens prave quam discere male ? Versibus exponi tragicis res comica non vult ; Indignatur item privatis ac props socco Dignis carminibus narrari cocna ThyestfB. Singula quaeque locum teneant sortita decenter. Interdum tamen et vocem comocdia tollit, Iratusque Chromes tumido delitigat ore ; Et tragicus plerumque dolot scrmono pedcstri Telephus . Give an account of tho duties of the choraguSy the author, and tho judges in dramatic contests. II. Translate : 'jre/nTrTr} 8' air ainov yevva irevrrjKomaTrai'i TTuXiv Trpopeva^, KipKoi Trekeiow ov ixaKpav XeXeifjLfMevoi, i'l^ovai OijpcvaoVTe^; cv drjpaa'iixov^ rydfjbov<;, ^Oovov he crcofxaTOiv e^ei 0eo'i' lleXaajia Be Be^erai, drjXvKTovM "Apet BafievTMV vvKTi^povm]r(p Opdaei' ryvin] yap civhp eKacTTOV atMvo*. . yoXt^'^ SiotKovfxev, ijSr} (f)afi€U tovtov wfioXoyrjKevai epym rifuv a av rjfiel^i KeXevcofxev Tronfjaeiv tuvtu, koL rhu fiV Treidofievov rfjixfi (pa/xiv dSiKelv, ort re jevv7]Tai^ qZ(tiv f]iilv ov 'jre'idcrai, koI otl jpo^evat, kuI on 6/jlo- \o aXXa, Kaiirep, KULTOi, dfieXei, ryviKU. 5. Give an account of BoKiixaaia ek avhpa^. 6. State briefly what you know of Athenian colonies. mni\)tvult» of ^otonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G1. THIRD YEAR. LATIN. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners • i ^^^- ^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. I. Translate : Nominatse jam antea consulibus provincise erant, turn sortiri jussi : Cornelio Hispania, Sempronio Africa cum Sicilia ovenit. Sex in eum annum decretse legiones et socium quantum ipsis videretur, et classis quanta parari posset. Quatuor et viginti peditum Romanorum millia sunt scripta et mille octingenti equites, sociorum qua- draginta millia peditum, quatuor millia et quadringenti equites : naves ducentse, viginti quinqueremes, celoces viginti deductse. Latum inde ad populum, vellent juberent populo Carthaginiensi bellum indici : ejusque belli causa supplicatio per urbem habita atque adorati dii, ut bene ac feliciter eveniret quod bellum populua Romanus jussisset. Inter consules ita copiae divisae : Sempronio datae legiones duse — ea quaterna millia erant peditum et treceni equites — et sociorum sedecim millia peditum, equites mille octiugenti, naves longse centum sexaginta, celoces duodecim : cum his terrestribus ma- H ritimisque copiis Tib. Sempronius missus in Siciliam, ita in Africam transmissurus, si ad arcendum Italia Pae- num consul alter satis esset : Cornelio minus copiarum datum, quia L. Manlius praetor et i" cum haud inva- ■: '^m 4' . p5 " --• ' -' ''■ {.' ■ =- 1 .1! , r.i ■ ^1 III. 1. From whom did Livy borrow most of his account of the passage of the Alps ? 2. Who composed the so-called supplements to the books of Livy ? Characterise them. 3. Who was the first Roman historian ? In what language did he write ? IIow is he connected Avith the subject of the 21st book of Livy ? IV. Translate : Postremo, promptis jam et aliis seditionis ministris, velut contionabundus interrogabat : Cur paucis centurionibus,, paucioribus tribunis, in modum servorum obedirent ? quando ausnros exnoscere remedia, nisi novum et nutantem adhuc principem pre- cibus vel armis adirent V satis per tot annos ignavia peccatum, quod tricena aut quadragena stipendia senes, ^1 1 1 vl .^i ■ )-i' ct I truncato ex vulnoribua cornoro, tolerent : ^% diuiissi quidem finern 7}V6, 0avaTO Tt 'fdp, OT(p fir)T "Apr)'; firjTe ir6vT0^av ev d^aveZ tivl fiopw ^epofievov. rdXatva' vwv 8' oKedpia vii^ eV ofji/jLacriv ^i^uKe. TTw? fydp r/ riv diriav ydv 7} TTOVTiov kXvScov d\u}fievai l^lov BvaoiaTOV e^o/xev rpoijydv : l2. ou KdroiBa. Kara [xe ^ovio^s 'AtiSa9 e\oL Trarpl rdXatvaV 009 efMoiy 6 fiiWwv /3to9 ov ^i(OTO }. valve, supposerl weightless, will open during the (n-|-l)t'» stroke, when the piston has nscencied through u di {'-(if^)" 6. Upon what property of bodies docs the principle of the thermometer depend ? Describe how Fahrenheit's thermome- ter is filled and graduated. If F, C, R indicate the same temperature on Fahrenheit'tJ, the centigrade, and Reaumur's thermometers respectively. shew that — =_- = — . 9 5 4 If a certain temperature be indicated on the centigrade and Fahrenheit's thermometers respectively by numbers in the ratio of 1 : 2 ; find the number which indicates it on Reau- mur's thermometer. 7. Distinguish between physical and geometrical optics. State the laws of reflection and refraction of light. A circle which reflects lighi from its inner surface has two holes in it ; determine the course of a ray, which, entering at one hole, after four reflections passes out at the other. 8. A luminous point is placed between two parallel plane mirrors; find the distances from it of its successive images. Ifi^be the point, -Pj. ^^,, /*,... its successive images, shevv thai l\l\ = Fl\, 1\F^ = I\P^ , 1\1\ = PJ\ . . . 9. What is meant by the critical angle of a medium ? Define the refracting angle of a prism. Shew that a ray refracted through a prism denser than the surrounding medium, in a plane perpendicular lo its edge, will be turned towards the thicker part of the prism. If the refracting angle of a prism be equal to the critical angle of the medium of which it is formed ; prove that an inci- dent ray nearly parallel to one face will pass out of the prism at right angles to the other face. 10. Find the geometrical focus of a pencil of rays directly incident upon a concave mirror. Shew that the conjugate foci move in opposite directions. 11. Describe the Astronomical Telescope, and trace the course of a pencil of rays through it. 12 Explain the formation of the primary rainbow. How must a person be situated m order to see it ] She \V that the order of colours in tlie secondary bow is the reverse of that in the primary bow. i-'-J : . *l . ■^1 ■^1 •" ' ,' h' > ' l| >, . «4 ■X IM '4 1. Stat couples, directions two direci and tlie oi 2. Fine rigid syst( couple. ] z) be all shew that single for( and in caa 3. Inve system is Iftl be paralle' Und at rest ? 4. Slie\ the centre density at point Iron 5. Whe given fore any point Wini\)tvuit» of Eovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIKD YEAE. m i;il STATICS AND DYNAMICS. HONORS. Examiner: J. B. Cherkiman, M.A. 1. State and prove the principle of the parallelogram of couples. Having given the components of a couple in two directions, at right angles to each other, find the components in two directions, one of which coincides with one of the former, and the other is inclined at a given angle to this. 2. Find the conditions that a given set of forces acting on a rigid system may be reducible (1) to a single force (2) to a single couple. If the forces (of which the type is i^ at the point Xy y, 2) be all parallel to the line whose direction cosines are /, w, n, shew that in case (1) the equations to the line of action of the single force are and in case (2), find the moment of the resultant couple. 3. Investigate the conditions of equilibrium when a rigid system is kept at rest by assigned forces. If three forces keep a rigid system at rest, they must either be parallel, or pass through the same point. Under what circumstances will three couples keep a system at rest? ^ 4. Shew how to find the centre of gravity of any body. Find the centre of gravity of a circular oblique cone, in which the density at any point varies as some power of the distance of the point from the base. 5. When a flexible string is kept at rest under the action of given forces in one plane, obtain an expression for the tension at any point ■| : ^■''/•'^.a .it 1 Kl ■^ iJt:?'^ If the forces be all parallel, and t be the tension at a point where the tangent makes an angle yjr with the direction of the forces, prove that t sin -x^ id the same throtighout. G. Show how to find the increase of length in an elastic string, when sti-etched by any forces in direction of its length. A string which is slightly extensible (X, the constant of .Hooke's law, being small) is kept upon a smooth plane curve, being fastened at one point of it, by a uniform force / acting at each point along the tangent, shew that the pressure of the string upon the curve at a point where the radius of curvature is p, and 8 is the length of the arc measured from the free end of the string, is - (A + h^f^') 7. When one body rests upon another fixed, having a point of their surfaces in contact, and the surfaces being sufficiently rough to prevent sliding, shew how to find whether the equili- brium is stable or unstable. A segment of a uniform paraboloid of revolution, cut ofi" by a plane at right angles to the axis, and at a distance from the vertex equal to -j latus-rectum, rests (vertex downwards, and axis vertical) within a fixed spherical bowl whose radius is equal to the latus-rectum. Determine the nature of the equilibrium. 8. Find the attraction of a uniform circular arc on a point situated in its median line, the law of attraction being that of the inverse square of the distance. If a particle move freely under this attraction from the centre of the circle to the chord of the arc, find the velocity acquired. 9. A particle describing a plane orbit, obtain expressions for the velocities and accelerations of velocities along the radius- vector, and perpendicularly to it. If the acceleration perpendicular to the radius-vector lo always proportional to the velocity in that direction, the areas swept out will increase in a geometric progression as the timefi increase in an arithmetic. 10. Force varying as the distance from a fixed point, determine the position and dimensions of the orbit when the circumstances of motion at an assigned point are given. If e be the excentricity, /a the absolute force, t the time of moving between two points where the directions of motion are at right angles, and for which the vectorial angles mea.sured from the apse-line are a, /3, shew that imQ — tana = e^ V 1 — s'- tan ( v'/T 0- 11. I'orce to centre varying as (distance) —*, find the orbit where the velocity at an apse ia e(inal to (1), the velocity in a circle at that distance ; (2), die velocity which would be acquired by falling freely from an infinite distance Lat point under the action of the force. '"12. A particle moves on a smooth fixed plane curve under given forces, determine the velocity at any point, and the pressure on the curve. A rigid parabola is fixed in a vertical plane, with its axis vertical, and vertex upwards, 4 m being its latus-rectum. A particle is projected from the vertex along the curve, and acted on by gravity ; shew that it will not leave the curve, whether it be moving on the upper or on the under side, if the height due to the velocity of projection lie between ^3 wi and ^m. ^r.i i^-S^^.<~'' an Bniiitv&iti} of STotonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR HYDROSTATICS AND OPTICS- HONORS. Examiner : J. B. Ciierriman, M.A. 1. Investigate an expression for the pressure at any point of a fluid kept at rest by given forces. A sphere is filled with a heavy incompressible fluid which is acted on by a reinilsivc force tending from the centre and vaiy- ing as any function of the distance, as well as by gravity ; shew that if the pi-essure at the highest point be equal to the weight of a column of fluid whose height is equal to the radius, the pres- sures upon the upper and lower halves of the sphere are as 3 to 5. 2. Obtain the co-ordinates of the centre of pressure of a plane surface exposed to a heavy incompressible fluid. How could it be ascertained whether a curved surface has a centre of pressure 1 If a hemispherical surface be just submerged with a tangent to its base in the surface of the fluid, the normal at the centre of pressure makes an angle cos ~^ l with the base. 3. Obtain the conditions of eipiilibi-ium when a body floats in a fluid (1) freely, (2) under constraint. A thin uniform rod (length, 2a) supported by a string at one end floats in a heavy fluid where the density varies as the nth power of the depth, the rod being inclined to the vertical at an angle Q and having its centre in the surface of the fluid. Shew that if the rod floated freely in a vertical position, the length immersed would be a cos d 1 n+l + 1 \-L n + 2 n+l. ■v ■ iitii "9 ^^ffi ■'".*'■ . , •-' ■ --'t '' ' i ■_ • '. 1 v;^^H 1 f';M II 1 4H • U n"^^ 4. Explain accurately -what is meant by the »neiacew * k ' * '■■. il 'm '^#11 s ■ ^! '■'Iff* iinibetrfiifti? of ^ovonta. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR 1 r» i Rl CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY AND DIFFEREN- TIAL CALCULUS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 1. Shew how to find the centre and axes of the curve repre- sented by the general equation of the second order between rect- angular co-ordinates. Examine the geometrical signification of the conditions under which a parabola, a circle, or a rectangular hyperbola may be represented liy the equation &+D(J-i-o+(^■■I) (!'+!■ -o=«- 2. Explain the method of expressing the eqiiation to a straight line in trilinear co-ordinates, and find the condition that two lines whose equations are given may be parallel. 3. Investigate the harmonic projierties of a complete quadrila- teral. If a conic be described having the third diagonal for the chord of contact to the other two as tangents, shew that the points of intersection of this conic with two o})posite sides of the quad- rilateral lie, two and two, on lines which meet in the intersection of the other opposite sides. 4. If a, /3, 7, be trilinear co-ordinates of any point in a line, and a', B', 7', be those of another ])oiiit in the line at distance T from the former, shew tliat ^-«' ^ ^^z^ ^ 7-7' ^ J. ^ t m n h w, n being constants connected by a certain relation. 'A »' .' I ^4¥ ! t»- 1 t4 ^ i \ '■»; 1 ^ *. »- *• '->'-.H. VT, .m Find the intersections of this line with the conic whose equa- tion is ^ (« j3, %) = 0, being a homogeneous function of the second order, and shew that the centre of the conic is given by ]_dp 1 dtp _ }_ d a da ~ b (^ ^ ~c~ d-y ' where a, h, c, are the sides of the triangle of reference. 5. State Lagrange's Theorem, and deduce Laplace's. Expand x in ascending powers ofy from the equation i/:^x{A+Bi/+Cf+Df+ ) 6. If a plane curve roll on a fixed straight line, shew how to find, (1.) The locus of any given point in its plane. (2.) The envelope of any given straight line in its plane. The rolling curve being a circle, find the above when the given point is on the circumference, and the given line is a diameter of the circle. 7. To find the maxima and minima values of a function of several variables. Find when xi/z is a maximum or minimum, where i-^r + ii-r + (f )- = '• Is there any way of ascertaining in this case or in the general one whether the value determined is a maximum or a minimum 1 8. Find the angle between two planes whose equations are given in rectangular co-ordinates. Find the equation to a plane containing the two sti'aight lines, / on n (ii)^x+Sy-f-a=0. A'x+B'j/+az=.0. 9. Find the general functional and the differential equation to cylindrical surfaces. A. thin wire in the form of a helix is laid on the ground with its axis due north and south ; find the form of its shadow at noon. 10. Trace the form of the hyperboloid, Shew that through any point of it two straight lines can be drawn wholly coinciding with the surface, and find the locus of the points where these two Hi other. are at right angles to each i ,'tl ■ 11. Find the locus of the middle jwlnts of chords In an ellipsoid which pass tlirougli a jfiven j)olnt, and the locus of the centres of the sections made by planes ])asHiug througli a given line. 12. Shew how to discriminate the species of the surface repre- sented by the general equation of the second degree between three rectangular co-ordinates. Examine the surface Ml r fc'I ' (t ♦ . S\f.\ .!•, •5 ■ % u ! 1 'l I :\l V • -'.f 1 ^* • •'» '4 ;C V, , ' \ri Mi asyi of ii beti refe thai froc whe the the COIT froD bes C%nfiiet0ft|? of rovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. THIRD YEAR, AND CANDIDATE8 FOR B.A. PROBLEMS. \ Rev. W. Jones, R.A. • •». i,ifi 1. The axes of a hyperbola are given in direction, and its asymptotes revolve about two fixed points ; prove that the locus of its centre is a rectangular hyperbola whose centre is midway between the two fixed points. 2. If a circle and a rectangular hyperbola be described, with reference to which an assigned triangle is self-conjugate, shew that the centre of the circle is at 1 .,, rsection of perpendiculars from the angles on the sides of yi« triangle, and the centre of the hyperbola is on the circumHcribing circle of the triangle. 3. It is said that there will be a point of ii/'exion in a spiral ^^^^ dr ~^ ^^ °° ^^^^^ changes sign. Shew that such is not the case at the j)ole wlien the spiral passes through it. For instance, take the spiral of Archimedes, r=a0. 4. If r, 2c be the radius- vector and chord of curvature flu ough the pole at any point of a spiral, and r', 2c' be the same for the correspondmg point in the locus of the foot of the perpendicular from the pole on the tangent, prove that 5+^ = 2. r d 5. Every equation of the form x*+2pa?+qx''-\-rx+s=i0 can be solved by mftflns nf a nnnrlra+i'^ oniio+i/^r. if /«3 „,„ I A ..--1 6. On the surface of a sphere n equal particles are placed so •m II" ,: that their centre of gravity is the centre of the sphere; ii a he the angle subtended at the centre by the chord joining any two of them, prove that S cos a = "~ o • 7. A smooth surface of revolution standing with its axis vertical, find its form in order that a heavy elastic ring may be at rest when placed round any horizontal section of it. 8. The centre of the circle, radius r, inscribed in a triangle ABC is an origin of light; a ray of light after reflection at the sides '^i?, ^C returns again to the origin; shew that the length of its path is 4 r cos A. 2 9. Li"ht admitted into a darkened room through a very small hole in the shutter is received upon a vertical screen ; examine the nature of the curves which bound the illummated portions of the screen when it is placed (i.) perpendicular, (u.) obliquely to the window. 10 A luminous point aS' in the side ^i? of a triangle ABC equally illuminates the other two sides; HAS, BS subtend at C the angles 0, (p respectively, shew that sin (^— ^) = cos J. sin 0— cos B sin 6. 11 The respective specific gravities of two fluids, and of the atmosphere are . 12 If a plane area be totally immersed vertically in a heavy incompressible fluid, and X, x be the depths of its centre of pressure and centre of gravity below the surface, and P the pressure on the surface; shew that when the area is made to descend without rotation through a small distance c, the mcrease of pressure will be P -, and its centre of pressure will descend X through a distance 2c c . X 13 A cylindrical diving bell descends in water ; the heights of a water barometer in the bell are h, h', before immersion and when the top of the bell is just Mubmerged, respectively ; shew that the length of the bell is '/ {h' - h) . » » 'j.'l !- 14. A uniform paraboloid terminated by a plane perpendicular to its axis, rests with its vertex on a rougb fixed plane in neutral equilibrium ; shew that the equilibrium will also be neutral if the paraboloid be scooped out into a thin shell, and filled with a heavy fluid to the same depth of axis, the weight of the fluid being half the weight of the shell, and the centre of gravity of the shell being at the focus. 15. A cone floating freely (axis vertical and vertex downwards) in a fluid has an elastic string (without weight) attached to its vertex, the other end being attached to the centre of gravity of a flat disk, (also without weight,) which is lying in close contact with the horizontal base of the vessel containing the fluid, the string being in its natural state and vertical. Prove that (if the area of the disk lie between certain limits) when the level of the fluid is raised by the addition of fluid, there is a position where the length of the ^tring will not be altered by a small change of level, and determine in the general case the depth of the fluid when the disk will be lifted, if it ever will be. 16 Prove that {I + ,'(.)}»«=.-*'.(!)». u. 17. A parabola (latus-rectum 4a,) is described under two accelerations, one to the focus, and the other along the tangent, their respective values at focal distance r being / and F; prove that ^+¥= j: dr r 'sjr^—ar 18. Shew that the cycloid is tautochronous when the resistance of the medium is constant, and the successive heights to which the oscillating particle rises, are in arithmetical progression. 19. At all points of an ellipsoid which are equidistant from the centre, the sum of the curvatures in two perpendicular normal sections varies as the perpendicular from the centre on the tan- gent. , ■ 1! 1 $•*■ ***] kixif$tvuit^ of ^orotfio* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR. HISTORY. Uxaminers : ] ?' f ^^^ON, LL D. 5 J. A. Boyd, M.A. *** Answers to all the questions are not indispensable • hut riTLL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. I. Outlines of modern history. (1.) Enumerate the events which mark the commence- nf^J °^°^?X^,^story ; and contrast the characteristics of modern, with those of mediaeval and ancient history. 1 P.i} ^^' ^'■''^^^ f-y' •* " ^^^ undoubted tendency of the last three centuries has been to consolidate what were once separate states or kingdoms into one great nation." Men- tion the most important changes, in chronological order which serve to confirm this statement. ' nnJtl ^^^^""^ fi^ ^^'^' P;°g^ess and termination of the contest between the Girondists and Jacobins. ^ ^(^O Oi^ejome^ account of the war that began in 1812 uesween ine umteU states and England. -^M It British history from the reyolutiou to the present time. (1.) What historical importance attaches to the career of John Wilkes ? (2.) What led to the impeachment of Dr. Sacheverel ? What were its results, political and constitutional ? (3.) Enumerate those historical facts which shew the great personal influence of George III. in determining the course of events during his reign. (4.) Give some account of the prosecution of Home Tooke, and its results. (5.) When, and how, arose the influence of the periodical press ? Trace its developement to the end of the eighteenth century. (6.) Sketch the career of the Duke of Wellington as a statesman. .': m ' i» Itf^, S?'^ ^ l"^ . 'A - IS -14. •. * I - , * ^rm -«j-:g£*fr-i. ■M yl<''>, 1'. i ■ ■ ' ■ .' ■■■;■■ ' I r^ii T5^ ittfi'S Unibtvmt} of ^ovomo. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. THIRD YEAR. ENGLISH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. -Examiners :f^- ^ii-SON, LL.D. \ J. A. Boyd, M.A. "JULIUS CiESAR;" ETYMOLOGY & SYNONYMS. (1.) From what sources did Shakspeare draw the materials lor this drama i Discuss the questions as to its hero, and the object with which it was written. (2.) What ^ anachronisms and deviations from historical accuracy do you note in the play ? (3.) '^Metellus Most high, most mighty and most puissant Cjesar, Metellus Cimber throws before thy seat An humble heart. — CfBsar. I must prevent thee, Cimber, These coucUngs and these lowly courtesies' Might fire the blood of ordinary men ; And turn pre-ordinance anH first decree Into the law of children. Be not fond To think that Caisar bears such rebel blood That will be thawed from the true quality With that which melteth fools ; I mean, sweet words. Low-crook' d curt'sies and base, spaniel fawning. Thy brother by decree is banished ; If thou dost bend, and pray, and fawn for him, I spurn thee like a cur out of my way. Know Cscsar doth not wrong ; nor without cause Will he be satisfied." (a.) Point out all the figures, rhetorical and syn- tactical, which occur in this extract. (6.) "Prevent," "ordinary," "quality," "satisfied:" Give groups of synonyms for each of these words, and distinguish between the shades of meaning of the words in each group. {c.) What is the derivation of these words : "Courtesies," "decree," "thawed," "banish- ed,'' "wrong." {d.) Discuss the various readings proposed in respect of the words in italics in the above passage. («.) Paraphrase in ordinary language the first nine lines of Caesar's speech, so as to exhibit the meaning of the author. (/.) How were the last two lines of Caesar's speech originally written ? To what celebrated criticism did they then give rise? What is their meaning as they now stand ? (4.) Give the origin and transmutations of meaning and application of the words in italics in the following passages : — " What you would work me to, I have some aim." " The repealing of my banished brother." " To be resolved if Brutus so unkindly knocked.'' * " Be content; speak your grief softly." " Every nice offence should bear his comment." " Such rascal counters." " Old men, fools, and children calculate." " Upon my knees, I charin you." (5.) Elucidate the force of the following phrases :— ''Conned by rote;" "our wildness shall no whit appear;" "7W2/ life is run his compass;" ''take thought^ and die for CjBsar." (6.) Craik says : "It is evident that the characteristics of Julius Coesar and his history had taken a deep hold of Shakspeare's imagination." Is this a correct or incorrect position ? Give reasons for your answer. « 1 f ' . . • *'• , ' .4. 't » •"'I ■■tl}A i*tX%-- .'.,V ": ) -* ^1 W,."'',-k 'l-^k't^i^ -I .mm i.l* h:l !■ anftiersftj? of Eotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR. HISTORY AND ETHNOLOGY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: J ^' iJ^^^soN, LL D. \ J. A. Boyd, M.A. '^^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. ki \ x?®^1® ^^^ *^® causes, direct and indirect, which ena- bled Napoleon to establish the empire on the ruins of the trench republic. 2. State the gains and losses, material and moral, of prance and England, from the struggle terminated by the Treaty of Amiens. ^ 3. D. Hamilton says of the war of England against France, begun m 1793, " In one aspect thiJ was a war of principles ; m another, it was a war of self-defence ; but in both It was just and inevitable." Define what is implied in each of those assertions; illustrate them by reference to details of the war ; and assign reasons for maintaining or rejecting the conclusions stated. 4. Name the leaders, and compare the circumstances and results, of the victories of Corunna and Toulouse. ETHNOLOGY. 1. Define the system of classification of Retzius ; and explain what is implied by designating the Anglo-Saxons : orthof/nathioldolieocephalce. 2. Explain the terms : aptotic, j^aurosf/Uabic, pohjsi/n- thetic, amalgamate and agfjhitinate, as applied to languages ; and specify an example of each. 3. Max Muller says : " We know that grammatical termi- nations, as they are now en led, were originally independent words, and had their own ]) irposo and meaning." Explain this, and illustrate it from English examples. 4. Schlegel asserts, as a fnnd on al proposition, that "Names of things and terms o^ e ipres' " )n are transitory ; but the system of grammatical 30i'!itruc m is permanent." How far is this compatible with ^hc ch...ages the English language has undergone from its v igmal condition as an inflexional language ? 5. The theory of a Pelasgic stock conntituting the prehis- toric occupants of all Italy, has been maintained by assuming that the Tyraeni of the north were Pelagi, on whom llhoctian Rasena intruded ; and that the CEnotrii in the south were also Pcla^^gi, on whom the Hellenes intruded. Define what is implied in this theory, and discuss it in all its bearings. 6. Define the ethnological changes implied in the adoption of the names France, England, 'Wales and Scotland, for those applicable to the same countries when first invaded by the Romans. 7. Indicate the changes on the commercial and political institutions of Italy, subsequent to the dismemberment of the Roman empire ; and show to what extent they are traceable to ethnological changes. 8. Trace all the ethnological changes which the Iberiam peninsula has undergone ; and sliow the inlluence of those changes on subsequent history. 9. Give the derivation and strict meaning of the terms : aborigines, autochthones, prehistoric, primitive, allophylian, primeval. 10. Define and illustrate the difference between ethnologi- cal absorption and extinction. r: 4 1 M! - \ i . w( ... Subi Trai 1. inde 2. 3. Trai unii$tvuiitj! of STotonto; ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR. FRENCH. Examiners : | J^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. ( Robert Sullivan, M. A. I. Subject for French composition: "Education and culture of the mind, necessary to women." II. Translate : Un effroyable cri, sorti du fond des flots, Des airs en ce moment a trouble le repos ; Et, du sein de la terre, une voix formidable Rdpond en gdmissant k ce cri redoubtable. Jusqu'au fond de nos coeurs notre sang s'est glac^ • Des coursiers attentifs le crin s'est herisse. ' Racine's Phedre, Act V., Scene VI. 1. Why no longer was the imperfect, but the preterite mdetinite employed by the poet ? 2. How many inversions ? Point them out. 3. How many hiatHs; specify their effect. III. Translate : JOAD. Jdhu, qu'avoit choisi sa sagesse profonde, Jehu, sur qui je vols que votre espoir se fonde, ' i J f > ., ■HHr ^ 1 'nI < 4 v/ ,^^H '» N ' tiii^^l .^^BHnl^H D'un oubli trop ingrat a payd ses bienfaita: J^hu laisse d'Achab I'affreuse fille en paix, Suit des rois d'Israel les profanes exemples, Du vil dieu de I'Egypte a conserve les temples ; J^hu, sur les hauts lieux enfin osant offrir Un temeraire encens que Dieu ne peut souffrir, N'a pour servir sa cause et venger ses injures Ni le coeur assez droit, ni les mains assez pures. Non, non : c'est d Dieu seul qu'il faut nous attacher Montrons Eliacin ; et, loin de le cacher, ' Que du bandeau royal sa t^te soit ornee : Je veux mSme avancer I'heure determinde, Avant que de Mathan le complot soit form^. Racine, Athalie, Act III., Scene VI. 1. Jehu. Who was he ? 2. Sa sagesse j^rofonde. Give the antecedent of sa. 3. Sur qui je vols. When is qui exclusively said of persons ? '' 4. D'Aehah Vaffreme fille. Name her. 5. Suit des rois d'Israel. How? 6. Bu vil dieu de VEgypte. Name him. 7. Siir les hauts lieux. Explain. 8. Qu'il faut nous attacher. Give a more definite form and destroy the pleonasm. ' 9. Point out the two most striking inversions. IV. Mais ce qu^unsagc g<^neral doit le mieux connaitre, c'est sos soldats et ses chefs ; car de hi vient ce parfait concert qui fait a^r les armies comme un seul corps, ou, pour parler avec TEcriture, " comme un seul homme :" Egressus est Israel tanquam vir unus. Pourquoi comme en seul homme? Parce que sous un meme chef, qui connait ct les soldats et les chefs comme ses bras et ses mains, tout est egalement vif et mesure'. C'est ce qui donne la victoire; ct j'ai oui dire ^ notre grand prince qu'a la journde de Nordlingue, ce qui I'assurait du succ^s, c'est qu'il connaissait M. de Turenne dont I'habiletd consomm^e n'avait besoin d'aucun ordre pour faire tout ce qu'il fallait. Celui^ci publiait de son gOte qu'il agissait sans inquie'tude, parce qu'il connaissait le prince, et ses ordres toujours surs. C'est ainsi qu'ils se donnaient mutuellement un repos qui Ics appliquait chacun tout entier b. son action : ainsi finit heurousement la bataille la plus hasardeuse et la plus disputde qui fut jamais. BossuET Oraison Funehre de Louis de Bourbon. 1. O'est ses soldats et ses chefs. When is the demonstrative ce repeated before est f Why not ce sont ? 2. Car de Id. Suppress de Id^ and give the words referred to. 3. Fait agir. Resolve by a conjunction into a tense and mood. When is it that faire cannot be followed by an infinitive ? 4. J'ai ou'i dire d notre grand prince. Under what grammatical rule is this expression ? Explain. b. Pour faire. Resolve into a (?e/?m*fe form. 6. Et ses ordres *ouj^urs surs. Fill up the ellipsis. 7. Qui les appliquait. Give the antecedent of ?e«. 8. Qui fut Jamais. Why in the indicative, after i super- lative relative ? V. History of the French literature in the 17th century (Chouquet's.) ^ 1. Give a biographical sketch of Fontenelle, and state what are his true titles to literary glory. 2. Who has been surnamed, on account of his manly eIo(iuence, the Bossuet of the Protestant chair? Charac- tense his style. 3. Write a short biographical notice of D'Aguesseau, and state in what he can be fully compared to Cicero. Give the character of his style. 4 When and where was for the first time played L Mourdi, and le B6pit Amoureux, de Moliere, and what are his best chefs d'oeuvre ? ip m m - '1 *', "' - '■ 'li 'ipf fi'. i lilt iiil' liijl i.i.l i Trai of Btn ii^nmvmv^ of sTotottto. I ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR. FRENCH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. — . ( Jambs Fornbri, LL.D. Hxammers : I rqbert Sullivan, M.A. Translate : ladislas. S'il est temps de patir, mon Sme est tonte prSte. VENCB8LAS. L'^chafaud Test aussi ; portez-y votre tete : Plus condamn^ que vous, mon coeur vous y suivra ; Je mourrai, plus que vous, du coup qui vous t^ra, Mes larmes vous en sont une preuve assez ample : Mais d I'etat, enfin, je dois ce grand exemple ; A ma propre vertu, ce gdn^reux efFort ; Cette grande victime, a votre frbre mort. J'ai craint de prononcer, autant que vous d'entendre L'arr^t qu'ils demandaient, et que j'ai dil leur rendre. Pour ne vous perdre pas, j'ai long-temps combattu; Mais, ou I'art de rdgner n'est plus une^ vertu, Et c'est une chimere, aux rois, que la justice ; Ou regnant, si I'^tat je dois ce sacrifice. RoTiiON, VenceslaSj act v., scene vi. of quite ia declined and when not. Explain also its con- struction before gens. '4" ■J 1 s hi i 2. Plus cor damns que vous. Fill up the ellipsis. 3. VousyBuivra. Give the antecedent of y. 4. Fill U:) .ijc ellipses in verses 3, 6, 7, 8. equivalent" " ""' ''''' P''""''' ^^"PP^^^ ^^ -cl give the in t^ £Lbf' ^^^^ *^^ P-*-P^- past not decided 7. Zewr rew(^re. What does Uur refer to ? 8 Que la justice. What is this que crilpd ? T^.-^ the pleonasm in this line. ^ ^ * ^^'^^^^ ^^^9. Megnant Resolve it by a conjunction, t..se, and 10. Je dots ce mcriflce. Give the force. Translate : Le theatre, fe^^jle en censeurs pointilleux Chez nou. pour .e produiro est un champ ptrilleux Un auteur n> fait pas de faciles conqugL • ' II trouve a le siffler des benches toujours prates • Chacun lo peut traiter de fat et d 'igiorant * C est un droit qu'a la porte on achfte en entrant 11 faut qu'en cent facons nour nln,v^ ;i *^"^'^*,!?^- «.. en nobles sentiments il soit partout fdoond • Olir^^f' '°"''^' "g^-^^ble/profond; Que Je traits surprenants sans cesse il nous rfiveill^- Et „ irr.'^™' ^?^™''' ^^ "erveilleen merveU le ' Et que tout ce qu',1 dit, facile a retenir "™"° ' i>e son ouvrage en nous laisse un lon» souvenir Amsi la trag,idie agit, marche, et s'expUqne '' reMVe^Tntocr """"™ ^'"■'"«-- ^"n it into a aco^juilrn!'-^'''""''"''- «^'»'^-'i"'<". definite sensory 3. Un auteur n-yfaitpa,. Give the antecedent of u. '^''" "" *""• S W^^^s ce, and give the equivi^.i. 5. Qu'd, la parte on aohete. Give the force. 6. B faut. Explain by examples the five constructions of this verb. 7. Pourplaire. Resolve it in a definite sense by a conjunction. 8. II 86 replic. Give the force. 9. Que tantdt il s'^leve. Destroy all the ellipses up to the last verse. 10. Ainai la tragSdie. Introduce a pleonasm. im. Wif 3F7-6 Tra moo and of a the,] lowe heca: ' ' '1 l^ntt^trnitu of ^Toronto* .?j ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR. GERMAN. Examiners :ii''''^' Forneri, LL D. \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. '{^ I. Translate into German : The celebrated Doerfling, the son of a Bohemian peasant, learned in his youth the business of a tailor ; he afterwards changed the needle for the sword, and entered the service of several heroes, and was appointed at last, by the grand elector, who knew how to appreciate and reward merit of any kind, whatever, Major-General and Governor of the Duchy of Ulterior Pomerania. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 1. Mention the peculiarity of the auxiliary verbs of mood, and give an example. 2. Explain the difference between German intransitive and neuter verbs ? Give examples. 3. By what case do you express the state or condition of a neuter verb, and the action of an intransitive verb ? 4. What auxiliary does an intransitive verb take when the manner of moving is expressed ? 6. What does da combined with a preposition and fol- lowed by dass represent ? Translate, by reading muck he became learned. % m 6. "When aro halb, gam to bo declined awl •wliennot? 7. How is tho passive voice of neuter verbs expressed in German ? 8. Translate, he 18 feared , the child 18 dressedf ^am- plifying both the passive and nen*'cv vi^rbs. 9. Exphiin Oratio ohUqda, and ;. natructio ad sensum, by examples. III. SET INTO ailAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION THE FOLLOWING LINES. Translate : 3ufl. Sltnn* ctu pcvfcftcr Sciufcr tft tv, bag ifl c^mi^. SBcnn il^m Ux |)crr fiinfjtf; ®d;rittc i>ou\ah, fo fonntc cr t^n mtt j'cincm Initcn ^mux nid)t cin^olcn. gr(l) ^inj^cgen fcinu tern ©alflcn taufenb ®d;rtttc i^ovj^ckn, unb td; bette nicin Sebcn, cv l)olt t^n cin. IV. Translate 3)cr Stvtl). .<:at c5 3I)r trt^ cjnabfi^c gvauleiit ntd;t crjo^lt ? — %l^ id) 8ie, inctn fd;i5nc^ ^tnb, iinten fu tcr ^itd;c »ciTicp, [o fain trf; ypit ungcfa{)i mcHx l)icr tn ten @aal — granci^fa. 53on unQefaI)iv in bcr 5H)[td;t, em wcr 'i 511 l^ovd)cn. 3)cr SBtrtI). (St, mei'n ^inb, jvfe faitn (3tc bad yon intv bcufcn? (Smem 2QirtI)c (a{;'t nirfUiS uMciv Id 9?cu(iiicrbe— 3d) ivar ntd)t lanc^c l)ier, ■> pvcKt.' mif imil t^ Xt)ure bci bcm pcibtijcn graulcin auf. 2)cv a}ta;or ftiivjte Ijcraitd, tad gmulctn i\)m nad; ; bcttc in ciner 33cn)cflun(;i, mit SSlicfcn, m emcr (SteUung- iV wad la|3t ftd; nur^fl^m. ®tc crgviff t^n ; cr rip ftd; lod ; ftc cn^rtif tl)n nnebcv. Stdlljeim! — grciulem! laffen etc mid)! — ?Po^tnV ©o jog cv fie W an tie J.cppc? SOiiv wax [ibon knge, cr tt)urt>c ftc mit l^tnabreipcn. %kx cr n^ ib ftd noc^ lod. Lessing, Minna von J irh n, p. 62. 1. Unten in der KUche vcrliess. What part of the speech is unten P 2. Von ungefahr in der absicht. Give a synonym of in der absicht and j&Ii up the ellipsis. 3. Paavonmir denkenP Suppn daa and give tnd equivalewt. 4. Mnem Wirthe Idast, ^c. Give a synonym to lUsst. 6. Ich war nicht lange hier, add a verb, 6. Das Frdulein ihm nach, fill up the ellipsis, 7. Beide in einer Bewegung, mit BUckerif in einer Stellung. Add the complement. 8. So was lasst sich nur sehen. Give the force. 9. Ur ri»s sich los. What case or cases does lo% as adjective govern ? 10. Wohin V Add a verb. 11. Mir war schon hanqe. ^ivc a synonym of this expression by a single word. 12. Er wUrde sie mit. Add the regimen to mit. V. GERMAN LITERATURE, (GOSTICK'S.) 1. Wlnt -w- '9 the 5th period \yith respect to poetry ? 2. Wlm error does Lcssing expose in his "Lackoon" ? 3 ,/hat production was once esteemed as the German " VLar of ^' efic i " and by whom was it written ? 4. Wlio ^^..a nsidered the greatest writer of the 6th period ? Name some of his best works. i m^^-. Subj Witl smiuetttUi^ oc 3:oironto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. Tirmn year. GERMAN. FOR HONORS. -, . f James Founeri, LL.D. •^^^^»'»^^« • \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. T. Subject for German composition : " The Horse." Within thirty lines at least. II. Unb eilcnfciJ cjingcu fcic Slbbcritcn I;in, uub mad)ten m (SJefel): bap fc(u'3lttcntcn[ol)u Ijinfovt wcitcraliSH^ nnbcn ^^ormtl){fd)cn 3ftl)mu^, Kiiuicv fit^ cin 3af)r, wnb anfccrsJ aliJ untcr ber 2tuf[icl)t turn bcial)itcii i)ofmciftcvg »on 511= tafcbmti[d)cv 3lbfunft, 3)cutavt uub Zittt, [oUtc vcifcn burfen. „3uncic .^cutc milficu jwav bic 3BcU [cl)cn, frtj^ic bci^ 3)ccret : abcr cbcn barum [oUcu fie ftcl) an jcbcin £)vtc ntdjt langev aufl)alten, al^ W fie aUc^, m& mil %nc\tn ba ju fel^cn ift, gcfc^cn l)aben. 33cfunbcr^ foU bcv .<^ofmctftcv <^cnau bemcrfcn, m^ filr (^5aft()iJfc fie aiu^tvoffcn, wie fie Ciccjcffcn, uub mt m\ fie bci^l;lcu milffeu ; camit t(;ve SOUtbiirocr fid) in bcv golge biefe cvfprte§Itd)en ®c{)eimnad;rtd)tcn ju nu^e mad;en !5nncn. gerner foil (wie bc^ T ■ vet ivettev facjt), ju (Jvfpavung bcr Unfoften cinc^ allju lanf^cn 5tufentl)altcr mctncr bod) ycicl)ftcii iDhittev Utib etnc @d)anttl;at fd;aublicf; rad;cn^ jjiicfi 2)itrd; tl^rcn Stnf ,^u Wmnb' ncrt\t)tc.\ ©Uu&c, (£ic l)aben ci3 auf XaiUal'i^ .*^au^ ncrirf;t.'t ' Unt tc^, ttr Scj^te, [oU iild)t [d)u(HW, m vl\i)i el;ren»oU »ergct)n. Goethe's IpMgenie auf Tauris, Act ii., Scene i. 1.^ Wenn sie dern Menschen, &c. Give the anteceden of ilr 2. Fill up all the ellipses of this extract.* 3. Von den Semen. Suppress the capital initial S in tSeinen and add a noun. 4. Dann mag er danJcen. Dankcn, whom ? 5. Bann denn. Compare. 6. Zum SoJddchter auserkoren. Give the rule applicable to this expression. 7. ScMndlich rachend. Express the adverbial idea of ^ehandhchhy Weise, and resolve rachend by a conjunction. 8. Ich, der Letztc. Turn it into a relative sentence. L 4| iiiij -^ii?'« ^1 ei 9' no /» WitiititvuitSf of ^otonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR. •* r ,.w';s ITALIAN. IS . Examiners • \ ^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. ■ \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. I. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 1. In what are the verbs fare and stare idiomatically employed ? 2. Translate, 1 am neither tJiirsty nor hungry. 3. When is il che used ? 4. Point out the difference between questi, cotesti, and quegli. 5. When is the definite article omitted ? 6. What is the plural of milk and thai of cento ? 7. What numbers are employed for the date of the month ? 8. Translate, It was last week that I spoJce to your friend. 9. W.^en is mezzo invariable ? 10. How * ' ago expressed ? II. Translate into English: GiA. Che strepito h questo ? Che piazzate son queste ? Leo. Signora, le piazzate, non le fo io : le fanno quelli che si burlano de' galant' uomini, che mancano di parola, che tradiscono suUa bwona fede. GiA. Chi ^ il rec ? Chi ^ il mancatore ? (Con caricatura.) FuL. Parlate voi. {A FiHppo.) FiL. Favoritemi di principiar voi. [A Fulgemio.) FuL. Orsii, ci va del mio in quest' afFare. Poich^ il dia- volb mi ci ha fatto entrare, a tacere ci va del mio, e se non sa parlare il signore Filippo, parlerd io. Si, signora : ha ragione il signor Leonardo di laraentarsi. Dopo avergli dato parola che il signor Guglielmo non sarebbe venuto con voi, mancargli, farlo venire condurlo in villa, ^ un' azion'e poco buona, e un trattamento incivile GiA. Che dite voi, signor padre ? FiL. Ha parlato con voi rispondete voi. GlA. Favorisca in grazia, signor fulgenzio : con qud autoritcl pretende il signor Leonardo di comandare in casa degli altri ? Leo. Con quell' autorita che un amante... GlA. Pordoni, ora non parlo con lei. [A Leonardo.) Mi risponda il signor Fulgenzio. Come ardisce il signor Leo- nardo pretendere da mio padre e da me che non si tratti chi pare a noi, e non si conduca in campagna chi a lui non piace ? Leo. Voi sapete bcnissirao... GiA. Non dico a lei ; mi risponda il signor Fulgenzio. FiL. (Oh ! non S3va vero dcgli amorctti, non ijurlercbbe cosi.) FuL. Poiche volete che dica io, diro io. II signor Leo- nardo non direbbe niente, non ^)retenderebbe niente se non avcssc intenzione di pigliai vi per moglie. GiA. Come il signor Leonardo ha intenzione di volermi in ipposa? {A Fulgenzio.) Leo. Possible che vi giunga nuovo ? GiA. Perdoni. Mi lasci parlar col signor Fulgenzio. {A Leonardo.) Dite, signore, con qual fondamento potete voi asserirlo ? {A Fulgenzio.) FuL. Col fondamento che io medesimo, per commissione uci Signor xiconaruQ, ne ho avanzata testu a vostro padre la proposizione. Leo. Maveggendomi si maltrattato... d-iA. t>i grazia s* accheti. Ora tion tocca a lei ; parleri quando tocchera a lei. {A Leonardo.) Che dice su di cio il signer padre ? GOLDONI, La Villeggiatura, Atto iii., Scena xiv. 1. Che piazzate. Give the force. 2. Favoritemi di principiar voi. Turn favoritemi into a deprecatory adverb, and principiar into an imperative. 3. Orsil. Give a synonym in French. 4. Ci va del mio in quest' affare. Translate it into French, adding a noun to mio. 5. Mi ci ha fatto entrare. Suppress ci and give the equivalent. 6. A tacere. Resolve it by a conditional conjunction, tense, and mood. 7. Dopo avergli dato parola. Resolve by a conjunction, tense and mood, adding the subject. 8. Che un amante. Supply the reticence. 9. Da mio padre. Why not dal 7nio padre ? 10. Non si tmtti chi. Resolve chi. 11. Ohi a lui non piace ? What does a lui refer to ? 12. Begli amoretti. Prefix a governinj;, word. 13. Dicay dird. Change dire into parlare^ and conjugate. 14. In isposa. Why in isposa and not sposa ? 15. Possibile che, S^c. Supply verb and subject. "iZ. Asserirlo. Suppress lo and add the equivalent. 17. Ne lio avanzata, ^c. What does ne refer to ? 18. Ora non to.-'ui a lei. Give the force and translate it into French. '-' ' '• ft'. I ^ ^U ' '►'•■a Bni^tt:uitp of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR. APPLIED CHEMISTRY. r-::%^i Examiner: Henry Croft, D.G.L. 3 sl^i-ai •nx 1. How may the presence of organic matt#r in the air be detected ? 2. What salts of lime can be easily removed from ffater, and how ? 3. Explain the ciir.:eiice between spring, river, and rain water. 4. Give the preparation of nitric rcid. How is the residue utilised ? 5. Give the preparation of aluiii-, aoL-i its uses. 6. Describe the manufacture of giae, and the uses of the residue. 7. Describe the extraction of lead from galena. 8. Describe the manufacture of shot. 9. Describe the process of alkalimetry. 10. What are the uses of chlorine in the arts, and in what forms is it employed ? •i ! sp an ac ar H. ca pe Bni^tvHitp of Eovonto, ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR. APPLIED CHEMISTRY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L. ^ . t #1 1. Describe the preparation of common salt from brine springs, and from sea water. What other salts are obtained, and how ? 2. Describe the manufacture of gunpowder, and its action. 3. What salts of barium and strontium are used in the arts ? How are they prepared ? 4. Describe the method of refining sugar. 5. What proporty renders copper ineligible for castings ? How is the objection obviated. 6. Mention the economical uses of coal tar. 7. Describe the manufacture of candles of all kinds. 8. Describe the process of block printing as applied to calico. 9. Give the diflFerent methods of preserving food, and the principles on which they depend. 10. Give an outline of the processes by which gutta percha is utilised. '"^hr i, I IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) Y m /. /. ^ ^A' 5/ ^ ^^ i^^^ t/j ^ 1.0 I.I ^4i 12.8 1^ 1^ IIIIIM 2.5 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 ^ 6" ► Hiotographic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ^-^^\ C», ' IP II Wini\ittuitu of CEToronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. iHlRD YEAR. METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. TENNEMANN'S HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY AND STEWART'S DISSERTATION. 1. a. After whom were the Thomists and Scotists respectively named? b. In what century did the founder of these sects flourish ? 2. a. About what time and at what university did William of Occam teach ? b. What logical principle did he bring into prom- inence c. Which side did he take in the controversy between the Realists and Nominalists, and what was his doctrine with regard to the foundation of morality? 3. a. To what country and to what century did Giordano Bruno belong ? b. State the general nature of his philosophy. c. Of what ancient systems may it be considered as a refined reproduction ? 4. a. State any thing you know with regard to the life and personal character of Spinoza. 5. b. Give a brief account of the system expounded in his Ethics. a. What arc the thrc3 parts into which Hegel divides philosophy ? b. What are the two schools into which the Hegel- ians separated after their master's death ? c. State some of the questions on which the two schools separated and the side taken by each. a. State the doctrine of Hobbes with regard to the origin of society. 7. b. Mention some of the circumstances of his time which may have influenced the development of that doctrine. e. On what points can his influence on Locke's sys- tem be recognised ? 6. State and criticise existence of God. Clarke's demonstration of the 8. a. What was Hartley's theory with regard to the action of matter on mind ? b. On what single principle did he attempt to explain all the mental phenomena ? 9. a. From what English philosopher did Condillac derive the main principle of his theory ? b. Point out the connection of the English philoso- pher's system with that to which it was reduced by Condillac; and defend your answer to the question, whether the reduction is logical. 10. State and criticise Stewart's estimate of Kant. 'i V ^ X.: *^-^^ t'l!? > i < . m$ .rTv? -.:^. Zitnfb(t0ltj^ of ^Totonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. THIRD YEAR. METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Uxaminers.'f^ll' i'""^' ^'""T' ^'^' \ Rev. Pjrofessor Murray. MACKINTOSH. 1. State the radical distinction between physical and moral sciences. 2. Explain from Grotius the general principles of morals which prevailed immediately after the close of the scholastic period. 3. What was the speculative question which formed the ground of dispute between Fenelon and Bossuet, and what views did each hold? Give the opinions of any other writers on the same subject. 4. Give some account of the views of Jonathan Edwards, and note his coincidences with other philosophers. 5. What is the relation of Hutcheson to Scottish specu- lative philosophy ? 6. Give M.'s character of Paley, and state what principle M. borrowed from him, 7. " Which last form of expression has so close a resem- blance to the language of Kant, that it should have protected the latter from the imputation of writing jargon." Explain. 8. Explain Brown's objection to the use of the word Association in reference to ideas, and show the more general principle on which the objection is founded. 9. Notice the leading points on which M. may be regarded as having added to moral philosophy. LOCKE I., WITH COUSIN'S CRITIQUE. 1. What is the objection, which Cousin urges, against beginning an enquiry into the human understanding with the question discussed in the first book of Locke's Essay ? 2. a. What docs Locke rctrard as the chief argument for the existence of innate principles ? b. By what considerations docs he answer this argu- ment with reference to the two speculative prin- ciples, whatever is, is, and, it is impossible for the same thing to be and not to be. 3. State Locke's argument to prove that the idea of God is not innate. 4. a. What is the distinction, on which Cousin insists, between the logical and the chronological order of our ideas ? b. Illustrate this distinction with reference to the idea of space. 5. Defend your answer to the question, whether Locke's system may be logically reduced to sensualism. '-:! 1%: ^ ' 'I ,'-. \ : • * ■.., 1. a. prof sciei b. rule 2. "I Political •\ She continual 4. « Ii tion of th assertion. 5. Sho charat^ter 6. Ex} Political : Winiii^tvuitxt of ^otonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. THIRD YEAR. POLITICAL ECONOMY. Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D. WHATELEY. 1. a. Explain and illustrate "Whateley's views as to the propriety of appealing to scripture as a criterion of scientific truth. b. Give an instance in which ho has observed this rule. 2. "I wish for my own part there was no such thine as Political Economy." Why? ^. Shew the influence of emulation in the promotion of continual improvement. 4. " In fact there is no good reason for calling the condi- tion of the rudest savages a state of nature." Support this assertion. 5. Show how differences of religion may affect national character and prosperity. 6. Explain the special necessity and use of definitions in Political Economy. ' i ^.» t' i' >yi « ' f . •\^4 '4 T mnii^ttma of Sotonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. GREEK. JSxamtnerA' J ^^^' ^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. * . I. Translate : AI. TToXXwy ^KWTi T'^vSe aoi 8ovvai xapiv, ^vvai, irpodvixo'i eifii, 'frpwra fikv dewv, CTTetTa iraihcov wv €7rayyiWei yovd^. e? TOVTO yap 8r) (f)povBik el/iL Tra? iyw. ovTcoS' ex^i fioi' aov /xeu eX0ouar)v. ToaovSe fievToc ctol irpoarjfiaivw^ yvvuL' ex rrja-Be fiev yr}^ ov a ayeiv ^ovXija-o/jLuif auTT) 8' idvirep el[(TTa/xai> ifioi T€ ^ap rdS* icrlv iKT^aXeaTara, (Tfcijyjriv riv e^Opolf frot'i c^^ovTaSeiKVUvai, TO (TOP T dpape fiaXXov e^rjyov 0€QVju Ot i/vktu Kal ^vfiiravre'i irXrjv rm I'mricoVy ol fih ij> ottXok ttov, oi S' M rov relxpvi\ovetKlai> KaOia-Taa-av roiavrrjv tju rrplv yevecrOai rjiricTTqaev dv 749 aKoyaafiivoi, koX TroXefiov ovBev iXdaaco nrpocravelXovTO rov irpoTepov v7rdpxovToj^ IV. 1. Give the names of the five parts of Syracuse. By what Roman general was it taken? 2. What incident is sciid to have inspired Thucydides with the desire of becoming a historian ? 3. Why was he banished ? ^>. ; Tra fen nn\\)tvuit^} of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. ,» * * LATIN. Examiners: J Rev. John McCaul, LL.D. X Thomas Moss, M.A. '■«r I. Translate : Da testem Romae tam sanctum, quara fuit hospes Numinis Idsei ; procedat vel Numa vel qui Servavit trepidam flagranti ex redo Minervam : Protinus ad censum, de moribus ultima fiet Qugestio : " quot pascit servos ? quot possidet agri Jugera? quam multa magnaque paropside coenat?" Quantum quisque sua nummorum servat in area, Tantum habet ct fidei. Jures licet et Samothracum Et nostrorum aras ; contemnere fulmina pauper Creditur atque Deos, Dis ignoscentibus ipsis. Quid ? quod matcriam prsebet causasque jocorum Omnibus hie idem, si foeda et scissa lacerna. Si toga sordidula est et rupta calceus alter Pelle patet : vel si, consuto vulnere, crassum Atque recens linum ostendit non una cicatrix. Nil habet infelix paupertas durius in ee, Quam quod ridiculos homines facit. Juvenal, Sat. 111., 137-153. 1. Write explanatory notes on hospes Numinis Idcei^ oui servavit to Minervam^ and et Samothracum to aras. i i'l i ii ti; ;:, V •:! 2. Jures. Why in subjunctive? Distinguish (Bde and cedibua, sordida and sordidula, alter and alius. 3. Give a list of Latin authors of Epic, Dramatic, Lyric, and Satiric poetry, introducing dates where you can. IL Translate : Consumptls opibus vocem, Damasippc, locasti Sipario, clamosuin agcros ut Phasiua Catulli. Laurcolum vclox ctiam bene Lcntulus cgit, Judice me dignus vera cruce. Ncc taiiicn ipsi Ignoscas populo : populi frons durior hujus, Qui scdct ct spcctat triscurria patriciorum, Planipcdcs audit Fables, ridcrc potest qui Mamercorum alapas. Quanti sua funera vendant, Quldrcfort? Vonduut nullo cogonte Nerone, [Noc dubitant colsi pr;\!foris venderc ludis.] Finge tamen gladios indo, atquo bine pulpita pone : Quid satins ? jNIortoin sic quisquam cxliorruit, ut sit Zclotypus Thymcles, stupidi colloga Corintlii? Ecs baud niira tamcii, citharcTodo Principe, mimus Nobilis. IT:\}c ultra quid crit, nisi ludus? Et illud Dcdecus urbis babes: iico niirmillonis in arinis, Ncc clypeo Gracchum pugnantcm aut falce supina. Juvenal, Sat. VIIL, 185-201. Write explanatory notes on sipario, FJiasma Catulli, Laureolum, 2^l<-^nipcdes, pra'toris liulis, pulpita, citharaido Principe, hcne ultra quid erit, nisi ludus, mirmillonis and falce supina. III. Translate : Nullas Gormanorum populis urbes babitari satis no- tum est ; ne pati quidcm inter se junctas sedes. Colunt discreti ac divcrsi, ut fons, ut campus, ut nemus placuit. Vicos locant non in nostrum morcm, eonnexis ct coliaj- rentibus redificiis : suam quisquo domum spatio circum- dat, sive adversus casus ignis remcdium, sive inscitia jedificandi. No cremcntorum quidcm apud illos aut tegularum usus : materia ad omnia utuntur informi, et citra speclem aut dulcctatioiiem. Quiedam loca dili- gentius illinunt terra ita pura ac splendentc, ut picturam ac lineamenta colorum imitentur. Solent ct subterraneos : i specus aperiro, oosque raulto insuper fimo onerant, suf- fugium liiemi ct rcccptaculum frugibus,'^quia rigorem frigorum cjusmodi locis molliunt. Et si quando hostis advcnit, apcrta populiitnr, abdita autcm ot defossa aut ignorantur, aut eo ipso fallunt quod quocrenda sunt. Tacitus, Germania, ch. 16. 1. Gcrmanorum popuUs. Give the names of some, and state their positions. 2. Fail. Why in infinitive ? Inscitla. In what case ? Citra. What is the meaning? SiiffiKjlum. What is the construction ? 3. Give the names of Latin historians after Tacitus. IV. Translate : Ipsi Britanni delcctum ac tributa ct injuncta im- perii muncra impigrc obeunt, si injuria) absint: has {K?gro tolerant, jam domiti ut parcant, nondum ut ser- vianfc. Igitur primus omnium Romanorum divus Ju- lius cuin exercitu Britanniam ingressus, quanquam pro- spera pugna terruerit incolas ac litore potitus sit, potest vidori ostendisso posteris, non tradidisse. Mox bella civil ia, et in rem publicam versa princioum arma, ac longa oblivio Britannioc otiam in pace. ' Consilium' id divus Augustus vocabat, Tiberius procceptum. Agitasse Caium Ca3sarem do intranda Britannia satis constat, ni velox ingenio, mobilis pocnitentia), et ingontes adver'sus Germaniam conatus frustra fuissent. Divus Claudius auctor operis, transvectis Icgionibus auxiliisque et as- sumpto in partem rerum Vespasiano ; quod initium venturo3 mox fortune fuit. Domita) gentes, capti ref^es et monstratus fatis Vespasianus. '^ ' Tacitus, Agrieola, ch. 13. TV To 1. In what years did Julius Caesar invade Britain ? what part of it were his operations limited ? 2. What relationship existed between Julius Caesar and Augustus, and what between Augustus and Tiberius ? Wh was Caius Ca3sar ? IIow was he related to Tiberius and how to Claudius ? What other Roman Emperors, besides Claudius, were in Britain ? 3. Give examples of the government of the genitive bv adjectives, verbs, and adverbs. k i'Sf ^ v-nr m Tram mni\>tvms! of Eovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. GREEK. HONORS. "* :t!! Examiners : \ S^^' ^""'Z McCaul, LL.D. ) Thomas Moss, M.A. I- Translate : TO irav 8' a^' 'EWaSo? aXa^ avvopfiivoiq irevOeia rXi](nKdp8Lo<; /Jt,ev yap TiiKV€iTat. o 'XpvaafiotjSo^i S' "Apr}eovephv 8' inr' dXyo^ ^p^rei irpoBUoL^ 'ArpetSa/?. OL b avTov irepl rel)(p .11 11 ! I is; ■ * ■■' * ■ ..I 1. TO Trdv. What is the construction ? Give the Latin equivalent. In what other sense does iEschylus use the phrase ? 2. diyydveo. Of what Latin word the probable root ? 8. revxv* Give different translations. 4. ^apu. (Line 441.) What other reading ? 5. Xe^rjTa^ €v0eTov<;. Mention another reading. Which do you prefer, and why ? 6. When do the tragedians use a masculine adjective or participle with a feminine noun ? 7. Scan and give the metrical names of the first seven and the last three lines. IL Translate : dW' ifjLov eK TovB^ €pvo7]aiv, vfxapdaoi' VetSr^ yap elaTKOfieO' , wairep tore, irpoiTov fiisv avTov ttjv \vpav Xa^ovr iycb ^fceXevaa daat ^ificovlBov fiiXa, rov KpLov, &)avep6v. t^irel yap eart fi,.fivr>l^ o ttoitjt,)^, &airep hv ,) K^ypLo^ rov apc0p,ov, eu re deL m yhp ola ,}., r) ^larJ^ old ^aa, Kac BoKec .; ola ehac Bee- TaOra 8' e^ayy^XXerL xJec, ^ Kal yXcorruKi KaifxeracfiopaU. Kal TroXXd miOv -n/? xhed e(Tri.Ac8o,xepydpravra rol, irotr^ral,. Upb^ S^ roOroc, ov^ ,/ avrvopeorv),8nr) .) dpapiia. ^ p.kv ydp Kad' avr^jv, ,jBe Kard crvfx^e^rj.^^,' EJ ^^.^ ^^ 7rpoec\,ro fiiM^aadai Kar uBvvafxuiv. alrfj^ ,) dfiaprla. el Bi r6 TrpoeXeaeac p,r, opOcb,, dXXd rhv X-rrirov dfivara Treiroirjrai, i^ixaprrjrai. 'AW ipOm evot. el rv^ydvoc rov reXov, rov a{,rf T6ydp reXo^ ecpnrar eloiirco, eKTrXrjKriKcorepoi^y ayro 7) dXXo ttoioc fiipo,. UapdBayaa V rov E,Kropo, Buo^c,. El p^hroi rh reXo, ^ p^dXXov^ Vrrov epeBexero virapyeiv, Kal r.rd r^v irepl ro{,rJv rexvii}v tjfiaprtjraif ovk opOw^. Aristotle, Poetics, ch. 25. 1. T% vtroKpLriKij^. What other readino- ? • 2. oirotaovv. What is the Latin equivalent ? 3. What is Aristotle's idea of the proper function of the chorus { Quote the opinion of Horace upon this subject. ^ 4. Explain the terms : K^fip.o'i—ardtTipov-^'jrepnTheia- avayv(api(n N MoCaul, LL.D. Mors, M.A. 1. Translate. Zrp- 7 e7re(f)ui ol avv a\\nXo(f)ovia 7e'i^os' upijiov \€i(f>Oq Be Hepa-avBf)o<; epnrevTi IloXweiKei, veoLri pt'^av. Trpiirei rov AlvijcnSd/jLou ijKoy/xloiV le jxeXkwv Xvpav tydpd(raL .11 •m 'I II" 'jflH I'ii 1 Be&Vf oiTiV€<{ eyaipov evopKlaii;^ aBaKpw vlfiovrdt alwva' rot 8' inrpocroparov oK^eovri rrrovov. oaoL 8' eTuXfiaaav €vt-^, XPV unvraiiffa, Kol el B(opr}Toi/ TO Trpay/xa paWov t) kttjtov, 6fi(o;;^r;/ia. oOev koX (f)omi<{ hiva Oavfid^eTai irore ylriXij Kaif eavrijv »; evvoia hi avrb ro fi€ya\6pi^a ruaSe (7vp(f)opd^, (jjiXai,, dpatcTO'i, oia yXjov dvi6vro(; /xixpt Svofxivov, vvv ov irepX rov KvpLOf erepwv elvat Siaycovl^erat, aXX' i^Sr} irepl tj}? rov (Tcof/,aroa<; elcrTjkdov Kal direc^vyov, Kal to fi€po<; TMV yjn'icfjfov 6 Buokcov ovk eXa^cv. Kalrot iroaa XP^aia TOvov^ riOtvai — evOvvwi tTnarj- fxaivecrdai — dp^dfievo'i diro rivo€- povrwv deaei 4. Give an account of the cohortes prcetorice^ cohortes urhancBy and cohortes vigilum. 6, Fluminis aviditas. Explain. III. Translate : Tertio die inducta cognitio est, multis sermonibus et vario rumore iactata, de lulii Tironis codicillis, quos ex parte veros esse constabat, ex parte falsi dicebantur. Substituebantur crimini Sempronius Senecio, eques Roraanus, et Eurythmus, Caesaris libertus et procu- rator. Heredes, quum Caesar esset in Dacia, com- muniter epistola scripta, petierant, ut susciperet cognitionem. Susceperat. Reversus diem dixerat : et, quum ex heredibus quidam, quasi reverentia Eu- rythmi, remitterent accusationem, pulcherrime dixerat Nee ille Polycletus est, nee ego Nero. Indulserat tamen petentibus dilationem ; cuius tempore exacto, consederat auditurus. A parte heredum intraverunt duo ; omnino postularunt, ut omncs heredes agere cogerentur, quum detulissent omnes, aut sibi quoque desistere permitteretur. Loquutus est Caesar summa gravitate, summa moderatione: quumque advocatus Senecionis et Eurythmi dixisset, suspicionibus relinqui reos,_ nisi audirentur, Non cuo, inquit, an isti suspicionibus relinquantur : ego relinquor. Dein, con- versus ad nos : 'ETTiWao-^e, quid facere deheamus? Isti enim queri volunt, quod sibi licuerit non accusare. Tum ex consilii sententia iussit denuntiari heredibus omnibus, aut agerent, aut singuli approbarent caussas non agendi, alioqui se vel de calumnia pronuntiaturum. Videsj quam honesti, quam severi dies, quos iucun- dissimae remissiones sequebantur. Adhibebamur quo- tidie coenae: erat modica, si principem cogites. In- terdum aKpod/xaTa audiebamus: interdum incundis- !^ ' .» :! IP liil gimia sermonibus nox ducebatur. Summo die abe- untibus nobis (tarn diligens in Cassare humanitas fuit), xcnia sunt missa. Pliny, EpiBt. vi., 81. 1. Explain the meaning of the passages in italics. 2. What were uKpoufiara ? What xenia ? 3. Compare the styles of Livy, Tacitus, and Pliny ; and illustrate your statements by examples. 4. Draw up a short synopsis of the principal changes made by the emperors, to the time of Hadrian, relative to the senate, the consuls, the provinces, the taxes, and the army. IV. Expand : M'STATIOM-F-CL-PRISOO LICINIOITALICO'LEGATOAVGVSTORVM PR-PR-PROVCAPPADOCIAELEGAVGG. PRPRPROV-BRITTANNIAE-LEGAVGG PR-PRPROV-MOESIAESVPERCVRATORI ALVEI-TIBERISETCLOACARVM-VRBISCOS LEG-AVGPROV-DACIAELEG-LEG-XIII-GP.F.LEG- LEG XliriGEM-MARTIAEVICTRICIS-SACERDOTI- TrriALI FLAVIALI-PR-INTER-CIVESET-PEREGRINOS-TR- PL-QVAEST PROC-AVG-XX'IIEREDITATIVM-PROVNARBO- NENSET AQVITAN PR-EQ-ALAE- 1 PRC-RTRMIL LEG- 1 ADIYTR-P-F ET-LEG XGPF ET-LEG-IIII-GALLICAEPRAEFCOHlin-LIN- GONVM-VEXILLOMIL DONATOA-DIVOIIADRIANO-IN-EXPEDITIONE IVDAICA QCASSIVSDOMITIVS-PALVMBVS. 1. Distinguish AVG, AVGG, and AVGGG. 2. Explain SVPER. 3. What were the four great collegia sacerdotum ? 4. Explain TITIALI and FLAVIALI. Give other simi- lar designations. 5. Write notes on XX'HEREDITATIVM and EXPEDI- TION E'lVDAICA. SUnCUevsfti) of ^Tovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18C4. OANDJ DATES FOE B.A. LATIN. HONORS. Examiners :i^Z'J''M ^'^m\' ^^'^^ \ Thomas Moss, M.A. . -'1 I. Translate : Eu. lam quidcm licrcle te ad praetorem rapiam et tibi scribam dicam, nisi refers. Ly. Quid tibi ego referam ? Eu. Quod subripuisti meum. Ly. Subripui ego tuom ? unde? aut quid id est? Eu. Ita to amabit lupitcr, ut tu nescis. Ly. Nisi quidcm tu mihi, quid quaeras, dixcris. Eu. Aulam auri, inquam, te reposco, quam tu con- fcssus's mihi te abstulisse. Ly. Ncque edepol ego dixi, neque feci. Eu. Negas ? Ly. Pernego imo : nam neque ego aurum, neque istaec aula quae siet, scio nee novi. Eu. Illam, ex Silvani luco quam abstuleras, cede! I, refer ! dimidiam tecum potius partem dividam. Tametsi fur mihi es : molestus non ero. Fur. I, refer. Ly. Sanua tu non eSj qui furem mo voces - co te EucliO) t J* • •' r ii ni de alia ro roscisse ccnsui, quod ad mcd attinet. Magna est [res], quam ego tecum otiose, si otium eat cupio loqui. ' Eu. Die bona fide: tu id aurum non subripuisti? Ly. Bona. Eu. Nequo scis, quis id abstulcrit? Ly. Istuc quo- quo bona. Eu. Atque id si scies, qui abstulcrit, mihi indicabis ? Ly. Faciam. Eu. Nequo partem tibi ab 00, qui(iui est, indo posccs, nequo furcm cxcipies ? Ly. Ita. Eu. Quid, sifallis? Ly. Turn mo faclat, quod volt, magnus lupiter ! Tlautus, AuMaria, iv., 10. 1. In what metro ? Give a scale of it. Scan first ten verses. What other metres, besides Iambic and Trochaic, are found in Plautus ? What was the Saturnian measure ? What examples of it? On what grounds has its existence, as a species of metre, been denied ? 2. Explain the use of d paragogic; give examples of peculiarities of elision, of the contraction of dissyllables, and trisyllables, of dincrosis, and of quantity, exceptional with reference to rules and the usage of other authors. 3. Draw up an account of Roman comedies, with refer- ence to the varieties of such compositions, the occasions on which they were represented, the actors, the music, the time, and the place, especially the peculiarities of tho Roman theatre as compared with the Grecian, and give a list of authorities on tho general subject. II. Translate ; Posterius res inventast aurumque reportum. Quod facile ct validis et pulchris dempsit honorem : Divitioris enim sectam plorumque secuntur Quamlubet et fortes et pulchro corpore creti. Quod siquis vera vitam ratione gubernet, Divitiao graudcs homini sunt vivere parce Aequo animo : nequo enim est umquam penuria parvi. At claros homines voluerunt so atque potentes, Ut fundam-ento stabili fortuna maneret Et placidam possent opulcnti dcgere vitam, Nequiquam, quoniam ad summum snccctlero honorcm Ccrtantcs iter infcstum focoro viai, Et tamcn o summo, quasi fulmcn, clolcit ictos Invidia intcrdum contcmptira in Tartara tactra ; Ut satius multo iam sit parero quictura Quam rcgcro impcrio res vello ot re^na tencro. I'roindc sine in cassum dcfessi sangiiinc sudent, Angustum per iter luctantes ambitionis ; Quandoquidom sapiunt alicno ex ore petuntquo Res ex auditis potius qnam sensihus ipsis, Nee magis id nunc est ncquo crit mox quam fuit ante, Invidia quoniam, ceu fulmine, summa vaporant Plorumquo et quae sunt aliis magis edita cumque. LUCUKTIUS, V. 1111-1133. 1. To wliat cause do you ascribe the uncommon variety of readings in Lucretius ? What are the theories of Eiclistaedt and Forbigcr V What doubts as to the orthography that sliould be adopted in his poem ? How is this question affec- ted by the consideration of the ago in -which ho lived ? Give examples of archaisms that have been admitted in the best editions. 2. State briefly what you know of the most ancient extant specimens of the Latin language, and give examples of their peculiarities in declension, inflexion, and use of consonants and vowels. 3. Give an outline of the life of Lucretius, citing authori- ties ; and state his views as to creation, sensation, disease and death. What are the Epicurean tenets as to the exis- tence of the Gods, divine providence, religion, and true piety ? What was the Atomic theory, and whence derived ? III. Translate : Nempo hicc assidue : jam clarum mane fenestras Intrat et angustas extendit lumine rimas, Stertimus, indomitum quod dcspumarc Falernum Sufficiat quinta dum linea tangitur umbra. " En quid agis ? siccas insana Canicula messes Jamdudum coquit, et patula pecus oranc sub ulmo est. 'v. Unus ait comitum. "VerumneV itane ? ocius adsit Hue aliquis ! nemon' ?" Turgoseit vitrca bilis, Finditur, Arcadise pecuaria rudere dicas. I: •'I '■-11 .„> -♦ , w is I Jam liber ot bicolor positia mcmbrana caplllis, Inquo manus chartro nodoaaquo vonit arundo. Tunc qucritur, crassus calamo quod pcndcat humor, Nigra quod infusa vancscat sopia lyinpha; Dilutas quoritur gcuunet quod fistula guttas. O miser ! inquo dies ultra miser, huccino rorum Venimus? at cur non potius, tencroquo columbo Et similis regum pucris, papparo niinutura Poscis, ct iratus mamm:c lallare recusas ? " An tali studoam calamo ?" Cui verba ? quid istas Succinis ambages ? tibi luditur ; cflluis amens. Contemncrc : sonat vitium pcrcussa, maligne Respondot viridi non cocta fidclia limo. Udum et mollc lutum oa, nunc, nunc properandus ot acri Fingendus sine fine rota. Persius, Sat. 111., V. 1-24. 1. What was the Roman division of the day and night? How was the period of noon determined before the use of dial i ? To whom has the introduction of dials at Rome been ascribed ? What other mode of measuring time ? What hour is indicated by quinta umbra ? IIow many linece wore there ? In what two senses may quinta hora bo taken ? Which do you prefer, and why ? 2. Write notes on liber, mcmbrana, cliartce, arundo, and sepia ; and give an ticcount of other writing materials used by the Romans. Illustrate parts of this extract by parallels from Horace. 3. Explain the terms sonat vitium pcrcussa, non cocta, fidelia, olla, amphora, urceus, udiuii lutum, acri rota. What was an obba? What was opus doliaret Expand EX'OF'FIG. Describe Sumian ware. Wini\$ttuii^ of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. HONORS. LATIN. E, . / Rev. John MoCaul, LL.D. I. Translate : Tibi haec cruenta serta texuntur manu, Novena quae serpens ligat : Tibi har lyphoeus membra quae discors tulit, Qui rogna concussit lovis. Vectoris istic perfidi sanguis inest, Quem Nessus expirans d .dit. Oetaeus isto cinere defecit rogus, Qui virus Herculeum bibit. Piae sororis, impiae matris, facem Ultricis Althaeae vides. Reliquit istas invio plumas specu Harpyia, dum Zeten fugit. His adico pennas sauciae Stymphalidos, Lernaea passae spicula. Sonuistis, arae ! Tripodas agnosco meos, Favente commotos dea ' Video Triviae currus agiles, Non quos pleno lucida vultu Pernox agitat ; Sed quos facie luri da moesta, Cum, Thessalicis vexata minis, Coelum freno propiore legit. :!^i^ sigt» m-' ■ S .'■ fPPx.- ■■ • . »^ • . .._..' {, >,* ■ *!-;■ ■ ' ■> — ...-■-.^a * *.■ '''*■. '■ ^-^1 T ^H -;' ^^!^H kift \ «■ d m 1 '5; Mi «# '4 ! Sic face tristem pallida lucem Funde per auras ! Horrore novo terre populos ; Inquo auxilium, Dictynna, tuum Pretiosa sonent aera Corinthi ! Tibi sanguineo cespite sacrum Solcmno daraus ! Tibi de medio rapta sepulcro Fax nocturnos sustulit ignes ; Tibi raota caput Flexa voces cervice dcdi ; Tibi funereo de more iacens Passes cingit vitta capillos ; Tibi iactatur Tristis Stygia ramus ab unda; Tibi nudato pectore, Maenas, Sacro feriara brachia cultro. Manet noster sanguis ad aras ! Seneca, Medea, vv. 771-811. 1. Write notes on Phoebe, novena, vectoris, sanguis, pise sororis, Stymphalidos, freno propiore, sera Corinthi, mota caput. 2. Discuss the question as to the authorship of Seneca's tragedies. 3. Give scales of the metres used by Seneca, and point out peculiarities. Distinguish the changes of metre in the foregoing extract. 4. Mention ancient authorities on Latin metre. II. Translate : Poeraat&s draraatici vol activi genera sunt quattuor : apud Grsecos tragica, comica, satyrica, mimica ; apud Roraanos, prretextata, tabernaria, Atellana, planipes. Exegetici vel enarrativi species sunt tres, angeltice, historico, didascalice. Angeltice est, qua sententise scribuntur, ut est Theognidis liber, item chriae. His- torice est, qua narrationes et genealogige componuntur, ut est ilesiodi TvvaiKcav KaTaXoyo ' ^ItfCbetfiiitj^ of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. ASTRONOMY AND ACOUSTICS. Examiner: J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 1. Describe the nature of the apparent motion of the fixed stars as seen from a given place on the earth. Describe tlie points of similarity and diflerence at two places according as they have the latitude or the same longitude. 3. Show how the latitude of a place may be found from the meridian altitude of a known star. If two stars have the same altitude in crossing the meridian of a place in north latitude on opposite sides of the zenith, prove that either the sum of their declinations is double the latitude, or the difference double the co-latitude. 3. What is the nature of the sun's apparent path in the celes- tial sphere as seen from the earth's centre ? What are the zones? Account for the changes in the length of day and night at places in the different zones. 4. Menti'on the instruments essential to an astronomical ob- servatory, and the nature of the observations each is designed to make. How is the sidereal clock adjusted ? 5. Distinguish between sidereal and solar lime. What time does a common watch show ? How can the watch be checked by a sun-dial ? 6. What is the nature o( the earth's patli about the sun and the law of her motion therein? How is this ascertained, and how are the actual dimensions of this orbit determined ? ^ Shew that this motion will account for the change of seasons. Can the four seasons be equal in length? 7. Describe and explain the moon's phases. What is the age of the moon when she rises about noon, and what about midnight? ' « 8. Explain solar and lunar eclipses. Why does not an eclipse happen every time the moon is in conjunction or opposition? 9. Mention the chief points which distinguish a planet from a fixed star and from a comet. 10. Define an undulation, and give examples of diflferent kinds of undulations that may occur in the production of sound. On what elements of the undulation do the pitch, intensity, and quality of a musical note depend ? 11. Describe the modeof vibration of the air in a pipe closed at both ends, when sounding its fundamental note or its har- monics. What is the lowest note that can be produced by such a pipe of given length ? 12. Describe the formation of the diatonic and chromatic scales in music. Why is it necessary to temper, and what is the scale of equal temperament, ? If a person ascend from a note by perfect fifths and alter- nately descend by perfect thirds, how near can he come to the octave ? r.-hk'i f^n Wini\}tvfiit!i of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. RIGID DYNAMICS AND HYDRODYNAMICS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. i Examiner: J. B. Ciierriman, M.A. ■f» !„l| 1. Demonstrate the existence of ii set of principal axes of moments of inertia at every point of a body ; trnd shew that if the moments are known about one set of principal axes, that about any line whatever can bo found from them. If parallel lines be ttikcn, shew tliat the locus of those which have the same moment of inertia aboiit them is a circular right cylinder. 2. When a rigid body moves about a fixed horizontal axis, find the time of a small oscillation. A thin circular arc oscillates about a horizontal axis which is perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passes through one end of the chord drawn through its centre of gravity parallel to its base ; the length of the simple isochronous pendulum is equal to this chord. 3. Enunciate the steps of the proof that the motion of a rigid body about a fixed point, when no forces act on it, can be repre- sented by the rolling of the central ellipsoid on a fixed plane. If a plane disk be thus moving about a point in its own plane such tli.it the principal moments of inertia in that plane are equal, and at any instant the angular velocity be w about an axis which makes equal angles with the principal axes, shew that the normal to the di^k coiiiplcles n revolution in the time - , i '!»'". !l,i>*''^ h 4. Exi)lHin accurately what Ih meant by baying that the motion of a froo rigid body is reducible to one of rotation and one of translation. Rotations about parallel axes being simultaneously impressed on a firo rigid body at rest, shew that the resultant motion is either ono of nttation or one of translation, and detennino it in each caso. 5. A free rigid body at rest is struck by given impulses, deter mine the initial instantaneous motion. If the lni])ulscs consist of a single blow (X, 1', Z) at the centre of Ljravity (the i)rincipal axes there being axes of co-ordi- nates, iitid A, Ji, C the ]>rincipal moments of inertia) and a single couple (//, At, N), shew that in order that the initial motion may be one of rotation, LX ^ JlfV^ ^ XZ I 1 1 __l "^ J_ ~~1 • B V C A A B 6. State and prove the principle of the conservation of areds. Comparing this with the principle of vis viva, state what forces will disappear in the equations formed by aid of one of these principles, which would aj)pear in those formed from the other. Two heavy balls are cfuinected by a weightless rod which is set in motion about the centre of gravity of the balls as a iixed point, detei'mine the angular velocities of the rod. 7. When a fluid rotates in relative equilibrium about a fixed axis nnder the action of assigned forces, determine the pressure at any point, A thin hollow tube, forming a rectilineal angle, contains water, and is made to revolve with a given angular velocity (w) about a vertical axis through its vertex inclined at given angles (a, /3) to the legs. If I bo the length of the fluid-filament, shew that it may separate at the lowest point if cos j3 \ U)' 2.7 /cos a + sin'yQ 8. Having given the impressed force at a point of a fluid in direction of its motion at that point, investigate the relation between the pressure and velocity. What further considerations must be introduced, before the pressure and velocity can be actually ascertained 1 9. To find the time of emptying a vessel through a small orifice. Point out the various assumptions made in your investi- gation. If the vessel be the surface formed by the revolution of the curve ^* CC a** about the axia of x (which is vertical, the vertex •out a fixed le pressure l»eing ilownwiirds,) hUcw tliat the volumes discharged during the former and latter halves of the time of emptying it are in the n+ 2 ratio 2 " — 1 to 1 . 10. To determine the resistance on the anterior surface of a solid of revolution moving in the direction of its axis through a quiescent fluid. What circumsUvuces vitiate the common theory of resis- tances'! A small bubble of ^dass filled with hydrogen ascends in the air (supposed of uniform temperature,) thf wind l)lowing horizon- tally, obtain expressions for the horizontal and vertical accoleca- tions of the bubble in any position. 11. luvestigate the differential cquatioi. which expi'esses ho, motion in a coluinnof air (supposed to retain the same temperature) arising from a hiupII disturbance excited in it, and assuming the solution of thr qnaiion, examine in what cases two waves or only one will '-d ;)rop:if ted. If the u:«(t'irbu,nct be exjiressed by c sin Jl (at — x), find \ the length of the .. ave, and if two such waves be super-imposed, find the period of the beats. 11 nail orifice, ur investi- / .-**^;-.i £|d ''^ffiH jjJM ^'^^l Kffn mnmtuiip of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOE B.A. SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY AND ASTRONOMY. HONORS. Examiner : J. B. Ciierriman, M.A. 1, Investigate the properties of the polar triangle. If one side of a triangle be a quadrant, the three angles nmst be each less than a right angle, or each greater tlian a right angle. 2. Shew how to find the area of a spherical triangle. 'If A' be the s'pherical excess in a triangle where (7 is 90°' a tan i 2?= tan tan -— 3. Prove the following formulas in a triangle, (i.) cose = cosa cosi + sina sin?j cosC; (ii.) cota sini = cot.4. sinC -f cosi cosC; (iii.) tuu I (A-B) = "" \ <"7^j cot I a (iv.) smB sin (7 — sin6 sine == cos5 cos C cosa + cost cose cosil. Deduce others from these by aid of the polar triangle. 4. In a triangle, having given a, h, A, solve it, finding e directly either by a subsidiary angle or a gomnetrical construction, and shew how the ambiguity appears in this solution. Discuss fully the ca.so where A > 90°, h > 90", and deduce the corresponding case when A, i?, a, are given. 5. Prove Legendre's Theorem, and shew how it may be em- ployed to obtain an approximate solution of the triangle in the previous question, when the sides are small compared with the radius of the sphere. 6. Prove that there can be only five regular solids. If F, S, E, be the number of faces, solid angles, and edges in one of these, shew that ^pFS = ^E\ where p is 3, 4, or 5. 7. Find the local times of sunrise and sunset for a given day at any place, and shew that their sum is nearly 12 hours. Find the correction to the time of sunrise at a place to adapt it to another of nearly the same latitude. 8. Describe the errors of adjustment to which a transit instru- ment is liable. Determine the error of deviation by the method of high and low stars. 9. To find the position of, the ecliptic in^ the heavens at any time with reference to the meridian and horizon of any place. Describe the changes of inclination of the ecliptic and hori- zon in consequence of the diurnal rotation, and find when this inclination increases fastest. How is it ascertained when tho fii'st point of Aries is on the meridian 1 10. Describe the nature of the correction called parallax. Find the errors thence arising in the hour angle and declin- ation of a body, computed from an observed zenith distance. At what time of the day should the observation be made in order that the former of these errors may be the least possible 1 11. Calculate the moon's phase, supposing her to move in the ecliptic ; and when her angle of elongation is 60°, compare the apparent areas of the dark and bright parts. Retaining the same supposition, explain the changes of in- clination to the horizon of the line joining her horns. 12. To determine when a stiperior planet will be a morning or evening star. •f •ij 'ii W^:*:*-- .■i'-iJ K/^-. .I^^^^^^^^^lj ^S? ^?^^^^^^^^^^^B V ■ ' .*. ' -'-^I^^^H ^'^^^^^^^1^1 . i. .in^^^^H !. * ■ '' H'^l^^^^l iiiMl. t> • . m i. Exa terms wli circulatin In( In (! In(; the circU previous < 2. Giv( and fractii Ifc, taken 1, i (i.) H (ii) 1. c (iii) il%ni\^tvuitt^ of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. PURE MATHEMATICS. Examiners: / ^ ^' S?\^^^^^?J ^•'^• ) Rev. W. Jones, B.A. iM .M >A !■*¥. i. Examine the forms of the proper fraction - in its lowest 6 terms when it is reducible to (1) a terminating, (2) a mixed circulating, (3) a pure circulating decimal. In (1), find the number of decimal places ; In (2), find the number of places before the circle ; In (3), if a remainder b — a occur, the remaining figurea of the circle can be found by subtracting from 9 each of the previous ones in order. 2. Give Euler's proof of the Binomial Theorem for negative and fractional indices. If c^c^c^ be the number of combinations of n things taken 1, 2, 3, together, shew that (i.) l+c,»+c,>+ +c„'=..^'' [n j^ _ [2n (iii) n ( — 1) . ^r \ n — r . i/i*.,'j,, i 'tif'lf !..• ill. Obtain tho exponential value of x from the |equi\tion a5 + = 2 coa (? . X If in any triangle 2 cos A = x -|- , 2 coa B =r y 4- - , prove 2 co.i C ( rw -|- — ), and slicw thai the twtvvaluea ^ • xy ' of 6x+'ii/ »i*'o c and c + 4 ■/— T _ . 4* Invostiirate cxpreasitJiKi for the riulii of tho inacribod and ciroiuuscrihctl cjrolcs of ii trianjik!. AIho ox])rcss tlso area of a triangle as a symmotrical fsiuctinn of lUo sidos anil angles. If < V y O^ bo the contrea of tlu> osorihod cirohs of a triangle which louclv the .sidoa «, 6, c, rosju'ci ivoly, and 0^0^ — a', Ofi^z=b\ 0,0^rzT.c' show that tho area 0^0./)^ eciualb (() /rtd'see -f. 66' sec -- + cc' soc - j . (ii) -, (a'h' sin -^ -f t'c' sin - ^^ + c'o.' sin — ) . 5. State how to transfinnn an oquuiion whose roots are a, 6, c, into four other e(i[uaiioiis, the tirst of which has roots — a, — b ; tho second 7)ia, mb ; tlie third a+A, 6-|-/i, and the fourth _ , - a Prove the second and fourth cases. If the sides of a triangle bo the roots of the equation di (x) =a;'+ 2/) j;'+ (? ^ — r = 0, show that the radii of tho four circles which touch the sides of tho triangle are given by the equation where A is the area of the triangle, and/(x) = x^(x). vi. Investigate the geometrical properties which are implied in the terms pole and polar in a conic, and shew that any line is cut liarmonically by the curve, the pole, and polar. Having given the locus of the pole, shew how to find the curve "Iways touched by the polar with reference to a given conic, and take for example the case wher. ti ) conic is an ellipse, and the locus of the pole is a parabola v/hicii has the same focus and latuiv. rectum. 7. Define a differential co-etlj/^.ictiit, and give a geometrical inter- pretation of it. Hence, or in any ^ther -way, shew that if the t , '«, difforential co-cfliciont of a fimctiou bo positive, the function increuscH as the vuriiil)l(j incroasoH. Verify trio tlicorcni - — , — - — _ dx.dy dy.dx —1x4- v' (\) WIk^u u= tun — X ■'■ (ii) wIioiiM xV 8. Intc^'rate tlio following functions : (i) tan X (ii) hcc'^x log tan x, —1 /5" /• A l—x coH a (tan ^f_ IV) , , o - , , ^ ' y (^ l+2a; CCS a-f-x' and find a ionnula of reduction for/siu^O. coh"0 ia the angle made by p with a fixed line. If at a point where r is finite, '^^ = and change sign. there is an ajwe ; if dd 00, and cliange sign, there is a cusp; if ^ ^ or 03 and do not change aign, there is a point of inflexion. Draw the foruiH at the polo of the curves r'*^-a% r-aO\ r^aQ. X. State and prove Newton's Lemma iv., Section 1 . In a spiral given by the equation r' :m .( IV- I . n Hir ' i j.^oJ^roi!:r;nirzf^".r-Tui^^^^ ntimvuiiiJ! of SToironto, AIJNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. CANDIDATES FOE B.A. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, HONORS. „ . . f J. B. ClIERRIMAN, M.A. JExammersj-l^j^^^^ W. Jones, B.A. i. State the seuses in wLicli the term rcmliant is used with refer- ence to a set of forces, mentioning any thvcrema involved in such use. Prove that the algebraic sum of the moments of two forces, in the same plane, about any point in it, is equal to the moment of their resultant about that point, and examme what this means when the two forces are equal, parallel, and acting in oppoaite senses. If three forces in one plane are not reducible to a single resultant force, shew that there is a point in the plane about which their moments are equal. 2. Investigate formulas to find the centre of gravity of any solid by means of polar co-ordinates. Apply them to find the centre of gravity of a hemisphere whose density is constant along any radius, but varies aa the angular distance of the radius from the axis of the solid. iii. Find the attraction of a uniform thin rod, every point of which attracts inversely as the square of the distance, on a point situated in the perpendicular bisecting it. Three such rods form a triangle, and a particle is placed at the centre of the circumscribing circle ; shew that it will not remain at rest unless the triangle be equilateral 4 A particle of elasticity e is projected from a given point with a given velocity t; in a direction inclined at a given angle to the horizon; shew that it wiU describe a series of parabolic arcs. '^1 It ' '" ' !i| i I i;;;; i^ind the sum f the parabolic areas which it will describe. V. A ])articlo descends a smooth inclined plane • fin,1 iU velocity acquired, and th,. time of descent. ^ ' ^ '^' Tf an inelastic particle drscend successively down a s^r;«. r n such planes each being incli, cd to the previous cZJ.T "^ angle « and h bo the vertical height do cendecl // tt / '''"r the L ....hts du. to the several obcities at the endf of tl T "^ 2<7(A — ZTsin'a)- of a medium wl-i 1. i-™i,t8 ,n if™ i " "^"f .°" "'" '"''"'')' » uniform frictiou ;„ Z "l"'^' ''^ «"»"1«"-S *» eilcot of periodic timo. ^ ^ *'"' '^""^ "'l"' '" '1"! «>m" disfanoo to tt aomi.lr,L/„r "" '" *'"= ''»"° "' ""^ ^""^ p^^"S:»:!';o*f:^SdSt^^ltr'- *'« /l -1 man J?' "''"' " ''''''•' ^''^" '^"■''''''^S Auia -4 in like 9. Find the pr oblique refraction rou, a plate of tL aess ? distanffrlttro";!^/;;Ul ^eVtTat^t^^^T ^ ^^"^"^ 6 u ux iijjuc, snew tiiat the angle of iucidmce of the axis of the pencil is sin~^ Vgw^p?". 2 d secondary f i of a en. >encil after •f WlNV n„f ;i^TJ'^* ^""l ■*.' """^ Casfiegraln's telescopes, and point out the defects 1/ the image formed by each. ^ Shew that in the former the aberrations produced by the mirrors ave m the same direction, while in the latter they partly, but cannot wholly, counteract each other. ^ ^' xi. Investigate the formulas by which the position of the bowl7 ""^ ""^ ' """"^ "^^"^ *^^* the breadth of the IJ&)^>^ ■ 2 where S^ is the difference of refractive index for the extreme rays. What circumstance would cause the breadth of the bow to bo actually greater than this 1 ifsl •■'•'ll ."«<(ii.; P: m COS. mni\}tvtiitt} df Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: lRfi4. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. rUllE AND MIXED MATHEMATICS. HONORS. w • r J- B. ClIERRIMAN, M.A. ■^^^""'^^^^•Irev. W.Jones, B.A. i. An event, of wlucli|tho a priori probability is p, is aflSrmeil by two independent witnesses whoso veracities are v, v\ deterniino tlio probability of the event from this evidence. Suppose the affirmation to be that a specified ticket was drawn from a bag known to contain n different tickets. Shew also that in this case, the j)robabiIity of a specified ticket having been drawn, as derived from the testimony of a single individual whose veracity is wholly unknown and is equally likely to be anything from to 1, is 1 j {n-l)]os(n^l) - (n-2) J, if n be different from 2. Also find it when n = 2. ii. If 71 be a prime number, the powers (from 1 to ?i— 1 inclu- sive) of any one of the imaginarA roots will ])roduce the other imaginary roots of the equation tc" — 1 =0. How must this statnment be modified if oi be not a prime number ? Shew that the roots of xM — 1=0, where p, q are primes, are given by th') formula Uhl +V-1 sin 2^) (cos ^J^ +v/-isin 1^1) where a, /3 are the positive integral solution of pyS + ^a = any integer from to (jpq — 1) inclusive. 1*1 , i 'l -,, 1 < 1 ■• •*■ V iii !fe i ill. Exninino tJio relation in wliJcli tho conic ia'+ma'+m'^i\ stands to tlie triar.glo of rcfcrcnco ABO. Show that it represents a circle, if _ J __ _ ^>' _ n sin 2 A sin i}yy sin W ' and a roctang; ^ir hyperbola, if I -\- m ■{- n = . 4. Shew that the .symbols of diffc-rentiation nn* -ovcrned bv tho 1_ £ [c sm w.r) = c ^ sin(wix+sino), where tan a = ^* . n1.,t V''''^ n T'l'* ^^^ .^^"^ "'*'''»«'"'^ ^n"^<^io» to a curve ? Ex phun the method ot trac.ng a curve froln its intrinsic e.'uJtion Trace the curves (i) . =, „ ^in 3 <^. (ii) , ^ „ ,^3 , ^^ (iii) = sin — . a vi. Trove that /7(.^),/,^ ^ wheroy(:£) denotes the nth derivative of f{x). J^nid / f"'' and < J, y/^. section of^ 'r,'V*' ^let,o,mino the general nature of the curve of section ot a surface of the second order by a plane. If tho section of the surface J^ + -l£ 4, ^-V _> 1 by the plane /:. + niy ^ ,^. = ^, ^^ a rectangular hyperbola, shew that .. .. j_ _^ 4. 1 _ n 8. Obtain an equation to determine tho tension at anv mint of a uniform flexible string, when acted on by any cenLScT ■ A \uutoYm string wtiicli oooAiploH ono half of an elUptio tul)o bounded by tlui major axiw, is attructiid by two (^qual controH of force ( -j , one in each focua ; .show that tho tcriHiou at any point P is ' ^0' ISP. IIP J 9. A particln is projoctfid witli a voloolty n, in a direction making an an«IM<1 the cnsecpient cliang(,s in the ax<.s of the orbit • rectmirthiif '''''"^" ^'''^' ^'^^''' '''^ '"' extremity of a latus- 2b, ^i, e being the minor axis, absolute forco, and cxcentricity. 11. What is the condition that the deviation of a ray refracted hrough .a prism in a ,,rincipal plane may be a minimum? Obtain a formula from which the refractive index of a substance Shew that rays must be incident upon a prism within an angulnr distance sin-i | '-^S^^- } , in order that they may be refracted thiough the prism in a principal plane, i bein^ the i;efracting angle of the prism, and a the critiod angle of the medium. & ' •'"<- xii. When assigned forces act on any system, explain what is understood by the '-work done" by them, and examine in wha cases It will be measured by the change of vis viva of the system. ^ (rk6 cliambei* of au air-gitn forms part of the ban*el (which IS of iiniform boro) and contains air of pressure p, the length occni)ier 2. A body moves in an action of a force = ~^f{r) at a distance r, shew that the th(' apsidal r igle of the ovbit where a is the great- ij'{a) est value of r. Conversely having given the apsidal angle, find the law of force. 3. Two bodies ^ and P revolve a thi id 2' so that P describes an orbit much interior to that of S; explain what is meant by the disturbing force on F relatively to 2\ and fiind expres- sions for (i) the tangential disturbing force on F, (ii) the cen^ trai disturbing force on F, and (iii) the whole gravitation of x" to T. nd the law 4. The moon is at P in her orbit supposed elliptic, and a I ngent PY is drawn in the direction of her motion ; shew that the angle TPY'\^ acute when she is moving from apogee to perigee, and obtuse when from perigee to apogee. Examine tli'o effect of the central disturbing force on the motion of the moon's apsides, when the apsidal line is in quadrature. 5. Examine the effect of the nblatitious force on the inclina tion of P^s orbit to that of ^S^, when the node lies between quadrature and farther syzygy. Under what circumstances will the inclination be tlie least possible ? 6. Investigate the differential equation of the moon's radius vector -»)e-2j8i] T 3 ^^ = - .j»a'sin{{2-2m),^-2/3t+3m»esinj (2 - 2m - c)9 -2^+af, find u to the 2nd order. 9. Explain the physical meaning of the term — JAi'sin 2(gpt—r/) in the expression for the moon's longitude. 10. Define mean place, and shew that as the sun moves from per"; *n apogee, the moon's true place is behind her mean pi.c. 11. Shew that the moon's orbit is everywhere concave to the sun. Draw a diagram shewing her path about the sun during a year. '.-i. '' - 5 , I mnmvniiai! of 9:otonl;o« ANNUAL KXAMINATIONd : 1804. CANDIDATES FOR H.A. PROBLEMS. HONORS. ^mminers.'fi' ^- CH^f^i^^AN, M.A. ( Rkv. W. J Jones, B.A. 1?'^ ''ii ^li 1. Two jmiiiU, C I) aro taken m a givon line A li, f:ad tho moan lengtli of (J I). 2. If the arcs wliicli bisect the anjfleH /f, 6', of a nplierical triangle A BC, meet in ; then will -^,1 \ (7 cos ylOC + cos 1 // coa /f Oi? = - cos | yl. 3. From the crxo's ^,J9, of any diunuiter of a given small circle on a sphere, arc • are drawn ,>erpendicular to a gWen great circle ; prove that the ,sr;ni .f their sii^-'s is invariable, 4. The base and ar..;i./f a s}>herioal triangl*; are given ; prove that the arc joining tic nuudle points of its sides is of given length. 5. A quadrant of a circle describes a hemisi»}iere by revolving uniformly about one of its bounding radii, while a point traces out a spiral by moving uniformly along the quadrant irom one end to the other ; shew that the surface of the hemisphc^i-e is divided into two equal portiouvS by the contour formed by the spiral and the quadrant in its fii-st j)osition. G. Determine the longest and shortest durations of twilight at a given place. 7. Having given the ratio of tlie measurements from N. to S., T^au iivii-. iij. it.T TT ., ui \jiL\i prujuciiun oii iviercaiors cnartoi asmaii circular island, find its latitude. '1^ 8. The loss of weight in a body at the earth's equator, In con- sequence of the diurnal rotfition, is ^ggth part of its apparent weight. If by an increase of this rotation, bodies at the equator ceased to have weight, in what ratio would the sidereal day be altered in length 1 9. In an ellipse described under force to focus, determine the points where the following changes in the body's motion could respectively be made without altering the direction of the apse- line : (a), a small change in velocity without change of direction ; (8), a small change in direction without change of velocity ; (y), a change in both velocity and direction by a small impulse directed towards the centre of force. 10. In a plane lamina whoso form is a regular polygon of n sides, r is the radius of the inscribed circle : prove that for the moment of inertia (Mk"^) about any line in its plane which passes through the centre, 12^ k' tan' 11' 11. A hollow vertical cylinder of length ?, open at top, stands in the atmosphere. A tight smooth piston (without weight) being inserted and forced down to any depth, water is poured in above it so as to fill up the cylinder when equilibrium is attained. If a small hole be now opened in the surface of the cylinder above the ])iston at a distance h from the base, shew that the piston may be brought jiermanently to rest in either of two positions, provided h > //, and (A + llf > 4///, where H is the height of the water-barometer at the time. 12. Any uniform rigid body, whose figure is symmetrical with regard to an axis which is supposed to be rigidly connected witli it, is allowed to foil under the action of gravity from rest in a position where this axis is horizontal, a point in this axis being fixed. Shew that the angle which the axis has described when the vertical pressure on the point is equal to the weight of the body, is the same in all cases. 13. A heavy rigid body, of which G^ is the centre of gravity, is supported at two fixed points -4, 7i, in the same horizontal 2:>lane ; if .«(, s' be the segments into which A B is divided by the vertical through G^ z be the distance of G from A B, h the radius of gyration about a horizontal line through G perpendicular to A S, shew that when one of the points is suddenly set free, the vertical pressure on the other will be initiallv unaltered if ss' ■.z'+k''. .. I* ( 14. A rigid rod is balancing horizontally about its centre of gravity fixed, and a ball drojKS vertically upon it at such a distance from its centre that tlie moments of inertia of the ball at impact iiiid the rod about this centre are equal. Examine whether under any circumstances the ball can begin to ascend after the impact. If an ela'^^^-'nity could exist for which such would bo the ciiHC, and the i. x c impact of ball and rod occun*ed at the same j)(»int of the rod, prove that tlie latter would then remain at rest. 15. A solid uniform right circular cylinder, whose length is I and radius r, is freely movable about its axis which is fixed vertically. A smooth groove is cut in its surfoce in the form of a helix v/liich is everywhere inclined to the horizon at an angle a, and a heavy particle runs through the groove, starting from the top, and passing out at the lower end ; shew that the angular velocity (to) acquired by the cylinder is given by coV ( 1 + ^) (tan^a+ ^ secVt) = 2^/?, where X is the ratio of the masses of the cylinder and particle. IG. A thin straight tiibe is bent at a right angle, and one end is closed. The closed branch is })laced horizontally, and the other vertically, being exposed to the atmosphere ; mercury is now poured in so as to fill the vertical branch and occupy also lialf the horizontal branch (of which tlie length is J) and the tube is made to revolve about a vertical axis througli its closed end with an angular velocity o), so that when the state of relative equilibrium is attained, the horizontal braiich is just clear of mercuiy ; shew that rl i» ;,."i| le 2k w = !/J I 2k e dr, where k is the ratio of pressure to density in air, and e is the Napierian base. 1 1 8 n .,;■■.* I ( 'E.f / IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) & /. . mnmvms of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. PRINCE OF WALES' PRIZE. HISTORY AND ETHNOLOGY. ^2:amm.r«;/?' Wilson, LL.p. (. J. A. Boyd, M. A. 1. How was Sparta affected by the battle of Mantinea. B. C. 418. 2. In what respects did the battle of Chaeroneia decide the fate of Greece ? 8. Describe the origin and nature of the privileges en- joyed by the Latin colonies of Italy, and trace the°causes and results of the social war, B. C. 90-88. 4. Trace the influence of Charlemagne on the political and ecclesiastical institutions of medieval Europe. 5. Construct a genealogical tree showing the Anglo-Saxon, Danish, and Norman relation by blood and marriage, of Edward the Confessor, Harold II., and William the Con- queror. 6. Trace the grounds of Edward III.'s claim to the French throne, and discuss its merits. ETHNOLOGY. 1. Agassiz says : " The boundaries within which the dif- ferent naturt combinations of animals are known to be circumscribed upon the surface of our earth, coincide with the natural ranao nf HiHtinnf: firnpa nf rnon " "^V^-f ?a -V plied in this theory ? Discuss its value. 2. Herodotus calls the Dorians a Hellenic, and the lonians a I'elasgian people. He also refers to the iEolians as Pel- asgian. Discuss the ethnological deductions which this suggests, in connexion with the final adoption of the name Hellenes for the whole people of Greece ; and define the bearings of the traditions relative to Cecrops, Cadmus. Danaus, and Pelops. ^ * "umuo, 3. Classify ethnologically, with reasons : the Oscans, the babmes, the Etruscans, the Carthaginians, the Basques, the Belgge, the Spanish Moors, and the Majiars. 4. Trace the origin and development of the Romance languages; and discuss their bearing on the general question of the ethnical significance of philological evidence. 5. Seeing that Gaul and Britain were both occupied by Celtic nations when conquered by the Romans, and were subjected to similar influences by their conquerors : account for the fact that the former exchanged its Celtic for a Romance language, and the latter for a Germanic one. 6. Max Muller asks " What is grammar, after all, but declension and conjugation?" Define what is implied in this ; and consider its significance in relation to the different theon.es of the origin of language. 7. Define the specific bearings of philological evidence on ethnological researches ; and state in what respects physical and philological evidence supplement each other. - .^1 I. Shal f(l.) (2.) (3.) (4.) (^ mnmvnitS! ot Eovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. ENGLISH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. i7a:amm.r«;/?-f^iS0N,LL.D. \ J. A. Boyd, M. A. I. Shakspeare's Henry IV., parts 1 and 2. f(l.) What characters and circumstances connect these plays with Richard II. and Henry V. i (2.) Note the anachronisms which occur in Henry IV., and give grounds of justification for Shak- speare's use of anachronisms. (3.) What references to contemporary authors and literature does Shakspeare make in these dramas ? What were his prohable objects in these refer- ences ? (4.) (1.) " The skipping king, he ambled up and down (2.) With shallow jesters, and rash bavin wits, (3.) Sooe kindled and sooe burned ; carded his state ; (4.) Mingled his royalty with carping fools ; (5.) Had his great name profaned with their scorns ; (6.) And gave his countenance, against his name, (7.) To laugh at gibing boys, and st&nd the push (8.) Of every beardless, vain comparative; (9.^ Grew a companion to the common streets, (10.) Enfeoffed himself to popularity ; m 1 ' L hi (11.) That being daily swallowed by men's eyes (12.) They surfeited with honey; and began * (13.) To loathe the taste of swcotnc.ss, whereof a little (14.) More than a little is by much too much." * 1 lien. IV., Act 1, scene 2. (a.) Point out and name all tlie figures, rhetori- cal and syntactical, in this passage. {l>.) Discuss the various readings proposed instead of '• bavin," " carping," and " carded." («'.) ^yhat is the meaning of " comparative "f Exemplify Slinkspcare's use of the word by another passage from this play. {d.) State accurately the force of the 6th, 7th, 8th, and 10th lines. {e.) Give groups of synonyms for the words in italics, and distinguish between the shades of meaning of the words in each group. (5.) In these plays occur the following words:— " Younhe.r," '' mammets" " corrival," " kick- shaws," ''gossip," ''curry," {i.e., curry favour.) Give the derivation and transmutations of mean- ing of each. II. Milton, Spencer, Pope and Cowper. (1.) Give an account of the origin and history of the English sonnet. (2.) Detail the laws of the sonnet in its strictness ; mention the modifications in form and matter which it received from Milton. (3.) Shew in what manner the Spenserian stanza was compounded from earlier forms of verse ; give the laws of the closing line, its name, and why 80 called. (4.) State fully the advantages and disadvantages of this measure as used by Spenser; and also the influence which it had upon his language. (5.) Analyse Pope's rhyming couplet with reference to its metrical character, and compare it with the same mcaiuire as used by Keats. (6.) Contrast the influence of Tope and Cowper on English poetry. State briefly the benefits ren- dered by each to the cause of poetical literature. (7.) " Concord she deeped was in common reed. * * * * By her the heaven is in ht8 course contained, And all the world in state unmoved stands. As their Almightie Maker first ordained, And bound them with inviolable bands ; Else would the waters overflow ihe lands And fire dcvoure the ayre, and hell them quight. But that she holds them with her blessed hands. She is the nourse of pleasure and delight. And unto Venus grace the gate doth open right. By her I entring half dismay d was ; But she in gentle wise me entertayned And twixt her selfe and Love did let me pas ; But Hatred would my entrance have restrayned, . And with his ;lub mo threatned to have brayned, Had not the Ladie with her powrefull speach Him from his wicked will uneath refrayned; And th'other eke his malice did empeach. Till I was throughly past the perill of his reach. Faerie Queene, B. 4, C. 10. (a.) Indicate all the figures, rhetorical and syn- tactical, in this passage. (b.) Give the derivation and signification of the words in italics. (c.) *• Hell them quight." Give the various read- ings as to these words, and the changes of meaning resulting therefrom. (d.) Point out any peculiarities in the prosody or rhythm. ^ t H», '' ' ■ , ■! ii \ ■1 J!^ni\}ttuitu of 2!:oronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES, FOR B.A. ENGLISH. TP . f D. Wilson, LL.D. -I *;^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- taken within the time. " To begin, then, with Shakspeare. He was the man who, of all modern, and perhaps ancient poets, had the largest and most comprehensive soul. All the images of nature were still present to him, and he drew them not laboriously, but luckily. When he describes any thing, you more than see it, you feel it too. Those that accuse him to have wanted learning give him the greater commendation. He was naturally learned : ho needed not the spectacles of books to read nature ; he looked inward and found her there. I cannot say he is every where alike ; were he so, I should do him injustice to compare him with the greatest of mankind. He is many times flat, insipid ; his comic wit degenerating into clinches, his serious swelling into bombast. But he is always great when some great occasion is presented to him ; no man can say he ever had a fit subject for his wits and did not raise himself as high above the rest of the poets." John Dryden. 1. Give the derivation of all words of Latin and French origin in this sentence. 2. Point out all examples of obsolete structure, and reconstruct them according to present usage, with reasons. T'T't. 3. Point out all archaic terms, and words used in a different sense from their present value ; and replace them by their modern equivalents. 4. What is implied in the fact that forms of construction, and uses of terms, which were correct in tlio 17th century are no longer admissible in English composition. 5. When the Romans conquered Gaul and Britain, the languages of both countries were Celtic; the result in France has been tho substitution of a Neo-Latin or Romance lan- guage ; whereas that of England is Germanic. Account for this. 6. Fowler says of tho present tendencies of the English language : " The distinction between the subjunctive and the indicative mode, and that between the participle passive and tho past tense, are likely to pass away." Explain and illustrate each. 7. Point out all the sources from which the Latin element has been introduced into the English language ; and define the relative importance of each. 8. " The Saxon element is much more expressive than the Latin part of the language." {Fowler.) Assign reasons for adopting or rejecting this opinion. 5. " The English of the 9th century is one language, and the English of the 19th century another. They differ at least as much as the Italian differs from the German." {Oraik.) Explain vhat is meant, and account for the fact. 10. Define the rank of Goldsmith as a poet and dr: .atist, in reference to his immediate predecessors, contemp jraries, and successors. 11. Craik says, "In all that constitutes artistic character the poetry of Coleridge is a contrast to that of Wordsworth." Discuss the significance and accuracy of this criticism. 12. Define the terms objective and subjective^ as applied to discriminate between Shakspeare and Byron. ■1! m 5 1 1. Sub Translate L( assez Ses ^ gloir licen etait confi les ci politi bien nait dulit< ne s'l cette Bes SI eux 1 rellei rMi i^nmvm^ of ^otwto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. FRENCH. JS^a:awmm;H^^^s Fornbri, LL.D. \ Robert Sullivan, A.M. I. 1. Subject for French composition: "Humility rare in victory." 11. Translate : Le grand malheur de Frederic fut de n'avoir point assez do respect pour la religion ni pour les moeurs. Ses gouts 6taient cyniques. Bien que I'amour de la gloiro ait donne do I'dMvation a ses pens^es, sa mani^re licencieuse de s'exprimer sur les objets les plus sacr^s etait cause que ses vertus mgmes n'inspiraient pas de confiance : on en jouissait, on les approuvait, mais on les croyait un calcul. Tout semblaic devoir 6tre de la politique dans Frederic ; ainsi done, co qu'il faisait de bien rendait I'etat du pays meilleur, mais ne perfection- nait pas la morality de la nation. II affichait I'incredu- duhtd et se moquait de la vertu des femmes ; et rien ne s'accordait moins avec le caract^re allemand que cette maniere de penser. Frederic, en affranchissant ses sujets de ce qu'il apnelait les prejugeSj fetei^nait en eux le' patriotisme : carj pour s'attache'r aux pays natu- rellement sombres et steriles, il faut qu'il y r^gne des i^-; S An-, ;i.. 1 it. , ti ^ opinions et dea principes d'une grande s6v6rit^. Dans ces contr^ea sablonneuses, o^ la terre ne produit que dea sapins ec^ des bruyeres, la force de I'homme consiste dans son arne ; et si vous lui otez ce qui fait la vie de cette lime, les sentiments religieux, il n'aura plus que du degoiit pour sa triste patrie. Mmme. de Stael, De VAllemagne. 1. Bien que. Give a synonym. 2. On en jouissait. What does eii refer to ? 3. Mais on leg croyait. What is the antecedent of les? Give the force of un calcul. 4. Tout semhlait devoir. Turn semhlait into an imper- sonal verb, and resolve devoir into tense and mood, with tout as subject. 5. I^tre de la politique. Give the force. 6. Itendait meilleur. Turn it into a single word. 7. En affranchissant. Resolve by a conjunction, tense and mood. 8. Pour s'attacher. Make it definite. Ill- Translate : CHIMENE. Pour moi ! mon ennemi ! I'objet de ma colore ! L'auteur de mes malheurs ! I'assassin de mon p^re ! De ma juste poursuite on fait si peu de cas Qu'on me croit obliger en ne m'ecoutant pas ! Puisque vous refusez la justice k mes larmes, Sire, permittez-moi de recourir aux armes ; C'est par la seulement qu'il a su m'outrager, Et c'est aussi par 1^ que je me dois venger. A tons vos cavaliers je demande sa t6te ; Oui, qu'un d'eux me I'apporte, et je suis sa conquSte ; Qu'ils le combattent, sire ; et, le combat fini, J'^pouse le vainqueur, si Rodrigue est puni. Sous votre autorit6 souffrez qu'on le public. CoRNEiLLE, Act iv., Sccne v. 1. Pour moi! mon ennemi! Fill up the ellipsis, and connect this and following line with the preceding one. h" i"d> 2. On fait sipeu de cas. Give the force. 3. Qu'on me croit ohliger. What are this and preceding lines an answer to, and what the two on refer to ? 4. O'eat par Id. Destroy the pleonasm in this and follow- ing verse, and give the force o? par Id. 5. Si Rodrigue est puni. When does the conjunction si govern the present, and when the future tense, and when is it turned into que with the subjunctive. Give an example for each case. IV. History of French literature, from the 18th century to the present time (Chouquet's.) 1. What work is considered the masterpiece of the French stage, and by whom was it written ? 2. Name the founders of the Biographie UniverseUe, and give the character of the work. 3. What are the works which place F. Arago among the most distinguished literary men of our age ? 4. Give a biographical sketch of E. Sue, and state what sort of romance he is the creator of. 5. To whom is Franco indebted for Eistoire de Dix ans, and what is its character ? •I ,l!l Hi 1\ Translate Pai fait le et la et la votro pour ^ Oua choses Tais pas a 1 Je V it ! d'autre est un ( WLnit^tvuiti^ otmx^uo. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. FRENCH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: J i^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. i Robert Sullivan, M.A. Translate into English : JACQUELINE. Par ma fi, monsieu, ceti^ci fera justement ce qu'anfc ll I Ti- ' "^ff'^'?^ q«e ce sera queussi queumi et la meileure mddecame quo Fan pourrait bailler ^ votro fi le ce serait, selon moi, un biau et bon mari pour qui alle eiit de Tamiqute. ' gerontb. Ouais ! nourrice ma mie, vous vous mglea de bien des cboses ! LUCAS. Taisez-vous, notre minag^re Jacquelaine: ce n'est pas a vous a bouter U votre nez. « » ce n est JACQUELINE. L .1.1 .^uo ae 1 lau uiaire; que votre fiiie a besoin d autre chose que do rhibarbe et de s^n^, et qu^ln mad est un empiatre qui garit tous les maux des filled •ii i • , GERONTE. Est-elle en 6tat maintenant qu'on s'en vouliit charger avec rinfirmitS qu'elle a ? Et lorsque j'ai 6te dans le dessein de la marier, ne s'est-elle pas opposde k mes volont^s? JACQUELINE. Je le crois bian ; vous li vouliez bailler eun homme qu'alle R'aime point. Que ne preniais-vous ce monsieur Liandre, qui li touchait au cocur ? Alle aurait ete fort obcissante ; et je m'en vas gager qu'il la prendrait, li, comme alle est, si vous la li vouillais donner. MoLiERE, Le Medecin Malgre lui, Act ii., Scene ii. 1. Les autres. Add the noun. 2. Queussi queumi. Give the force. 8. Taisez-vous. Compare se taire, taire etfaire taire. 4. Ce w' est pas a vous a bouter Id voire nez. Give the force of a bouter Id voire nez, especially of Id. State what differ- ence between c'est d vous de, and e'est d vous d. 5. N'y feront rian que de I'iau claire. Give the force. What does y refer to ? 6. Que ne preniais-vous, ^c. For what does que stand here? 7. Li, comme alle est. Give the force. 8. Turn all incorrect words and expressions into good modern French. II. Translate into English : Mais, pour punir enfin nos maitres §. leur tour Dieu fit choix do Cyrus avant qu'il vit le jour, L'appela par son nom, le promit k la terre, Le fit naltre, et soudain I'arma de son tonnerre, Brisa les fiers remparts et les portes d'airain, Mit des superbes rois la depouille en sa main, De son temple ddtruit vengea sur eux I'injure : Babylone paya nos pleurs avec usure. Cyrus, par lui vainqueur, publia ses bienfaits, Regarda notre peuple avec dcs ycux de paix, Nous rendit et nos lois et nos f ^tes divines ; Et le temple d^ja sortoit de ses mines. --i ,'9 Mais, de ce roi si sage, h^ritier insens^, Son fils interrompit I'ouvrage commence, Fut sourd a nos douleurs : Dieu rejeta sa race, Le retrancha lui-meme et vous mit en sa place. Racine, EatheVy Act iii., Scene iv. 1. Nob maitrea. Name them. 1. Dieu fit choix de Cyru9. Explain the prophecy con- cerning Cyrus and name the prophet. 3. Avant qu'il vit le jour. Give the force or give a synonym. 4. Le fit nattre. Explain the peculiarity of faire when followed by an infinitive without preposition, and compare ne faire que with ne faire que de. 5. Bahylone — aveo usure. Give the force aveo usure. 6. Son file interrompit. Who is he ? 7. L'ouvrage commence. Name it. 8. Point out the two most striking inversions, and state what figure you perceive in the lines from " Dieu fit choix de Oyrui*' up to Cyrus, ^c. ''[.' "'1 ' r p; ,t ; * I * \l hpl .* HI ■l :i;i ^^H m mH' ifi- Ih ■^ <■ * a: *': 'M '. ' riiia. CInCiif Vfiiftj? of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS I 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. FRENCH. HONORS AND SCIIOLAIISIIIPS. I KOBERT Sullivan, M.A. POETRY OF THE TROUBADOURS AND TROUVERES COMPARED AND RENDERED INTO FRENCH PROSE. Translate into modern French : Aquelles mans que james perdonaren Han ja romput lo fill tenint la vida De vos, qui son do aquest mon exida Segons los fats en secret ordenaren. Tot quant yo veig: e sent dolor me torna Cant me recort de vos que tant amava. En ma dolor, si prim e bel cercava Si trobara que 'n dclit se contorna. Donchs durara, puix t6 qui la sosting. Car sens delit dolor cresch nos reting. En cor gentil amor per mort no passa, Mas en aquell qui sol lo vici tira ; La quantitat d' amor durar no mira. La qualitat d' amor bona no s'lassa. Quant r uU no veu e lo toch no pratica Mor lo voler que tot por el so guanya Qui 'n tal punt el dolor sent molt estranya Mas dura poch qui 'n passau testifica. Amor honest los^sancts amant fa colre D' aquest vos am, et mort nol me pot tolre. SiSMONDi, Langue d' Oc, page 160. 1. AqucUea mans, &c. Whose mans ? 2. Tenint. llcsolvo it into a tcnso and mood. 3. Scgons losfata. Fill up tho ellipsis. 4. Tot quant, llesolvo quant. 5. .SV trohara que 'n ddit, kc. Trcfix the antecedent to que. 0. Puix te. Fill up tho ellipsis. 7. La sostint/. What docs la refer to ? 8. Dolor creseh nos retimj. Resolve cresch and analyse nos. ' • 9. Mas en aquellqui. Fill up the ellipsis. 10. La quantitat \l amor La qualitat, &c Ev plain tho antithesis. i <■• m- 11. No mira. Prefix the subject. 12. For el. What does el refer to ? 13. Qui. Give tho antecedent. of Ma-^^''''^"'*'' ^''^' '^"'' '^'" ^^^'"'^ '"' *^'^ '-antecedent 15. En passau tcstifica. Give tho force, as well ns of sancts amantfa colre. ' ^ ^* II. Translate into modern French : Oimi amors si dure departio Me convendra fairo do la moillor Qui oncques fust amee no servie. Dex mo ramoint a lut por sa doucor fei voirement que j'cn part tl dolor. i)ex ! qu ai-ja dit, je no m'en part jo mie : be li cors va servir notre seignor, Tout li miens cuers remaint en sa baillie. SiSMONDi, Langue d' Oil, page 209. 1. 3Ie convendra faire. Prefix tho subject. Give a synonym of cmvendra ; suppress mc, and' resolve faire into a tense and mood. ^ •'^. Que fen part d dolor. Wliat Joes en refer to ? 4. Qu'ai-Ja dit J Introduce a pleonasm. from t^m"/ T ""J- 'A '•"'''' ''''''^•'^ '''^^° P''»«««'^ unaltered trom tl.o Xr ,yyw6' nl 0. into any of the modern tongues and all those winch have p,,HHed from tho Languc d^o'lZl modern French without any modifications. 7. Name all words, or expressions, which under tho same polling bear a different meaning in any of the modem languages. *' ""uutia 8. Translate into modern French: Tenmt, sajon^, ^uix, creHch, ulL-{Lancim d' Oc.) Moillor, 07icques, hit, and cucrH.—{Lanijuc d' Oil.) 9. To what class of composition do the two stanzas above belong; what inspired them ; and who arc tho authors? III. ORiaiN AND FORMATION OF TIIR ROMANCE LANGUAGES, (By Sir 0. CoiiNWAi.r, Lewis.) 1. How many conjugations has the Provencal Ian -rua^re • a,m7.^';!"'° ''™^'«'^«"-'->'« »J the gerund of each 3. How did the Provencal use its gerund? vertf^""''^''^"'"''^ '\ '^'"''''^ '^''' ^" conjunction with T). Name two words in each languairo Italian Sn^ni.T. and French, derived from the Teutonic.^ ' ' ^ '^' G. What sense did ab and a take in the Provengal ? muUitrd^e'? ''''"'^'' ^''^ '^'" ^''''""^'"^ "'' "^^^^ ^ °°"« «f 8. How did the Proven(jaI form the degrees of comparison .? #• 1 < ft- Uni\^tv»iiji of ^Tovoiftd, ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. GERMAN. ) Robert Sullivan, M-A. I. SUBJECT FOR GERMAN COMPOSITION. "Character of the Ass." Within twenty lines at least. Translate : II. ®tnc ©tiftung ncucr 2lrt unb etgcner ©attune^ tfl bfefc fpantfc|e 3nquifttton, bte tm ganjen «aufc ber 3eiten hin SSorbilt) finbct, unt> mtt fcinem geiftlic^en, fcmcm wcltHc^en, tribunal ju »erglctc^en fiel)t. Snqutftitton bat eg gcj^cben, fcitbcm bic SScrnunft ftc^ an bag iJetltgc wai^te, [ettbem eg Bwetfler imb 9^euever ^ah; aber erft urn bte mim beg bretjebnten 3abr^unbertg, nacbbem eini'gc 33etfpiele bcr 5lbtranntsfett btc ^^terarc^te aufcjefd^reft batten, baitte i\)x Snnocenttug ber 2)rttte cmen etgeuen Sh'c^terftubl, unb trenntc auf eine unnaturlic^e SBetfc bte f\eiftltcbc Stufftcbtunb Unterwetfung sjon bcr ftrofenbcn (^cmlt Urn bcfto ffcberer au fei;n, baf fern SJicnfc^engeful;! unb feme S3cftecbung bcr S^atur btc ftarrc ©trengc ibrer ©tatuten aufliJfe, etttjog er ftc ben S3tfcb6fen unb ber faculartfc|)en ©ciftltcbfctt, bte burc^ btc S3anbc beg bttrgerlid;en Sebcng noc^ ju [cbr an ber 2>?cn* [(bbett ^ing, urn ftc ^D^Cncbcn ju iibertrageit, ctner 5lbart beg nicn[(blicbcn 5«amcng, btc btc beiltgen 2;rtebc ber 9^atur abgcf^iwprctt, btenftbarcn ^reaturen beg riJmifcben ®tublg. Schiller Geschichte des Abfalls. ii ^ ' ' ^^^:'i5f - -l/M^- .'. 1 I* A\^ 1. Uine Stiftung, &o. Give to this compound sentflnra a regular construcuon 111 the ellipsis and e^Iafn the ^u of zu vergleichen Ueht nvir. u synonym to stlht. attrLt a^:^'^^ ''''^- ''"^^ *'''^^-^-' -to an 8. A71, il^^ ' iHgc. Turn it into a relative sentence. 4. Es , . .,ff4ih, vf hat sort of verb, and what case does It govern ? ^^^ 5. Die Rierarchie. M%xaQ it. 6. Baute ihr. What does ihr refer to ? 7. Unnaturm Weise. When is tho adverbial idea to be expressed by the substantive Weise and the adjective in tho form of the genitive ? Give an example. 8. Urn desto scherer zu aet/n. Give a synonym of dcsto, and state when je can bo used instead of desto. Give an example. 9. Untzog er sie. Give the antecedents of er and sic. 10. Den Bischd-fen Urn sie MiSnchen iihertragen. hi atm r-«j rule of these dative cases. 11. Du nstbaren Kreaturen, &c. With what docs it stand in opposition ? III. Translate : ^arvtcfba. ®o jfc^t t)dn SnM cin nuf tcme^ 3flc{(|c^ JBobcu! go t'mmcr fteigcnb fommt 3^r ouf W Jpi)\)m 2;c^ ©ott^arbt^, njo bt'c ew'cjm ©cm fmt>, Jtc m\ bc^ ^tmmetg ©triJmeu fdbfi ficl) fatten. SDovt ne^mt 3&r 5lbfrf;tct) »on bcv tcutfc^en grbe, Unb muntcrn 2ouf^ fai;rt ©uc^ tin anbrer ©trout 3n^ Sanb 3talie;t |)fna(), (?uc^ bag gelobte. Soiller's Wilhelm Tell 1. So zieht so imner^ %. uive the force of both these so. ■ 'il ^. Die ew' gen Seen. What arc they? a. Von dea himmels Striimen. Give the force. 4. Dort. Where. 6. Muntern Laufs Ina Land ItaUen. Explain the rules applicable to these two expressions. 6. (;e;?oJ<(;. What does it qualify ? Turn it into ft relative sentence. IV. German Literature, 7th period, (Gostick's.) 1. Which of Scl,>!!er'3 Dramas won for the poet uni- vcrsal reputation in hh native land; and which of his plays was the aiost popular ? 2. Into how many classes can the prose fictions of the Germans bo arranged ? Name them. 3. In what class do you fix Goete's Wilhelm Meister's and Wagner 8 novols ? 4. In what class is German literature particularly rich : and in what is it comparatively poor 'i 5. What writings led tc the conclusion : « There is noth- ing m the understanding ivhich has not arrived there through the senses'^ and what did Leibnitz reply to that conclusion t '^ •' .atcvtant) auf fciefcn geltern „eparta'^ f iibnc .^clteuluc^cub [an! !" — lliib 3ci()vtau[cnt)c fint> ^i^Jtaub cjcivorben, 3cuc^ a)iarmovi3 l^circjc <5aule bva4); 3)oc^ tn tvtumpl^tvcnbeu 5lccorben 9ftiffcn'ci bic 3abf()unbcvtc fid) nad^ Hub cvjal^ttcu, tvoU bem etuvmflet(5|'e 3l)vcr Beit/ ^'•'H ber .<:evocn*®iopc ®er ©cfaU'ucn iinb t^ou Spovta'^ Dcinf. — ©vop UHW @vied;cnlaiib buvd) [cine ^elben, ^^Ibcr cjvo^'cr nod; buvd; [cin ^ergelten, 2Bcnu ber ^iivvicr fiiv bie grei()eit [ant 3en[eit l')I)nt cin ©ott mtt cw'flcn 8tral;Ien, 2)od; ba5 Scbcn unU and) [cincn ©lanj. 9Iur mtt 3vb'[d)cm faun fcie (^vbe jal^lcit, llnb bci OcljiDcifl tuinbct iUi) jum ^vanj. KoiiNEii, Episeha Fragmenie, &c., page 28L 1. in c?cm blufgen Thai der ThermopyUn, &c. Give short notes of this event. ,1 *^ . 2. 0ruh in Marmor, Give the subject. S. KilJine Ileldenjugend. What number do collective substantives govern the verb in ; and what the pronouns referring to them ? 4. lahrtansende smdy &c. Paraphrase this line, and state why sind and not ist, 5. Riefen's. What docs es refer to ? 6. Sich. Is it reflective or reciprocal ? State the use of einander. 7. Und erzdhlten. Prefix the subject. 8. Hirer Zeit. What does Hirer refer to ? 9. Durch seine Ilelden. Compare durch with von. 10. Aber grosser noch. Fill up the ellipsis. 11. lenselt. Give the force. 12. Will auch. Add the verb. 13. Niir mit Ird'schem. Turn it into a relative sentence. 14 Und der Oelztveig, &c. Turn und into namely, and the remainder of the line into an attributive adjective, governed by mit. > i I 1, '^'ifTTl ' * . .'-. Transla Tl pe< ex£ cur err dec Translai ] Unif^tvm^ of STotonto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. ITALIAN. JSxaminen: ] t^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 3 Robert Sullivan, M.A. ?■ 1 M a ft I i Translate into Italian : I. Zeusi entered into a contest of art with Parrasius. nplS'T.if ^'"*'lf '"f'"' '" *'"'y ^^^^ ^^r^« came and exaotiv t . ?• -^^^ ""^^ ^^^^"^'^'^^ ^ ^'^'•tain so exactly that Zeusi coming, said: "Take away the curtain that we may see this piece." And finding his error, said; ''Parrasius, thou hast conquered ; I only deceived birds, thou an artist. ^ Translate into English : E '1 Duca disse a me ; Piii non si desta Di qua dal suon dell' angelica tromba. guando verra la nimica podesta, Oiascunrityovera la trista tomba, Ripigheril sua carnc e sua figura, Udira quel che in etoj-no rimbomba. bi trapassammo per sozza mistara Doll' ombre e della pioggia, a passi lenti, loccando un poco la vita futura : 1 erch 10 dissi : Maestro, esti tormenti Crescerann' ei dopo la gran sentenza, U hen minori, o saran si cocenti ? :,(!>;,» 1 1 1 m m \*' \ r Ed cgli a me : Ritorna a tua scienza, Cho vuol quanto la cosa e piii perfetta, Piii senta '1 bene, e cosi la doglienza. Tuttoche questa gente maledetta In vera perfezion giamraai non vada, Di la piu che di qua, essere aspetta. Noi apigirammo a tondo quella strada, Parlando p5u assai eh' i' non ridico: Venimmo al punto dove si digrada: Quivi trovammo Pluto il gran nemico. Dante, Inferno, Canto vi. 1. Pill non si desta. Give the force. 2. Di qua dalsuon, kc. Paraphrase especially aw^/e^wa tromba. 3. Nimica podesta. What is it ? 4. Quel che in eterno rimhomba. What is it ? 5. Toccando un poco. Explain. 6. Dopo la gran sentenza. Define it. 7. Fien. From what Latin verb is it derived ? What tense is it, and for what does it stand here ? 8. Si cocenti. Give the second term of comparison. 9. A tua scienza. Name it. 10. Di Id, diqud. Add the complement and give the full force of this line. 11. A tondo. Explain. 12. Pill assai cli i noji ridico. What language is thi form of comparison common to ? ^ 13. Si digrada. Give the force. 14. Pluto il gran nemico. Who is Pluto according to poets ? 15. 11 gran nemico. Of whom or what ? III. Translate into English : LXX. Come r alma gentile uscita ei vede, Rallenta qnel vigor ch' avea raccolto, E P imperij di s^ libero cede Al duol gia fatto impetuoso e stolto, Ch' al cor si stringe, o chiusa in breve sede La vita, empie di inorte i sensi e'l volto. Gitl simile all' estimo il vivo langue Al colore, al silenzio, agli atti, al sangue. Lxxr. E ben la vita sua, sdegnosa e schiva, Spezzando a forza il suo ritegno frale, La bella aniraa sciolta alfin seguiva, Che poco innanzi a lei spiegava 1' ale. Ma quivi stuol de' Franchi a caso arriva, Cui trae bisogno d' acqua o d' altro tale, E con la donna, il Cavalier ne porta In sh mal vivo, e morto in lei ch' e raorta. LXXII. Pero che '1 Duce loro ancor discosto Conosce all' arme il Principe Cristiano ; Onde v' accorre; e poi ravvisa tosto La vaga estinta, e duolsi al caso strano. E giil lasciar non vuole ai lupi esposto II bel corpo che stima ancor Pagano ; Ma sovra 1' altrui braccia ambi li pone, E ne vien di Tancredi al padiglione. LXXIII. Affatto ancor nel piano e lento moto Non si risente il Cavalier ferito ; Pur fievolmente getr.e, e quinci & noto Che '1 suo corso vital non e finite : Ma r altro corpo tacito ed immoto Dimostra ben che n' e lo spirto uscito. Cosi portati, e 1' uno e 1' altro appresso, Ma in diflferente stanza, alfine e messo. Tasso, Crerusalemme Liberata. 1. Set these four stanzas into regular construction, and then translate them into English. 2. Al duol gid fatto, ^'o. Form a relative sentence. 3. E chiusa in breve sede, ^-c. Fill up the ellipsis be- fore chiusa. 4. Empie di morte. Prefix the subject. mr 5. Gid simile aV estinto. Paraphrase this line. 6. La bella anima sclolta. Name it, and state whv seiolta '.' •' 7. Aljin Ufjniva. What figure do you perceive in aeguiva ? 8. A hi. Give the word referred to. J>. Ne jwrfa. Give the force of ne. 10. In S6> mal vivo e morto, ,j^c. Explain the meaning of this hnc. ° 11. U Altrui braccia. Give the force. IV. HISTORY OF ITALIAN LITERATURE. (Sismondi's.) 1. What heroic poems did Boccaccio leave, and what in- fluence had they over the future poetry of Italy, Spain, and Portugal ? 2. Why did he object to the terza rima of Dante ? 3. Give the character of the 15th century with respect to Italian literature. 4. Nnuio some of the men Avho flourished in the I6th cen- tury, and to whom wo owe the revival of Greek ^md Latin literature. 5. Give a short biographical sketch of Francesco Filelfo; state what he left behind, and how ho contributed especially to the progress of literature. ^m Wh ^H not? H Tra ^H came ! veri H Wh ^H tion, and 1 Wh ^H •, to 1 Tra ^^1 o'clock is H At H Wit ^H pens are ^H Translate ^H A ^H late ^H alwi ■1 goni mni\}tvuitp of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. SPANISH. Ji^xamtners. | ^^^^^^ Sullivan, M.A. ... I Hi I IF''' '1/ I ( i M I. guammatical questions. 1. When is the participle past muerto declined, and when not? 2. Translate : Th/ brother came very near falling. I came very near writiny to thee this morning. 3. What verb is employed in Spanish to express a repeti- tion, and what to express, I have just done a thing P 4. When is the participle past, constructed with the verb tener, to be declined and when not ? 5. Translate : What o'clock is it 1- One o'clock. Seven o'clock is about striking. 6. A brother of his, a friend of mine. 7. With what word does cuyo agree. Translate ' Whose pens are these P II. Translate into Spanish : A man had two sons, one of whom liked to sleep very late in the morning, and the other was industrious, and always rose very early. The latter having one day gone out very early, found a purse well filled with W money. Ho ran to his hrothcr to inform Mm «f !,■ Rood luck, and said to him : " Sco Lowk ! . ■ '"' by rising early ?" " Faith !" »n™^ ^ ''1 .;;f • .f tl,e person to whom it belong, ha,, not Zn^' than J, Jjo would not havo lost it." ^^laor III. Translate : Poro mientras I03 dos arab.ilcs, ,,or su rcdiicolon v cl buon trato ,lol vonccnor con olios, gozaban do la luayo al.undancia, la ciudad, al oontrario, so vcia roduci.lf nl mayor cstrocl>o por la lalta do todas las cosasi:; ;^ a la vida. Constrcil.dos al fin por la neccsidad s moradorcs ofrcc.oron echar a los almoravidcs do alii v cntn-arsc d Jlodngo, si dontro do cierto tiompo no ies vcnian socorr.s del Africa. Con estas condicioncs cons.p.eron treguas por dos meses, en cuyo tormino part.o el Cid A hacor algunas corrcrfas en los contornos do Pinnacatel, dondo encerr.1 todo el botin que habia cogido, y despucs pas6 a las tierras del scnor de Albarracin, y las estrag6 todas en castigo de haberselc rebelado aqucl moro. QuiNTANA, Vida del Cid., p. 12. 1. For su reduccion. What does su refer to ? ComnarG por with para. ^ 2. De la mayor, ^c. Give a synonym. 3. Se veia reducida. Turn it into a passive verb. 4. Constrenidos alfin. Fill up the ellipsis. 5. De alii. Suppress and give the equivalent. 6. En cuyo termino. Give the peculiarity of cuyo. 7. Algunas correrias When is uno or alguno to be ex- pressed, and when not ? 8._ Habersele rebelado, ^c. Analyse hahersele, and trans- late it literally. Give the three constructions of se. IV. Translate : Do5tA Irene. Con que, Senor D. Diego ^es ya la de vamonos? ..Buenos dias.. .{Apaga la luz que estd sobre la mesa.) ^Reza usted ? D. DiEQO. Sf para rczar cstoy ahora. (Paaedn. dose con inquietud.) y^asean- cndo chocolate, y quo aviscn al Mayoral par? quo onRanchcn luogo que. ;rcro qn6 tic-nc ustcl.^Scnor ? ...Jlay alguna novedad ? ' ' D DiEuo. Si no (loja do h.-.bcr novcdadcs. I)o.NA IiiEXE. Pues qu6...D.galo ustcd nor Dies Vaya,_ Vaya !...No sabc ustcd lo asustada quo (stoy Cualqu.cra cosa, a«r, repc.tina, ,no ren.uevrto. 7n'.o .•;-l^<^'«'llIi'^>»«flir •• -.■ll ll'f ii m«mii j,j I mni\itvuitn of iETotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOE B.A. METEOROLOGY. Examiner: G. T. Kingston, M.A. 1. State a remarkable exception to the law that bodies contract with a diminution of heat, and explain the beneficial consequences that result from this exception. 2. Define the terms ^^ specific Jieat" an^ ^^ latent heat ;" and determine the weight of ice at temperature 16° that must bo mixed with lib. of water at temperature 50° in order that the result may be ice at 32°, the specific heat of ice being 05 and the latent heat of liquefaction 142. 3. Explain the manner in which heat, rendered latent in the formation of vapour, tends to equalize the temperatures of localities that are diff'erently circumstanced with respect to the action of the sun. 4. Describe the barometer : name the corrections to be applied to its readings, and state in each case whether the corrections are additive or subtractive, as well as the circum- stances which determine their increase or diminution. 5. Define the terms annual variation and diurnal varia- tion. State also the nature and explain the cause of the change in the amplitude of the diurnal variations of tempera- ture in the difi"erent seasons. 6. Define the terms ^^ pressure of vapour," and ^^ relative humidity,'*' and describe the process of deducing these quan- tities from the readings of the dry and wet thermometers. 7. If the temperature of the air and the pressure of the vapour be known, shew how the depression of the dew point may be obtained. 8. Given the total pressure, as shewn by the' barometer, and the pressure of vapour, find the so called pressure of dry air. 9. Explain the utility of a series of hourly observations of temperature at a central station, in its relation to observa- tions at the same and at other stations taken less frequently than at every hour. 10. Explain also the utility of temperature observations continued for a long series of years at some one station, in their bearing upon shorter series made in other localities. 11. Describe and account for the monsoons in the Indian seas. 12. Enunciate and explain Dove's law relative to the rotation of the wind. 13. Give the meaning of the following terms : " Monthly and annual isothermal lines" ''^monthly normal temperature of a parallel of latitude" " thermic anomaly" and *' thermic normals." 14. Investigate a formula for computing the resultant direction of the wind for any space of time, when the actual directions of the wind during that time are given, as well as the number of miles travelled in each direction. ^^ 'nf^P Iff Si! mi I. M W' k t-*^ \ia GEO] Jg^; 1. Wha rocks, and 2. Desc coal perioc 3. Ment ous period. 4. To wi Oriskany, tribution of , 5. What its geologic .6. Descr minerals. 7. Descri tlieory of tl , 8. Descri it3 origin. 9. How i seem to govt }^- What ■e MouD ^nmtms ^t ^ovonto. jUiI ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. GEOLOGY AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. &ttmimr.- T. Sierry Hunt, M.A., F.R.s. miplfot" "" ^'"^"'^^^ "f ^""h ^"'''rica during the J peS'"" '°°" °^ '^'' P"""'?*' P'an's of the carbonifer- Ortka^„;r»d^Tref.on'rlt"'K ?°*^ I-'andeilo.Wenlock, "ibution of the later? '"'°"S' """^ »'"" « 'h^ dis- i/geoTogtfreCo™'?''""'"' .'^ «'-^™»'»-' »<» "hat are I iSr""' *'"' ^"""■"'"■' »«i»«; it^ chief reeks and ! ^l^:Ttit;:!z''"""' •" ^""^ «-?-»••. ^^ the , I it.tigr"'' '""^ """ of ^o^"' A-""-"- and the theory ef * '£ntS f *''' "S' "f ""^ laurentides, and of the 'P-mW^. tl , .1 ir iW \M 1. D and giv 2. G albite, other ti 3. E: state wl 4. W their ha 5. St geologic 6. H it obtaii 7. W and the; 8. Gi oxydizii Uni\}tvuitti of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATE FOR B.A. MINERALOGY. tt''i ■'■it Examiner: T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 1. Describe what is meant by uemitropism. in crystals, and give samples from monometric and triclinic forms. 2. Give tlie general clicmical formula of orthoclase and albite, and explain the relations between the latter and other triclinic feldspars. 3. Explain the production of kaolin from^feldspar, and state what becomes of the separated elements. 4. What native compounds of iron are magnetic ? Give their hardness, gravity, and color. 5. State the mineralogical characters of tinstone, and its geological relations. 6. How is gold found in nature, and fby what processes is it obtained ? 7. What are the principal vein-stones of the ores of lead and their composition ? 8. Give the theory of the blow-pipe, and the manner of oxydizing and reducing by it. 1 ¥ m Slnlliet^Ctj) of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. MINERALOGY AND GEOLOGY. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner : T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 1. What silicious minerals contain a large proportion of magnesia ? Give their hardness, density, and composition. 2. Describe the micas, and enumerate the principal species 01 the mica group. 3. Describe the occurrence, association, and probable origin of deposits of gypsum. 4. Explain the theory of metallic deposits, both in beds and in veins. 5. Describe the principal groups of mineral springs in Canada. 'I* '/'I 6. Describe the Quebec group, and its relation to the other Lower Silurian rocks. 7. Explain jointing, slaty cleavage, and foliation, with tho causes to v hich they are attributed. S. Explain the structure of synclinals and anticlinals, and their relations to hills and valleys. y. Into how manv filaasPH matr vn^„T>fo;»,g K/x j:..:j_j __4 now are volcanic cones and trappean mountains formed ? .HT ^T|-r-Tr I I , Wini\>tvuiti!! of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A, BOTANY AND HISTOLOGY. ^^arniners:l^ll^^^^^^^^ 1. The Amomal alliance— its common character— analysis of its orders, with an account erf their properties and uses. 2. Sub-kingdom DicotyledoncEC, class Gymnogengs : ex- plain the structural characters of the class, and give some account of the orders. 3. Analysis of the Urtical alliance, noticing its more important orders, mth their distinctions and properties. 4. Order Simarubacece — its position and characters— its properties. Notice of the Cedron. 5. Daphnal alliance — its position. Analysis of its orders, orders, "with an account of their properties. 6. Order Apocynaceoe — its position and properties : ex- amples of familiar and beautiful plants belonging to it. Native example. 7. What are the meaning, objects and present position of the science of Histology, with its connection with other important sciences ? 8= Give some account of the rotation of fluids within the cells of plants. 9. The different microscopical appearance of flax, cotton, wool and silk. * 10. Sclerogenou3 deposits in vegetable cells; general mode of deposit ; parts of plants in which such deposits are most remarkable ; examples of peculiar appearances. 11. Structure of bone— its microscopical appearances, and their chief varieties. 12. Pedicellarioe of Echinodermata— their peculiar appear- ance—curious error respecting their nature- their supposed use. '^^ ■ f h ' t ••fMJjF."' : IP 1. T viewini in orde 2. I differei accoun to a m( mon t} 3. S aqueou sary, a accomj 4. F its valu animals 5. G light aj 6. S pans 11 parativ Winibtvm^ of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. JExammera.'i^^'i' ^^^^- Winces, F.L.S. \ T. J. Cottle, Esq. 1. What are the principal differences in the mode of viewing the phenomena presented by the animated creation, in order to derive from them general scientific laws ? 2. Principle respecting the mode of providing for the different habits of minor groups under a common type, which accounts for the peculiar development or occasional reduction to a merely rudimentary state of parts belonging to the com- mon type. 3. State the reason why a provision for exhalation of aqueous fluid from the surface of organised beings is neces- sary, and give some account of the means by which it is accomplished in the animal kingdom. 4. Food — its varieties, and the circumstances upon which its value depends. Adaptation of the structure of different animals to the kind of food they are destined to consume. 5. Give the known particulars respecting the evolution of light and heat in the vegetable kingdom. 6. Structure of the brain in vertebrata — state the separate parts found in the brain, and the differences of their com- parative development in the different divisions. II"" ii 9 w :rJ^H M m '^^H W' -4-''^^^^^^| m W ''^^^^H T^y '^^1 If W A r^l Unii^tvuitt:^ ot ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FOURTH YEAR. POLITICAL ECONOMY. Examiner: Rev. James Bbaven, D.D. SMITH'S WEALTH OF NATIONS. 1. a. In the ordinary state of agriculture, what else, besides the wages of labour, has to be provided for out of the produce of labour ? h. " This great apparent profit, however, is frequently no more than the reasonable wages of labour." Explain and illustrate, and state the portion of the subject in which it stands. 2. a. Which of the products of land always aflfords rent? h. Give examples of products which sometimes do and sometimes do not afford rent, and shew the causes of the difference. c. State the causes of the different money value of corn at different periods ; and connect this with the variations in the value of silver. 3. State and exemplify the difference between productive and unproductive labour. Point out the connexion between capital and either of these, and its relation to industry and parsimony respectively. 4. Shew the object of restraints upon the importation of such goods as can be produced at horaej and discuss the ex- pediency of such restraints. 5. ** But the political institutions of the English colonies liave been more favourable to the improvement and cultiva- tion of this land (North America) than those of any of the other nations." Explain this passage and state what point it is intended to illustrate. 6. " The works constructed by the ancient sovereigns of Egypt, for the proper distribution of the waters of the Nile, were famous in antiquity, and the ruined remains of some of them are still the admiration of travellers." What subject is illustrated by this paragraph, and how ? . 'u^ !"«* ,;/;,: i ' '-'ft ClnCiitrsfttf of rovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS, IIO^UIIS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiner: Rev. rnoFESSoii Mubkay. o 1. a. Of what larger work was tho Novum Organon intended to form a part? ^ b. What was the end ivhich that larger work had in view i c. Explain tho relation of the Novum Orffanon to the other parts of the work. a. Into how many parts is the Novum Organon divided ? State the suhject of each part. h. In what form are both parts written ? 3. Explain (a) the method wnich IJacon considered tho great obstacle to the advancement of science, and f^>) the method which ho proposed to substitute in its place. 4. a. What does Bacon understand by idola ? h. IIow many kinds of idola does he enumerate? c. Explain each kind. 5._ State which kind of idola is referred to in each of tho lollowing quotations : a. "That our language (when we speak of a chain of causes and effects) is merely analogical, must, 1 think, be admitted by every person who has taken the trouble to reflect on the subject; and yet it is certain that it has misled the greater part of philosophers.'' {B. Stewart) h. Tn our reason there exist fundamental rules of Its exercise which have completely the ap. pearanco of objective principles. Now from his cause it happens, that the subjective neces" sitjr of a certain connection of our conceptions IS regarded as an objective necessity of Z determination of things in themselves." (^an/.) c. " Musicians think our souls are harmonies, riiysicians ho d that tlioy complexions be; Ep^ures make them swarms of atomies, ' Which do by chance into our bodies flee." {Sir J. DavieB.) 7. Point out the conclusiveness of ' « • b. Explwn Hamilton's division of tho dualities of natter, pomt ng out its peculiarity an'd il "cla- pccptio';^ ""'""'°" '"='-^" --'- -1 says^eid*'""""^ " "" '"""^*'''"' ■'""'''"'S" of tl,e past," *■ m feili-"" ''"'!:'"*'' "f ""» "™»<"" of memory on lieid s own theory of im.ue.Iiate peroeptlo^ lU. fetato Hamilton's distribuh'nn /.p +i with regard to rerccDtion ^vnl • '■''' ^'^''^ou^ tl'cories he desi,ites ^^ ^:^ X:^^ ^ZS^^ ^ ; 'i m,f -'S M ■'*: "■v . ■f3'i iSinif^tvmp of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. CANDIDATES FOR B.A. METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. HONORS. Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D. TENNEMANN AND MORELL. 1. Give from Tennemann and Morell several definitions of philosophy, and show to which of them Aristotle most nearly approximated. To which does Morell incline ? 2. What place did philosophy hold in the system of thought of the Christian Fathers ? 3. Connect Leibnitz with previous philosophy, showing how it contributed to form his mind. Show his divergencies from it. Point out his leading principles, and connect his line of thought with subsequent German philosophy. _ 4. Point out and exemplify the differences between theolo- gical and philosophical scepticism. 6. Why cannot phrenology serve as the basis of a system of psychology ? Who has attempted to make it do so ? What has it really done ? 6. Sketch from Tennemann and Morell the principles of Fichte's theory of the foundation of human knowledge. 7. Give Maret's place in philosophy. Explain the nature and objects of his great work, and exhibit its defects. JOUFFROY AND STEWART. «„li 71"^* iorties of oxygen r^el^^Zi!^^'"^^ "^"^-'^^ "J '-^ general 7. Describe the preparation and properties of chlorine. 8. Mention the sources and properties of carbonic acid. alkatfethran^d'^r^tr;';"'."'^""'''^' °^'"^ »"'^"-. 10. Mention the principal oxides of iron, rrivin^ f„r„„.u. II til'* **' ^ ] and c tube give and ad stror IC copp 11 are i Bulpl i .: and nnihtvnits of Kovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. FIEST YEAR. CHEMISTRY. FOR HONORS. I H. Y. IIiND, M.A. m W 1. Reduce 112° Fahrenheit to Centigrade and Reaumur, and 60° Cent, to Reaumur and Fahrenheit. 2. What is the cause of the ascent of liquids in narrow tubes ? 3. What is meant by the latent heat of steam ? 4. What circumstances are essential to combustion ? 5. Explain the formation of hydrogen. 6. Describe the preparation of common phosphoric acid * give its formula and those of its soda salts. 7. Mention the sources and modes of proparaticn of lif^ht and heavy carburettcd hydrogen. 8. Describe the preparation of the carbonates of potassa ad soda. 9. From what mi-orals are the salts of barium and strontium obtained, and how ? 10. Give the formulas of the o.vi'l' copper, lead, tin, and mercury. 11. From what substance is arson i..!^ acid obtained ; what are its principal properties, and why is it often found in sulphuric acid ? 12. What other elements are usually ranked with arsenic, and why ? manganese, iron, p^" 1. theh undei 2. follov pulm( 3. adult. 4. gang! 5. portrc 6. ] state 1 ii» 'illiliU' ■ nnmvmp of ^ovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND TEAR. PHYSIOLOGY. Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D. 1. How IS the blood exposed to the action of the air in the lungs ; and how many cubic inches of air are exchansred under ordinary circumstances, at oii jl respiration ? * 2. What nerves penetrate tlie pulaionary substance following the ramifications of the bronchu.s, and of the pulmonary artery ? 3. Describe the structure and function of the hea-t n. the adult. 4. Name the most remarkable nerves proceeding from the ganglia of the thoracic portion cf the sympathetic. 5. What are the peculiarities of the blood of the vena portfc ? 6. Describe the glands of the duodenum and ileum, and state what is known of the functions of the latter. 11 ; ■'I i •■ m p":k " ,v. mBt^R. ¥ 1. ■ .. ., \ri ;*' >* ,f li p, h^^" ^ -^A •i IS r acti dire pow she\ hyd: and occi 1( diffe 1] outa V. Give mnibtvuitp of Toronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. '> SECOND YEAR. CHEMISTRY. FOR HONORS. Uxammera: \ H^nry Croft, D.C.L. I H. Y. Hind, M.A. , ,iM| !!■ ' ^' • "'^^i.^r"'^,'^®.*^® phenomena observed when sutta percha IS rubbed with flannel. ^ pt^icua 2. Describe an electrical machine and its mode of action. 3. Describe the condensing electroscope and its mode of action. 4. Describe Grove's galvanic battery. What is the direction of the current ? 5. Give Ampere's theory of magnets, and show lio^Y a powerful magnet may be made. 6. Give the present definition of organic chemistry, and shew why older definitions are erroneouS. 7. Give the sources, preparation and properties of hydrocyanic acid. ^ ^ 8. Give the sources and formulas of methylic, cthylic, and amyhc alcohols. "^ ^ ' 9. In what organic bodies do sulphur and cyanogen occur? ^ ^^''i"ot.u 10. Give some of the fatty acid series, and show how they differ from each other. •' 11. What are the amides and nitriles : how arp th^^ obtaineU f , — _ — y 12. What are the compound ammonias ; how obtained? Vjive instances. .-.i i'i;"a!!iii!aiiiiii»Bgte5iR- 1. 2. 3. Leyd( 4. 5. organ 6. 7. orgar 8, and c 9, 10 may 11 12 impo Uni\}tvf$it^ of roronto* ANNUAL EXAMINAT NS: 1864. 8ECOND xEAr chi:mistry. I 1 "ml Examiners: { Henry Croft, D.C.L. i 11. Y. Hind, M.A. 1. '}' are the general properties of magnets? 2. What is meant by the term electrical excitation? • 3. Describe some of the effects of a discharge from a Ley den jar. 4. Describe Volta's pile. 5. What elements enter into the composition of natural organic bodies ? • 6. Explain the general principle of organic analysis. 7. Give some instances of the artificial formation of organic bodies. 8. How is cyanogen obtained ; what are its properties and composition ? 9. What are the products of the fermentation of sugar? 10. Into what classes are the sugars divided, and how may grape sugar be formed ? 11. What is the nature of gun cotton ? 12. What are the vegetable alkaloids ? Mention the most important. w IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) h // {/ /- «p^ f/. 7/ ^^ 10 I.I i^ 1^ 111112 2 1^ lis IIIIIM L25 i 1.4 1.8 1.6 m v^ ^> >> '^^^». >> C/;.^ /^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, MY. 14580 (716) 872-4$03 4^ ,\ iV :\ \ ^ ''»'' "ould you 8. What are the symptoms and signs of acute bronchitis ? treat if?"" "' "" '^"P"""'"' «J»'i«is, and how would you with alr^u't. "■' '""'"'"" ""' ^"-6-».s associated ; 'I, ,^4 i ( ( . ' ''1 il I 4' ff; 1. sick ; 2. hydrc 3. : 4. { of a ] wound 5. ^ necesss with tl luxatioi 6. A bright r 7. Gi the knee THIJRD YEAR. ill '1 , i ' SUKGERr. 2. State th. *^ """^""^ '»-<'<«>" hydrocele of tJ:t„S'-t„.t«"°'" '""' '-'-nt of '• "'"^""'^ •""■ "•^»' » acute ab,oe„. of a T.Z r;r^^"'5"'-.'""J '-atme„t of f^oture "ound of the lung '^ ' "Sam when compoundeHth "*;.»' ^^iNi ;^;.i , ..>:•!' i w M ' ijitjy Ei 1. Wha 2. Wha 3. Wha 4. In fu what is th( 5. Whai >Yhat is th( anluetttltj? of mvonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. m I' Hi. THIED YEAR. OBSTETRICS, &c. Ilzaminer: C. J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S, Enq. 1. What are the symptoms and proofs of pregnancy ? 2. What is labour ? 3. What presentations occur ? whtt ?MleteCmf °"' "'"" ■"■" ""' -=""-'--«-. and , N. B — These questions ore also for Honors. 1. Wl 2. W] founded 3. De 4. De 6. m 6. Wl Wini\itv»itsf ot Zatonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR. ■:;-.j| MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE; Exammer: C. J. Phubriok, F.R.C.S., Eso. :■'■' 1,*;; f"'^' I! i| 1. What is strangulation ? 2 What appearances attend it ? and what may be con- founded with it ? ^ 3. Determine that a woman has been delivered of a child. 4. Determine the time of the delivery. 5. What are the symptoms of poisoning by strychnia ? 6. What are the tests for strychnia ? N. B — Also for Honors. I'**' m) ti tl t\ tr tfa di ex be ex ep hei pe ap< the ^ni\$tvmi^ of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR. COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. Examiner: M. Barrett, M.A., M.D. 1. Note the differences existing between fishes ^nrl *.«« 2. Describo the testes or spermatic organs of birds a, f„ the.r pos,t,on, structure, and perio.Iical df velopLnt ' e.itte^S''rf''.h."'' ""' P"-^^'"'"*!"^'! "lation of ,he co- 5. What substance replaces uric acid in the urin» „f herWrous an.mals, and what are its most "ema^kawTpr:.' 6. Compare the human skull with that of the anthro„„i^ apes, in reference to the position of th, f^L„ anthropoid the angles whinh the eondX i *''^..f'"^?°'«'> magnum. *'lll ,'^.itW fi',... 1 ^M :■ 4 dete( 5 6 7 amm 8 grou] 9 10 ' '■■ Mi ■.;„|l| ii IP ii i; '.-ili 'imM mmm , ij hj. ^ r||l ii<;; w iiir.::. m km Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D. \: ■■■ .:i ^ 1. Give the general and local treatment for acute inflammation of a part, and the reason for each step in said treatment. 2. Diagnose and treat a case of acute periostitis. 3. State the treatment, (hygienic, and other,) of scrof- ulous synovitis. 4. State with particularity the treatment for oblique fracture of the shaft of the femur. 5. Under what circumstances would fracture of the skull require the employment of the trephine ? 6. State the several steps to be taken in one of the larger amputations. 7. In malignant diseases what conditions would warrant and what forbid an operation with the knife ? 8. Name the usual causes, symptoms and treatment for retention of urine. ^ 9. What is the treatment for a bite inflicted by a rabid animal ? 10. What are the several varieties as to the condition of the tumor, &c., of inguinal hernia, and the treatment for each? i:;.i ill :i !«!'■' •il! ■■ ifl tfi^i- m for 3 lab( 4 Iab( just and 5 torn *6 of tl *7, quel Unmvmn of Toronto. fi iiiiiiitiiiii. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. lli|li''^^^W 'i,i];'!',i"!'!iH;'i CANDIDATES FOR M.B. OBSTETRICS, &c. Examiner: C.J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S., Enq. for^it T^^^ '' menstruation ? and what may be mistaken 2. On what do irregularities in menstruation depend? lab^o'urT''* ""'" '^' '^''^"^' P'°"^' *^'^ ^ ^^"^^'^ '^ i" 4. You are called to attend a woman who has been in abour more than twenty-four hours, and the child can only just be reached by the finger : what conditions may exisL and what is the treatment ? ^ * f J; .^ T^^^' '?^^^"^ v'" "'"^^ ^^^'bits certain symp- toms ; what symptoms indicate that she is again pregnant ? ofliie^'prall!'^ ^^ -^ ^-ctions *7. Describe the diseases of the placenta, and the conse- quences to the mother and the conception. * Honor Questions. ■I- 1' J ■iiiK liiiii: iiii II ■' ! -uwm mm F s ( a mm, Winli^tvuits of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. DEGREE OP M.B. THERAPEUTICS AND PHARMACOLOGY. [I 1 '" 1^. ''HI . !'''■■■ ■iffi Examiner: Uzziel Ogden, M.D. 1. What are the therapeutical properties of gallic acid, and what is its dose ? 2. How is the ferri ammonio citras prepared, and what is its dose ? 3. Where is diosma crenata obtained, and what are its therapeutical properties ? 4. What are the therapeutical properties of potassae bitar- tras, and in what doses would you give it ? 5. How is syrupus ferri iodidi prepared, what are its therapeutical properties, uses and dose ? 6. What are the doses of the hypophosphites of lime, soda, potash, ammonia, and quinine ? In what respects do they differ in their effects on the system, and what care should be observed in their administration ? 7. Vinegar was given in the treatment of some of the sequelrs of scarlatina during a recent epidemic in Hamilton. Can you tell me its supposed modus medendi ? 8. Name the most valuable antispasmodics, their doses and modus operandi. 9. For what disease is sulphur a specific ? »::::i|lif' ■<" i/: ■!:■ 1, reas 2, groi 3 insti 4, doul 5, org£ 6, and allt 7, 8, acid 9, refe 10 alkn 11 obta 12 vesi 'I It I '''lli mnmvms of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. FOURTH YEAR. CHEMISTRY, I H. Y. Hind, M.A. ;,l:' 1. Arrange the non-metallic elements in groups, giving reasons. o &. 2. What metallic elements arc ranked with one of these groups, and why ? 3. Give the definition of monodi and tribasic acids, give instances and refer to types. 4. Give the formulas of the magncsian sulphates, the double magnesian sulphates and the alums. 6. Define organic chemistry, and give the types to which organic compounds may be referred. 6. Give the general formulas of the alcohols, aldehydes, and fatty acids, showing how the latter arc derived; refer all to types. 7. Account for the formation of so-called sulphuric ether. 8. Give the mode of preparation of cyanogen — urea— uric acid — morphine — formic acid — glycerine. 9. To what class of bodies may the fats and oils be referred, how are they acted on by potassa ? 10. Give the general process for the extraction of the alkaloids, and give tiieir characters. 11. What are the ammonium bases, how may they be obtained V Give their characters. 12. Give the chemical compositon of the more common vesical calculi. m lij'ii ■11 mi an lin ma sol mi 1< an< •■'■ ■^:l: ■ I ^ni\^tvmi} ot Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. FOURTH YEAR. PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY. (II. Y. Hind, M.A. a ; „.■: 1. What impurities may occur in sulphuric acid, and how may they be detected ? 2. What are the usual impurities in carbonate of soda, and how detected ? _ 3. Give the distinguishing tests for baryta, strontia, and lime. 4. What metals in solution give yellow sulphides ; how may they be distinguished ? 5. What metals are precipitated black from alkaline solutions only, and how are they distinguished ? 6. Mention all the liquid tests for arsenious acid. 7. How may strychnine be separated from an organic mixture and detected ? 8. Give the tests for morphine and opium. 9. Give the tests for blood and bile. 10. Give the tests for iodine, sulphur, phosphoric, boracic and oxalic acids. is 1. deatl 2. deatl: 3. what 4. *5. vapoi ♦6. sulph Unibtvnits ot ttovonu. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR M.B. MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE. '-: h Examiner: C. J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S., Enq. I.; II death?^^*^'°"'°^ ^^""^ "" ^^""""^ ^^^ ^®®" produced before defth?^''^'""'"^ '^^' "" ^''"''' ^^' ^''" produced before 3. What are the symptoms of poisoning by urea ? and what post mortem conditions confirm the point ? 4. What are the tests of morphia? vIpouTsY' '^"""^"^ ''''"'^ ^""^ to suspect poisoning by noxious Jlny,^-''"^' *^^ characteristics of poisoning by oxalic acid, sulphuric acid, corrosive sublimate, arsenic, sugar of lead ^ * Honor Questione. ADS' Ei 1. lectur 2. : laws? 3. : 4. : source 6./ tradis Utmtvnitp ''f JTotottto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. SECOND YEAR. AUSTIN'S PROVINCE OF JURISPRUDENCE. Hxaminera-X^^^^ Orooks, Q. C, LL.D. Jt^zamtners. | Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. i , 1 = :.. II 1. Give a brief abstract of the outlines of Mr. Austin's lectures. 2. How does he distinguish between the different kind of laws ? 3. Distinguish between command^ duty^ and sanction. 4. Explain what is meant by the theory of utility as the source of certain laws. 6. What are the diflferent kinds of laws improper, in con- tradistinction to laws properly so called. (Ill, /.«iJi U: X 1. Me theory o 2. Me of moral 3. Wh minate ai 4. Dis 5. Dis morality ' tAt\t\}tvm» ot ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAR AUSTIN^S JURISPRUDENCE. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. t JiDWARD FlTZaERALD, M.A., LL.B. thL^lf'.'^-r" "^ '^'' '^''''''''' '^ ^'' Austin to the theory of utzhti/ as a source of law ? 2. Mention some of the arguments in favour of the theory of moral sense. i-ueory 3. What is the distinction between laws set by a deter^ mmate and an indeterminate body of persons ? 4. Distinguish between the different forms of government ? liil! ,i ill! ni'i'i i! Mi iiiijiiii; mm Mm I"; I';:" I . N' „ li, i' iiiiir-i:!!'- mnl\}tvuitp of STotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATION : 18G4. SECOND YEAR. BOWYER'S CIVIL LAW. \ Edward FiizaERALD, M.A., LL.B. litl 1 1 llilliiiiii II iii!R!i!i|;!ili,iii(j!: ^ 1. Give a brief sketch of the rise and progress of Roman jurisprudence. 2. Give a general view of the Institutes. 3. What are the different branches of the law of things ? 4. Distinguish between a legacy and a j^c?^' commissum. 5. What is aa obligation in solidum ? HH:, '■m ?i|f!: WinittKMs^ ot ^0 to It to. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864, SECOND YEAR '' ii j."i, lu; l!l,;,l|i: '! im i'li; BOWYER^S CIVIL LAW. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: \ ^^^^ ^^^^o^s, Q.C., LL.D. i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 1. Distinguish between mutuunif commodatum, depositum. and pignus. 2. What are the diflferent obligations quasi ex contractu ? 3. What different kinds of contracts are involved in the consideration de societate ? 4. Classify "actions," and explain the nature of each. 6. What are interdicta and their divisions ? !|);p, ,1; lijij lii J. i^m iiffil!' 111 iiiiHiiiji HAL Exa 1. Wh during th 2. Whj Commons 3. Whc the First ; 4. Wha ^ 5. Give his reign. ^nmtvnlii) of Eovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAR. HALLAM'S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY JEJzammers:i:t^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D. { Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 1. What were the different changes in the EnfflishThiir^l, dunng the reigns of Henry VIII.^Edward Vl^lnS Ma/; 9 the%.^^airh^^:sLf '^^ ''''^- ^^^-- <^^-^- 4. What led to the restoration of Charles 11. ? hi/;eigi™ ""' '^"^ «»^'itational measures passed during lii! Ill', i :!hi:: !ii:i u : II 111::; !i: isjr lii: il'^: liiiiiV: ■ 'y'' I! ¥%^^ :i'iv: r»t: I 1. reign 2. durin 3. 4. of Qu, 5. ^ ofEni ^niittmts Of 8rov- law „„ ?],;, subject? "^ ''*'« of interest? proviaions of the|E„g?Lh act "="™'^ ' «''« ^ome*^:? thf notice of protest ? ' ^^^*' ^^^ the essentials of the .*•' ■ -M hi- ^^^M V. 1 m 1 SM E 1. A relieve ' 2. W fraud ? 3. ^ court en any cas( 4. w: the bill 5. Wl must be mnmvuitsf of STotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. SMITHES MANUAL OF EUUITY JURIS- PEUDENCE. Uzaminers.-f^^^'^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. (JiiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. llm reHevf f'"'* ""^^^ '"'^^ '^ '^'''^^'' ^"'^ ^ ^^"^* ^f Equity 3 What is meant by "specific performance?" Will the '* 1 doei 2 in a and 3. som( 4. put i of he 5. liabil fullj '1' I : ■: \'. Winmvms^ of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. SECOND YEAR. SMITH'S MANML W MUITY JURIS- HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. JSxaminers.'f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. aoi Sldong r' "^' ''^"*^'^° '''''' ' To which class 2. la ■ pTridence admissible on boli-iir nf n,M »n a suit ,ific performance of a wlitl IT ^"''^ and if so, . iiat case or cases ? agreement, 3. What is an injunction ^ TTnw I'a ,v i.^. • , « some of the cases i„^ „,,ieh tins 1^^;; i' ^p'^lTclb!; '""" putXnleVt^^^^^^^^^^ '-3 ^wi.„„ of her husband ? "'''''*^ ^^ ^^^^ ^J the will I "m ar CO m wl Wini\}tvnits of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAE. WILLIAMS ON REAL PROPERTY. T7 . f Adam Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. ^^«^^"^^^-\ Edward Fitzgerald, M. A., LL.B. 11^ " r: III::. 1. What is an estate tail, an estate for life, and in fee, and state the rule in Shelly's case ? 2. Define co-partners, joint tenants, and tenants in common. 3. What advantage in conveyancing was obtained by means of the lease and release under the Statute of Frauds ? 4. What is dower, and how is it conveyed when the widow has married a second time ? 5. Define vendor's lien and state some of the cases in which this lien will be held to be waived or destroyed ? I:H :i m ^nibnmp ot Eovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. SECOND YEAR. WILLIAMS OJf REAL PllOPERTF. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. i hDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 3. Define corporeal and incorporeal heredlfflmpnfo ^ what were the usual words of conveyance annltZp?' \°v Is there any word now that will convey bofh? '' '''^ ' 4. What is the office of the hahernJnm ir. „ ^ l!|!llllil:!l!l t'^ :';, ■■!:" '■ ,; I' : t;: f V II ' i !! Wini\}ttms! of zovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIKD YEAR. ARCHBOLD^S LANDLORD AND TENANT. Examiners :f^^^^ ^^^oks, Q. C, LL.D. \ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 1. What leases require to be in writing, and what under seal ? Give the authorities. What authority does an agent require to enable him to execute a valid lease ? 2. What may be distrained for rent, and is the common law affected by any, and what statute or statutes on this head, and how P 3. What are emblements, and who are entitled to them ? 4. What notice to quit is necessary in the case of tenancy trom year to year, quarter to quarter, month to month, and week to week ? ' . 5. How may leases be validly assigned ? Is a condition m a lease against assignment legal ? ill' ii!i ft i lis !ii! • lift i ' i SI an (.1(3 wli th( the ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR ARCHBOLD'S LANDLORD AND TENANT. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners ; f ^^^" Ckooks, Q. C, LL n I Edwahd FmoEKAiD, M.A.;ll.B. sio;-crn^:!;:v;;™;":;:;i,;v'.!?i.5;''' «?'- °f "«' ^-c- they arc rem„vable hy the tenant ? "^ "" '''''^"'«'' tho'samef '"^ """"" "s'"^' »" »'-'« ""o law respecting 1' 13 nnrnvuitii oe ©orontu. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1861 THIRD YEAR. BURTON'S COMPENDIUM OF REAL PJtOPERTY. Exam inerpr ' ^:;'^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. J ±.L-.'ARD FlTZGEKAU), M.A., LL.B. law,- a^'b/Itt f "™' ™"" "' ■""'-«- "' "--n 52. What is the efiect of ]imitin'-» ii * ■i^v El, U'. 1. & 2 D deed oi .3. Vi distinct 4. H sion ? a 5. W are the ; ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. THIRD YEAR. BURTON\S COMPENDIUM. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: \ ^^^^ Crooks, Q.C, LL.D. ( Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 1. Scintilla juris, defdortfat' '''""■' '""™' ""'' ™« ^«-». and in '^|i.'T li i m m "If--*: IH ''*. ii'WM ■;:i!iil ::|;:ilM 1. 2. functi 3. and tl 4. politic 5. 1 partnii Illlv'lili wnmtvms of arotonto. ANNCAI, EXAMINATIONS: 186il. THIRD YEAR. COI'S BRITISH COMMONWEALTH. hammers iX^"^^'^ Crooks, Q. C, LLD J JlDWAKD FlIZaERAtD, M.A., LL.B. 1. What arc the objects and duties of a government ' JliZ'';LZf" "°"™™'' '■" '■"»•"■ °f 'I-o existence of pariSin Gitl Sin" ? '""'""^' """^ ''^-"-trative de- H li:"l ill' ;_ !!:'■ "' flu tio i. dui iS^mntrms of sroronto* ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIED YEAR. COX^S BRITISH COMMONWEALTH. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Uxaminers: \ ^^^^ Crooks, Q.C., LL.D. I Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. H-nn'f^'I? *^^ arguments in favour of a property qualifica- tion for the exercise of parliamentary suffrage. ^ 3. Compare the advantages of open and secret voting. 4. Wiiat is an action at law ? and state briefly its proce- dure and different stages. "^ ^ 5. Distinguish between the different kinds of colonies. 1; ■'■'■- ii;i' '''! !il!^. r "»» I IN 1. \} lite on 2. ^ describe in equit 3. W What is bill does 4. He ence in \ 5. Ho tow long aa infant ^nmmts Of rotoHto. JUfNUAl EXAMINATIOKS. 1864. THIRD TEAR. MITFORD ON TLEADIKG, &C. Examiners : J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL D iiiDWARD FlTZGEKALD, M.A./lL.B. an infant ia a defendant ? ' "" P™""""^ '''"e IH" i:- I llf lb.' .'■Mf. m--:M 111.' /i '.',; ^nmmt!^ of mvonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. THIRD YEAR. MITFORD ON PLEADING. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners: I ^^^^ Crooks, Q. Q., LL.D I J1.DWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'lL.B., 1. Within what time was a mortgagor entiflM f. a sn\t rptt\"''''-''' ^.^lo^^rj; STr 3. Does a defendant ever reauim o »,«^f c - ^ in what case or cases ? ^ "^'''^ ^"^"^' '-^n^ if so, 4. What was the old methnr? nf o«<.*.- purchase for valuable coSl^^^^^ ^^^^nce of were the proper aHegation ? To "b to?f '"' 5"^ ^^=^' such a defence allowed ? ^"^ ^"^^^^® ^<>^'er, is 5. What does a replication put in issup o. i .x generally when a plaintiff ought to fi ^ rS ' *• ^ ^***® amend his bill? ^ ^'^^ replication, or to til ife:'- jiVii^' .• 'If ! I' "ill?! ^nih.mt^ otzovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 186i. THIRD YEAR. SMITH ON CONTRACTS. Uxammers.'f^^^^ Cj^ooks, Q. C., LL.D. (Edward Fiizqekald, M.A., LL.B. to be in writing ? author,t,y of tlie agent require boL^S;v'Ui?;:u;re."^"'™ *" »"■■- -""-to of t.::bi\:tSi„Tbr ;:, j;;::/!/^ '^ "^'°? * .K voluntary grantee ? IVli/? '"'™'"='''' '':>' ™ assignee of breth'' Jeor:otf aXS if :^L:?^ T' ['■ T^ '" " between mch . medie>? "" ''" "'"'f d'Aerence :!::':i I" 8im^er«ctj? Of coronto^ i;i'' . '.ii ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. TIIIRD YEAR. SMITH ON CONTEACTS. HONORS AND SCUOLARSHIPS. Examiners: {^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D., 1 Edward Flizqerald, M.A., LL.B. .]• ^'f ^ }^ ?^® ^^w in reference to contracts in restraint of trade? Point out the different cases. "^restraint isL'^i^d^^onr'''^"'^'"' '''' "^ ''''-'^''^' What 3. What is ratification, and the effect of it? Can the h^rfdo if? ^ ' ' "* °' ''' ''''^-'' "^^^"^'^ W^- -n a.t )!!' r Tr'' ^J^^"^.' '^ ^^^'t'-^tion, and state the law as to the limitation of actions in cases of simple contract' Li^itatolr' '^' ''''P'"'^ ^" ^'^ ^"Slish Statute of ii''^'i 1. : one c( 2. : person 3. ( 4. I to coni 6. ^ 2^nf^irrfi(ft» of rorimto* -ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 1864. THIRD YEAR. WESTLAKE'S CONFLICT OF LAWS. Examiners :\:^^^'^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D. J Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. one'co^nl^'L'''" "" ^''f^^' ^" bankruptcy obtained in one country be recognised by the courts of another ? pefson^? ''^""^ "^'^'"'^ "^"'^ ^''^'''^' ""^^'^ t^e ^«i^«^% of a 3. Give a definition of domicile. to ton^ralts^r' *^' ^'"^ ^''' "^^^''«^^^« ^P^^ate with respect 5. What is the operation of the lex situs on property ? f ' ill i!!; ! I;' ii m I .1 ' ■ re re do to » wh per ^nmvms of Zovonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1834. THIRD YEAR. WESTLAKE'S CONFLICT OP LAWS. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. Examiners : J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C , LL D ( i^BWAUD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'lL.B. do!; ircxt::,f ° ^"^"' -'^ -^ ^^ »"»s'--. -^ how fa. 5. When testamentary instruments lat validity Iiave personal property 't what validity have they in i^^.Inl^tneirer re^n^' III Ijiiiiir ''I'ii:-' ill ^ni\innm of ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS; 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. i^LACKSTONE, VOL. IV. Examiners:! :^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL D i JiDWARD TlTZGERALD, M. A., LL.B. ii m 2. D^tinguish botwoen principals and accessories. 3. W at a,e the different offences against public justice ^ 4. What are the different kinds of homicide » 5. What must exist to constitute the crime of larceny ? 1:1 !!ii.lii ^nmvms^ of STotonto. ANNUAL EXA MINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. BlACKSTOJfE, VOL. lY. HONORS. Examiners: f ^^^^ Ciooks, Q. C., LL D I iiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. of '^rSZ) '■■"' *"'* °' ""> "- '""' P^»S-- «f the laws by j,v '"" "" ""' ''"'"™' '"•"'^^ «f ^'-''-g", i„ the tri„l 3- Mention the offences against public trade ? 4. What are the ^iffovent kin,:, of misprisons ? 5- Distinguish betwe>,,. t, ,>„,,op. ^„<, 3,jiti„„ , iiii'i if '•"'ill mnmmtif of jroronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. GIBBON^S ROME, &c. JSxaminers:!^^^^ Crooks, Q.C, LL.D. i J^DWARD Fitzgerald, M. A., LL.B. conyisthe^R^tVLtT" ''''''' ""^^^' ^^^^^ ^^^^^on JutlJall '"" '''' "^^"'' '' *^« reformation effected by 3. Into what different books are the Listitutes divided ' J J. What was the status of the wife under the Roman 5. Explain the Terentillian law : i' ■! i rVl, ! li !l/ jk' mi m ill # ♦ 11 r( ^nibtvuits of t ^nto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. GIBBON ^ ARNOLD. HONOKS. i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 2. What was the contract of locatio ? 3. What are the principal points noticed by Gibbon in respect to rights of property ? " 4. Explain the Valerian and Canuleian laws ? 5. What was the Licinian law ? ig I. ^4JSr ' ^r':^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) 4is 1.0 1.1 1.25 UimA ■ 50 "^ ^ 1^ 1.4 2.5 2.2 1.6 V] /A '/ Photographic Sciences Corporation ^2%. "%'• 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. HS80 (716) 873-4503 t/. ai th in eit in wh ^nmvm» of Eotonto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. JAEMAN ON WILLS. I!xaminer8:i^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. I Edwakd FiTzaERALD, M.A., LL.B. 5. What interest in personalty is conferred by words which create an estate tail in realty? Why? !i'» ^nmmtp ot ^Toronto. ANNUAL EXa"^TIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOE LL.B. JAKMAJV OJV WILLS. HONORS. o^U^rSr^e :-•"/»' -^» » Win .Vs., "• ''»nat revokes a will? Qf«. , revocation. '''^^ ' State the different cases of 4. What is the effect nf n ^- . m m iiiii I III I I'.rhl HiSiv ^niiitvms Of aroronto. AmVAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. JUSTINIAN'S INSflTUTES. Examiners : ^ ■^^^'^ Crooks, Q. n LL D tEDWAKDFix.aEnALD;M!l!:-li,.B. 1- Quibus constitutionibnq nf ;n ^ caveanttutoresvelcuratores pi^or^bi;? ^T'^'*"^' «* "^^^ -Z^^^. 3, Tit. 24, s. 3. 'P'^"^^''^"«captiscoerceantur.— («) Translate. W What oonsti.„ti„„3 are here referred to? (0^ What were the relative powers ,^,1 ^ .• . ian and ward in the RomTn Law . "' "^ «""' woaidlrlX ^ ""'''"■" "y^ i» which the «»/™,, 3. How were servitudes extinguished 1 4. What was the heres neomariw ? =i»i ^nmtmp Of ^Torouio. ANNUAL EXACTIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. JUSTINIAFS INSTITUTES. HONORS. W" !-ii- Examiners :i^^^^ Crooks, Q. n LT r> 1- Eodem numero sunf inro ^^ ™sticor„„, ,„, e.ia„ scrWtm .^^trVh'^"""' *' 3.-Ment.o„ the different kind, ofse [t',:; ^i, ^' '"• ^' «• referred to ? servitudes tliat are liere 2. Explain totamentum, ealata comitia an^ . ■ 3- Distinguish, between re, pnUia-. '"•°«»«'««? »«««., m eacr^, re, religZI? ' "" """'«'*'«", re, 4 VVhat were the different modes of „„„ • ■ m the Roman law? ""Ocs ot acquiring property 6. Give the formula bv which , «j • self? ' ^"""» » fideiu,,or bound him- ^nmvmt» of (Toronto, ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. MACKELDEY'S CIVIL LAW. HONORS. Uxammers'.f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., L.LD. (H-DWARD FlTZGEAilLD, M.A., LL.B. 1. By what different modes are rights terminated ? eJ^^H:^"" ''''''''' ''' -^^'^ -^^'^-^--^ and the 3. Explain « juridicial possession " ? 4. What is <^aece8sior and give its different classes ? 5. Give a brief analysis of Mackeldey's treatise? ^ni\)tvms Of Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1861 CANDIDATES FOR LL.b". STODEN ON VENDORS AND PURCHASEBS. 7 ; the „,™o. «»bs^o,ueXTrt1ollt ^^r/^ JuIrtJZfr^'' ""^^ «°"^»y»» - ".-cod, „h.t se ? ^*" ^nore be recovered in any of case? ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1884. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. SPGDENONVEND^D PURCHASERS. HONORS. ■Examiners:! :^^^^ Crooks, Q. n LL D >s the principle ? '"'"'"'= °f Fi-ands, and what nant. of the vendor' in the^Ze/at e^xtncT^' "^ ""^»- 3- What is a„ abstract of title, and ought iuo shew? 4.a;t'otutlStr"tan"th' '' ^"^"^^"'' ^''apter the grantor defeat a voluntarv 1 ,„ ^'''"'"? "' ^""''^^ of a -.e for value, and is nSoTe^^Sl; ^ST ^^ !hl wmntmts Of aroMiuo. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. SUGDEN ON POWERS. HONORS. Examiners :S^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL D (JiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,' LL.B. . 1. Name the different kind of powpr., wu . ■ given bj will called ? ^ ^' ^^^* ^^ a power Could such third partv be thf „„l f ""'?' '" l*^ °>"»i"'i» »- the right to 've'Zl'^??' ■'■"^^ "' -idenco are admissible prove handwriting ? to ^nt\)tvmp or Toronto. ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 1864. CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. TAYLOR ON EVIDENCE HONORS. JExaminersJ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL D (±iDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. does* rgtln/fciT^^^^^^^^^^ r^--' -d when secondarj evidence ? ^^"'' ^"^^ ^ P^^^J to give 2. In what case or cases are dyinff declaritmnQ „.i • -u, evidence is necessary of such promise ? ""'*^^'°"'' ^^^^ ^hat reft h iiirtr^y ? ^^'^0^1)::;? ^^^^t ^"-^<^ *^ trial or examination ? ^^''^ ^' produced at the 5. State some of the mutt^rl,} „7<. invalidate a written instrumen L thT^".' "l"""" "'" seeking to enforce it ? ""^ ^""^^ "^ "■ Party